JP2021045195A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine to be one embodiment of the present invention can execute start performance as a first time that an identifiable display mode in which a performance symbol 70a can be identified in all of a plurality of columns by variation start of the symbol and it can be identified that the performance symbol 70a is variably displayed and can execute stop performance by a second time that an identifiable display mode in which the performance symbol 70a can be identified in all of the plurality of columns and it can be identified that the performance symbol 70a is variably displayed and by a third time that a stop display mode in which the performance symbol 70a is stop displayed in all of the plurality of columns can be performed. In the second time that jackpot occurs, first performance and second performance as in Figure 51-1 are more likely to be executed than when the non-ready-to-win lose occurs.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 51-1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the variation effect of the effect symbol is displayed as an image based on the determination result. It is common to run it on a device.

In such a game machine, there are a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns of the effect symbol, and a variation effect of the effect symbol in the selected variation pattern is imaged by selecting from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result. It was displayed on a display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-018225

However, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the mode of the variable effect of the effect pattern, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

[Application example 1]
In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine of the application example 1 of the present application variablely displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). The effect control means includes an icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D), and the effect control means executes a variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) in a plurality of rows on the display means during the variation display of the symbol. In addition, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, it is possible to control the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, and when the symbol starts to fluctuate, all of the plurality of rows are displayed. It is possible to execute a recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) in which the effect symbol is recognizable and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed as the first time, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows in a period different from the first time, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In the second time in which the recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and in all of the plurality of rows, the effect symbol is displayed. The stop effect can be executed by the third time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) of the stop display can be executed, and the stop display mode is the stop display with the effect symbol different from the specific effect symbol. There are a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When the stop display mode is the second display mode, the first effect (variation) of the predetermined mode is performed during the execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, as compared with the case of the first display mode. End suggestion production, production diagram of Fig. 51-1 (Vibration of the pattern 70a, etc.) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect are easily executed, and in the variation effect, When the effect symbol is recognizable, the background image of the effect symbol can be produced (scrolled, changed, etc.), and the display image can be updated every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. The first time is started by reducing the hold memory by one due to the change of the symbol, and then the second hold display means displays the change to the execution information (from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area). When the hold storage increases during (movement to), the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means is reduced from the first storage number to the second storage number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area is next to it). Even before the frame update timing at which (moving to the center of the display unit) is completed, the hold storage displayed by the first hold display means changes from the second storage number to the first storage number. The increase display (update to the reserved number added by 1) is started, and the effect control means is a predetermined number (for example, 1) when the background image is performing the effect operation and the effect symbol can be recognized. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the second hold display means, which is three more than one), a signal for starting fluctuation of the symbol (hold number designation command, special symbol) in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the designated command (designated command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the second hold display means displays with a number (for example, three) one less than the specific number. The gist is that it is possible to display with a number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number, and then display with the predetermined number.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the one-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (change). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a central control unit. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the production example of the change effect at the time of winning. It is the timing chart 1 of the normal change pattern 01. FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of the normal change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of a normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 1 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 36. This is a timing chart in which the fluctuation effect is started from the waiting state for customers. It is a figure which shows the production example which starts the fluctuation effect from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 39. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect that the number of hold increases during the variable effect. It is a timing chart that the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is a figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the holding number decreases. This is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during a specific reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases / decreases before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 48. It is a figure explaining the transition of the display mode when it is displayed in the normal reach mode in the 1st display mode. It is a figure explaining the transition of the display mode when the SP reach effect is executed. It is a figure explaining the transition of the display mode when it is displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation end suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining another example of the fluctuation end suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the pseudo continuous production when it is displayed in the normal reach mode in the 1st display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the pseudo continuous production when it is displayed in the non-reach mode in the 1st display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the revival effect when the SP reach effect is executed. It is another example of the variation end suggestion effect, and is the figure explaining one example. It is another example of the variation end suggestion effect, and is the figure explaining one example. It is another example of the variation end suggestion effect, and is the figure explaining one example. It is another example of the variation end suggestion effect, and is the figure explaining one example. It is another example of the variation end suggestion effect, and is the figure explaining one example. It is another example of the variation end suggestion effect, and is the figure explaining one example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation end suggestion effect in the effect symbol 5470a. It is another example of the variation end suggestion effect, and is the figure explaining one example. It is a figure which illustrated the low probability fluctuation pattern table which is the fluctuation pattern table in a low probability game state. It is a figure which illustrated the high probability fluctuation pattern table which is the fluctuation pattern table in a high probability game state. It is a figure which illustrated the small hold fluctuation pattern table which is the fluctuation pattern table when the number of hold is small. It is a figure which illustrated the multi-hold fluctuation pattern table which is the fluctuation pattern table when the number of holds is large. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of each variation effect. It is a perspective view of the game machine 1P with the outer frame 10Z, the game board unit 12P, and the inner frame 14P open. It is a rear view of the game board unit 12P. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 12P. It is (a) perspective view, (b) rear view, (c) right side view of the assembly 2P. It is an exploded perspective view of the assembly 2P. It is a left side view which showed the state of assembling the substrate case 3P to the pedestal 20P. It is (a) perspective view, (b) rear view, (c) right side view of the substrate case 3P. It is an exploded perspective view of the substrate case 3P. It is (a) rear view and (b) front view of the sealing body 4P which combined the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P. It is a cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrow of the position corresponding to the line AA of FIG. 63 in the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1003 which concerns on the modification. It is a cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrow of the position corresponding to the line AA of FIG. 63 in the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1103 which concerns on the modification. It is a cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrow of the position corresponding to the line AA of FIG. 63 in the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1203 which concerns on the modification. It is a rear view of the substrate case 1303 which concerns on a modification. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 69 in the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1303. It is a rear view of the substrate case 1551 which concerns on a modification. It is a figure which shows the seal part 1561 and ROM 502 as seen from the angle which the seal part 1561 overlaps with the mounting place of ROM 502. It is a rear view of the substrate case 1700 which housed the control substrate 1705 which concerns on 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram explaining the configuration of the seal portion 1710, and (b) is a schematic diagram explaining the configuration of the date mark portion 1720. (A) is a schematic diagram explaining the configuration of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, and (b) is a schematic diagram explaining a state in which the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to the substrate case 1700. It is the schematic explaining the display structure of the information display 1750. It is a table explaining the content and display form displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the performance display of the game machine 1P. It is a table explaining the content and display form displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the setting display of the game machine 1P. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the identification display unit 1791 of the substrate case 1790 according to the modified example, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the identification display unit 1796 of the substrate case 1795 according to the modified example. It is a rear view of the board case 1803 which housed the control board 501 which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which looked at the electronic component 595 from diagonally above through the seal part 1560 and the seal part 1561. It is (a) plan view and (b) side view of the transparent socket 1801. It is a cross-sectional view (a)-(d) in the arrow direction of the position corresponding to line CC of FIG. 74-1 in the substrate case 1805 to 1808. It is sectional drawing (a), (b) in the arrow view direction of the substrate case 1809, 1810, the position corresponding to line CC of FIG. 74-1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the special position display part 541. It is explanatory drawing of one method which reduces the light transmittance of a seal part 1560. It is a schematic rear view of the case part 1813 which housed the prize ball substrate 1811. It is a schematic rear view of the case part 1823 which housed the production board 1821. It is an exploded perspective view of the assembly 2P, and the control board 501 is provided with the 1st region 1900a and the 2nd region 1900b. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the demo waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icon. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for an abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (change). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the alternative notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the lamp change effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the jackpot notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot notice decision table. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a central control unit. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the production example of the change effect at the time of winning. It is the timing chart 1 of the normal change pattern 01. FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of the normal change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of a normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 1 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 42. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 46. This is a timing chart in which the fluctuation effect is started from the waiting state for customers. It is a figure which shows the production example which starts the fluctuation effect from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 49. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect that the number of hold increases during the variable effect. It is a timing chart that the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is a figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the holding number decreases. This is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during a specific reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases / decreases before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 58. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is in the variable display of a special symbol, and there is a hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the power-on time command (power-on designation command, power-rest recovery designation command) could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the deformation example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 84. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 86. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is in the variable display of a special symbol, and there is a hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of not being able to receive a power-on-time command (power-on designation command, power-restoration designation command) normally at power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 1. It is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an effect example 1 at various timings of the timing chart 2. It is a production example 2 at various timings of the timing chart 2. It is a timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an effect example 1 at various timings of the timing chart 3. It is a production example 2 at various timings of the timing chart 3. It is a timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 4. It is a timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 5. It is a timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 6. It is a timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 7. It is a timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 8. This is a modification 1 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 2 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 3 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 4 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 5 when the command cannot be received normally.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of game machine)
First, the configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100, which will be described later. The upper saucer 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, the lower saucer 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper saucer 11, and the game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the effect of lighting is performed by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper saucer 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later are provided. It is installed side by side.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) having a button drive motor for moving the 17 in the vertical direction is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is connected to a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

Further, a lending / returning operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided in a portion to the right of the upper tray 11. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the game machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game ball. Is performed, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for receiving a game ball that does not fit in the upper saucer 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower saucer 12 is formed between the upper saucer 11 and the lower saucer 12. Further, in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the game ball is full is provided in the lower saucer 12, and the lower saucer 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. Is detected, the payout of the game ball by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the player's hand are touching the launch handle 15. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) composed of a 15a (see FIG. 2) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes a front side portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been done. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode. Further, at the front end of the handle light emitting device 15c, a blower port 15d is provided as a blowout port for the wind (air) sent out from the blower device 21 described later.

On the back surface side of the glass frame 4, a blower 21 for sending out wind (air) in a predetermined manner is provided at a position corresponding to the launch operation device 13. The blower 21 includes a blower unit (not shown) for blowing out air (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower part, and the air blown out by the blower part (air). ) Is sent from the air outlet 15d to the player's hand through the base 14 of the launch operation device 13 and the inside of the handle light emitting device 15c. By operating the blower device 21, it is possible to execute a blower effect of blowing wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player who is operating the firing handle 15.

The blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the launch operation device 13, but is provided around the decorative plate 2b of the outer frame 2 or the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4, and the wind (air) is directed toward the player. ) May be sent out. Further, a plurality of blower devices 21 may be provided.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and a game board mounting frame 3. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in the closed state and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The game ball launching device 26 includes a launching member 28 for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the launching member 28, and the launching member 28 toward the lower left portion of the game board. A launch rail 29 that inclines up and down, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a launch position that is the lower end of the incline of the launch rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guiding member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At substantially the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, on the side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced inside the vehicle is rolled and flows down below the decorative frame 40.

At the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and these general winning openings are provided. When the game balls that have won (winned) in 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the upper saucer 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 (normal map starting area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball passing through the normal map gate 44 is provided. When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45 (special drawing starting area) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, on which a game ball can always win a prize (winning ball), and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the winning game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are received from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Immediately below the first starting port 45, the game ball is in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for winning a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (ball winning) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 has a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) where the game ball can win (winning) and a second detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that converts (variable) the second start port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second start port open / close solenoid for opening / closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) is provided. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball winning (winning) in the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It is designed to be paid out to the upper saucer 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal map gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit lottery of a special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided that converts the (basic mode) into an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50 (FIG. 2), an opening / closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51. Then, when the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are received from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It will be paid out to 11.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A second starting port detection switch 47a and a winning ball flow path 52 (not shown) are provided to receive and collect the game balls detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a and allow them to flow down.

Further, in the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a (see FIG. 2) for detecting a game ball that has flowed down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches is provided. The winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects the game ball again after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the large winning opening detection switch 50a. Therefore, it is used to determine whether the winning is proper (winning) or abnormal (winning).

On the outside of the game area 5a, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold indicator 63, and a second special Symbol hold display 64, and. A hold display device consisting of a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, and a jackpot game (special game) described later. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a during the game state) or the time-saving game state is provided.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is a variable display, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is a jackpot judgment random value and a jackpot that are acquired by acquiring a jackpot judgment random number value (judgment information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol display 60 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Be told. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The big hit lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit judgment random value and a big hit by acquiring a big hit judgment random value etc. (judgment information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the big hit lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Be told. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. To do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, lost mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a big hit game (special game state) in the big hit lottery of the first special symbol (special game judgment) or the big hit lottery of the second special symbol (special game judgment). It refers to the state in which the right to execute is acquired. The "big hit game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are opened in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game state)" is an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage to the player can be generated, which will be described in detail later.

In the hit lottery of the ordinary symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the hit judgment random value is acquired, and the acquired hit judgment random value is compared with the hit judgment value to be "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not. When the winning lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed, the ordinary symbol display 62 performs a variable display of the ordinary symbols, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a stop display of the ordinary symbols indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (winning mode or losing mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of a normal symbol. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the hit game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 is used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variation display is easily satisfied). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hit games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (of the first special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing (variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first reserved storage. It should be noted that the first hold storage is stored up to four, but may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol (of the second special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing (variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reserved storage. The maximum number of the second hold storages is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol that is stored when the game ball wins (passes) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Public figure hold storage), and lights up or blinks in a mode indicating the number of normal figure hold memory. It should be noted that although the maximum number of memory reserved for normal figures is four, it may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the big hit lottery of a special symbol, "7" will be stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it will be turned off and "-" will be displayed. It is good to repeat. Before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when the variation display starts, the variation display can be displayed by starting from turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand that it has started.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the production space 40a, and is below the production space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided, and a character's face is above the effect space 40a. A movable effect member 73Z that imitates the above is provided.
In the present embodiment, the "first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)" and the "second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal)" may be collectively referred to as an "image display device".

The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demonstration effect that is executed when the special symbol variation display is not performed, a variation display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed when the special symbol variation display is performed, and a notice by a character. There is a production etc.

Further, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving with the device 75 (see FIG. 2).

Specifically, the standby position (first position) located near the end (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the center side (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving (raising, descending) in the vertical direction to and from the effect position (second position) located at. The movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

Further, in the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), three rows of variable display areas such as a left side area, a central area, and a right side area are formed, and each variable display area has three columns of variable display areas. By scrolling the displayed effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. Corresponding to (synchronizing with), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. That is, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to the symbol indicating a number.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular production symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is another mode. is there. The mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as reach effects, background images, characters, and movies are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By displaying the image on the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot (special game state) (hereinafter referred to as "big hit winning expectation") is increased.

Here, the reach effect gives the player a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot, such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), two effect symbols 70a are set in the left side area and the right side area. 7 ”is a mode in which the remaining effect symbol 70a is fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped.

The "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not) says the aspect.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect".

The "normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a is in the center area. It is a fluctuating reach production.

The "SP reach effect" is a movie (movie) that has a longer time than the movie related to the normal reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuating in the center area. , Animation, etc.) is a reach production.

"SPSP reach effect" is a longer time (feature) than the movie related to SP reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuating in the center area. It is a reach production in which the movie (movie, animation, etc.) of is played.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed with all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot. In the present embodiment, it is a reach effect that is executed only when the jackpot lottery is won.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation related to the reach production is higher in the order of normal reach production <SP reach production <SPSP reach production <full rotation reach production (big hit confirmed).

Further, in order to display the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the current number of first hold storages, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 1st hold icon display area 70B and 2nd hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of 2nd hold icons corresponding to the current number of 2nd hold storages (U2). The icon display area 70C for displaying the (related) icon corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) is displayed. That is, the number of the first hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays 2 The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory is displayed thirdly, and the change display of the first special symbol is executed thirdly on the third display unit 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Will be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the like. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2). That is, the number of the second hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of the second special symbol hold (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2 The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory is displayed secondly to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, and the third display unit 70D3 executes the variable display of the second special symbol third. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold memory on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "first hold number" and the "second special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "second hold number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). When the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first hold icon", the "second hold icon", and the "corresponding icon" may be collectively referred to as an "icon".

The movable effect member 73Z emits light by the panel lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like) during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, and it is possible to perform a movement effect by moving by a panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2) composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like.

Specifically, the light emission effect is performed by emitting light from a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like) in a predetermined light emission color according to the progress state of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Further, it is located at a standby position (first position) located near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and near the center (lower side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving (raising, descending) in the vertical direction to and from the effect position (second position). It should be noted that the effect may be configured to perform a light emission effect or a movement effect by operating the effect button 17.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, from a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, etc. A main control device 110A (not shown) incorporating a game ball storage unit 101 (not shown) that stores the supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control board 110 that collectively controls the progress of the game. ), A payout control device 120A (not shown) having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the game ball payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and an effect control command from the main control board 110. The effect control device 130A (not shown) with a built-in effect control board 130 that controls the effect according to the above, and the power supply device 160A (not shown) with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices. , A game information output terminal plate 90 (see FIG. 2) for outputting game information (game signal) is provided outside the game machine.

(Control configuration of game machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the game machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the entire game machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with a chip microcomputer 110 m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling devices (various solenoids and various displays). The device) is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning port detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting port detection switch 45a, a second starting port detection switch 47a, a large winning port detection switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detection switch 52a. , The magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RAM clear switch 55a, the payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 has a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, and a first special. The symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, the normal symbol hold indicator 65, the round number indicator 66, the right-handed indicator 67, the game information output terminal board 90, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. Has been done. A game that notifies the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) from the drive control signal for controlling various solenoids, the display control signal for controlling various indicators, and the game information output terminal board via the output port. Information etc. is output.

The payout control board 120 is a secondary control board that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and performs a calculation process related to the payout of the game ball. The 100 is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. Etc. are connected, and the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a controls the payout. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control of paying out the game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the launch volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch intensity is set according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. The solenoid 28b is driven to launch a game ball.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the game ball is launched in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a sub-control board (sub-control means) that controls the effect (performed by the game machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130 m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main). Display / sound control unit 140 that controls the liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the sound output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the blower device. It includes a lamp / drive control unit 150 that controls the 21 and the panel lighting device 76, the panel drive device 75, and the like, and an input port, an output port, and the like for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. Control is performed to cause various control units (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150). Output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display / voice control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. Or control the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display / audio control unit 140 includes a centralized CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 143 that stores an integrated control program, an integrated control unit 141 that has a centralized RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP as an image processor ( An image control unit 145 composed of a Video Display Processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. It includes a VRAM 147, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored, an input / output port and the like.

The control CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the control ROM 143, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the control RAM 144 as a work area, and receives the message from the effect control unit 130 m. The image control unit 145 and the voice control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are output) in response to the effect instruction command and the like.

The general ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for this are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method. , The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) include various information such as a duty ratio as a parameter of brightness.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and is stored in the CGROM 146 and commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142). The drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the image data. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image and a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol. , Character image, and material data representing individual images such as dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub). It has a frame buffer area and the like corresponding to the liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) uses the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 as a "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142). The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the image control unit 145 (VDP) from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Further, a general-purpose image data is converted into a predetermined image format and output between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The board 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) for displaying image data and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The voice control unit 148 is connected to the voice output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 2 Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The lamp / drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the effect from the effect control unit 130 m. In response to the received effect instruction command or the like, the controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices is controlled to perform a predetermined effect (data and commands are output).

A frame lighting device 10, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button driving device 17b, a blower 21, and a panel lighting device 76 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit, and the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). ), Based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, and the panel lighting device 76 is performed to perform light emitting effect and the like. Alternatively, an operation effect (the above-mentioned movement effect) or the like is performed by controlling the drive of a drive source such as a button drive device 17b, a blower device 21, and a motor or a solenoid of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and uses the main power supply as the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, It is supplied to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. Note that the backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state" as states relating to the jackpot lottery of special symbols, and a "non-time saving game" as a state relating to the movable member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47. It has a "state" and a "time saving game state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving game state that is "low-probability game state" and "non-time-saving game state" (2) Low-probability time-saving game state that is "low-probability game state" and "time-saving game state" (3) " High-probability time-saving game state that is both "high-probability game state" and "time-saving game state"

The game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the game machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving game state", and this game state is set to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. I will call it. In the present embodiment, the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" may be referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ..

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" is a jackpot in a special symbol jackpot lottery conducted on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. It refers to a gaming state in which the winning probability is set as low as 1/299, for example. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as, for example, 1 / 59.8. .. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" is a change in the average of the ordinary symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the ordinary symbols performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44. It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time saving game state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winner is won is set short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is successful, the second starting port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. A gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving game state". Say. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example 127. It is set as high as / 128. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advance the game advantageously without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. Is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. .. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of the normal symbol may be, for example, 0/128.

(Type of jackpot)
Next, the types of jackpots will be described.

In the present embodiment, "first jackpot", "second jackpot" and "third jackpot" are selected as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45. It has "first jackpot" and "second jackpot" as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47.

The "first big hit" is to execute the first big hit game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds up to 10 times. It's a big hit. In the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first big hit game, the high-accuracy time-short game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

The "second jackpot" is a jackpot that executes a second jackpot game that executes a round game up to 10 times. After the end of the second big hit game, the low-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" is a jackpot that executes a third jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third big hit game, the high-accuracy time-short game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

It should be noted that the number of variable display times (in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times and 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the big hit game is referred to as "high probability It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the type is not limited to three, and may be less than or more than three. Further, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds for any big hit (first big hit to third big hit), but the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds, and it depends on the round game. It may have different opening times.

(Type of hit)
Next, the types of hits will be described.

In the present embodiment, there are "first hit" and "second hit" as the types of hits that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the normal drawing gate 44, and the winning lottery is executed. If the gaming state at the time of being played is a non-time-saving gaming state, it is a "first hit", and if the gaming state when the winning lottery is executed is a time-saving gaming state, it is a "second hit".

The "first hit" is a hit in which the first hit game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds is executed. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second hit" is a hit in which the second start opening 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. .. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first hit game and the second hit game, the hit game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

In this way, in the "time-saving game state", the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 47, and the player has an advantage in the game without consuming the game ball as compared with the "non-time-saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the game machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initialization process in step S10. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the startup program is read from the main ROM 110b, and the flag stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random value, and in step S30, the jackpot determination Initial value random value update processing is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S40. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if no power failure detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S20 to detect the power failure. If a signal is input, the process proceeds to step S41.

In step S41, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, performs processing for clearing the output port in step S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S43, and stores a predetermined value. The process of storing in the area is performed, in step S44, the process of turning on the backup flag to be referred to when recovering from the power failure is performed, and in step S45, the process of prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off. Wait until it hangs down.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as the update process of the special symbol time counter, the opening time of the special electric accessory, and the like. Time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, and a start port close timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value, the hit determination random number value, the normal symbol determination random number value, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update the random number value. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. Initial value to be performed The random number value is set as a new lap initial value and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination in step S130, as in step S30. Initial value to be updated Random value Update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a gate detection switch 44a, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and if there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a controls the special symbol memory determination (big hit determination, etc.), the display control of the special symbol, the opening / closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), the game state control, and the like. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol memory control process for performing normal symbol memory determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening / closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. ..

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10 prize ball counter and the 15 prize ball counter), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality, and specifies a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. Performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic anomaly error designation command or the radio wave abnormality error designation command, the effect control board 130 performs control for performing the magnetic abnormality error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, start port opening / closing data output to the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening opening / closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and Data creation processing is performed to create data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the second special symbol hold indicator 64 and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold indicator 65.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , Special symbol hold display data, display output process to output signals such as normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission process to send the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Or, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no input of the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating 10 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (10 prize ball counter) for the general winning opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and then the general winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. In this large winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the large winning opening 50. If there is no input of the detection signal from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the large prize opening used for the prize balls. Update and update (D ← D + 1) by adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening, and whether or not the current gaming state is in the special gaming state. Is determined. When the current game state is in the special game state, "1" is added to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls won in the large winning opening 50 and updated (C ← C + 1). , The big winning opening detection switch input processing is finished.

If the current game state is not in the special game state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. "1" is added to the counter (E) and updated (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number (for example, 10), and the illegal winning is won. If the value of the ball counters (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, it is assumed that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which the game ball wins (winning) outside the winning period, and an error for illegal winning is specified. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies that the illegal winning error has occurred to notify that the illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect a large winning opening. The switch input process ends. As a result, the illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (identify) that the illegal winning has occurred in the external device.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process. In this second start port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 6 to be described later is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the gate detection switch input process in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal figure hold storage, which is the number of normal figure hold storage stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved figures is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is less than 4, the number of reserved figures is updated by adding "1", and the random value for hit judgment, the random value for determining the normal symbol, and the random value for determining the variation pattern of the ordinary figure are updated. Acquired, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, the acquired random number value is stored in the vacant storage unit, and the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs the winning confirmation detection switch input process. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52. If the detection signal is not input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the winning ball counter (D) is subtracted by "1" and updated (D ← D-1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) is the upper limit value (D). For example, it is determined whether or not it is within the range of 20) and the lower limit value (for example, -10).

If the value of the winning ball counter (D) does not fall within the range between the upper limit value and the lower limit value, it is assumed that an abnormal winning (winning ball) has occurred and an error designation command for abnormal winning is sent to the transmission data storage area for production. Set, set the external information data (output data) for outputting the abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, clear the winning ball counter (D), and clear the winning confirmation detection switch. End the input process. The sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning is notified of the abnormal winning error to notify that the abnormal winning has occurred.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process shifts to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the present first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and in step S230-3, winning a prize in the winning opening (in step S230-3). "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls (D) to update (D ← D + 1).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), which is the number of first reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, is less than four. .. If the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time is performed. Mouth detection switch Ends input processing.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (U1) is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires special figure determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value), and the first special The vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the vacant storage unit.

As described above, the special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, and special symbol variation pattern determination) is stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The first hold storage consisting of random values, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure judgment information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol based on the judgment information is performed. Judgment is made, and the scheduled fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process of step S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for production, and this time. The first start port detection switch input process of the above is terminated.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start port prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start port prize designation command receives the first start port prize. The designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined notice effect is produced over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before or before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start opening winning designated command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is performed by using one or a plurality of the image display device, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect member 73Z, and the board lighting device 76.

Regarding the second start port detection switch input process, the first start port detection switch 45a, the first special symbol hold storage area, the first hold storage, the first special symbol hold number (U1), and the first special symbol storage designation. The command, the first pre-judgment process, and the first start port winning designation command are executed by the second start port detection switch 47a, the second special symbol hold storage area, the second hold storage, the second special symbol hold number (U2), and the second, respectively. 2 It may be read as a special symbol memory designation command, a second pre-judgment process, and a second start opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special electric processing data = 0. The process is transferred to the determination process (step S310), the process is transferred to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special figure special electric processing data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step) if the special figure special electric process data = 2. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process is transferred to the big hit game end process (step S350). Move.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. ..

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a jackpot, determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol hold number (U2) is "1" or more, and when the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not "1" or more. In, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0"). Determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the change display of the special symbol and the start of the customer waiting state in which the jackpot game is not executed is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, the customer waiting state specification command is set in the transmission data storage area for production, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. If the customer waiting status determination flag is not "0" after the current special symbol memory determination processing is completed, it is assumed that the customer waiting status has already started, and the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. This special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

When the number of 2nd special symbol reservations (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, and then the second special symbol reservation storage area is stored. Various random value values (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to the fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the number corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) after subtraction is the first. 2 Set the special symbol memory specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the special symbol determination random value among various random number values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the current probability. Based on the gaming state (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state), it is determined whether the jackpot game is a "big hit" or a "loss".

On the other hand, when the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol hold number (U1) is "1" or more, the first special symbol hold storage area is stored. After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random value stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) after subtraction is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the special symbol determination random value among various random number values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, and the current probability. Based on the gaming state (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state), it is determined whether the jackpot game is a "big hit" or a "loss".

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The jackpot special symbol or the loss special symbol is determined based on the random value for the jackpot symbol, and the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage unit is used. A special symbol (big hit special symbol, lost special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the special symbol fluctuation random value, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter to obtain the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the corresponding variation pattern specification command in the production transmission data storage area.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random value and the random value for special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set. Set the specified command in the transmission data storage area for production.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets the variation display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED) in the predetermined processing area. ..

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. The variable display of the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is performed.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing this time is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process for determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 1.

When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol determined in step S310 is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to stop and display the jackpot special symbol or the lost special symbol. , Set the predetermined special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the determination result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the special symbol variation processing this time is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process for determining whether or not the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of time reductions> 0, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction counter to update, when the number of time reductions = 0, the time reduction game flag is cleared, and when the number of high probability times> 0, it is high. It is updated by subtracting 1 from the probability count counter, and when the high probability count = 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a jackpot special symbol, the time saving game flag, the high probability game flag, the time saving number counter, and the high probability number counter are cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to the special figure special electric processing data = 3 are set. Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the special symbol stop processing this time is completed.

On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol memory determination processing, and this special symbol stop processing is performed. To finish.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a is for executing the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310. Perform jackpot game processing.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 according to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the drive data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening / closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game count (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (win) during this opening, or when the opening time of the large winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), the large The output of the drive data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening / closing member 51. As a result, one round game is completed. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the predetermined number of round games (4 times or 16 times in the present embodiment) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 To the special figure special electric processing data = 4, prepare to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and end the jackpot game processing this time.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines the probability gaming state of either the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state, and also determines the gaming state of either the time-saving gaming state or the non-time-saving gaming state. Performs jackpot game end processing.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number of times, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the time saving number of times are performed. Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to the special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol memory determination processing, and the current jackpot game end processing is completed.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

When the value stored in the first special symbol storage number (U1) storage area increases or decreases, this first special symbol storage designation command holds the memory after the increase or decrease in step S230-11 or step S310. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

When the value stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is increased or decreased, the second special symbol storage designation command is set to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease in step S240 or step S310. The corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "special symbol memory designation command".

The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. If it is the first special symbol, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and if it is the second special symbol, "MODE". Is set in "E2H", and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot ends, the effect symbol designation command can be said to indicate the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot ends. ..

In this effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol in step S310 is the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Is set to, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, "MODE" is set to "E3H", and various variations are made. DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is a first special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in step S310 when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol display 60 is started. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, "MODE" is set to "E4H", and various variations are made. DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command is a second special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in step S310 when the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol display 61 is started. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "variation pattern designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "00H".

In this special symbol confirmation command, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, the special symbol confirmation command is the transmission data for the effect of the main RAM 110c in the above step S320. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "01H".

In this normal symbol confirmation command, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62 and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol confirmation command is the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. Is set to, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "starting opening winning designation command" is information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance, and if it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45, "MODE". Is set with "E6H", and if it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set with "E7H", and DATA information is set according to various winning information. There is.

When the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting opening 47, this starting opening winning designation command corresponds to the starting opening winning information in the above steps S230-10 or S240. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "big hit opening designation command" indicates that various jackpot games (special game states) are started, "MODE" is set to "E8H", and DATA information is displayed according to the type of jackpot game. It is set.

In this jackpot opening designation command, when various jackpot games are started, the jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330, and step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

In this round designation command, when the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and the output control process of step S800 is performed. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "big hit ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have been completed, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot game.

In this jackpot ending designation command, when various jackpot games are completed, the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of.

The "ordinary symbol storage specification command" indicates the number of pending storages stored in the ordinary symbol retention number (G1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "ECH", and DATA is set according to the number of reserved symbols. Information is set.

When the value stored in the normal symbol storage number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, this normal symbol storage designation command corresponds to the number of reserved symbols after the increase or decrease in step S250 or step S400. The storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, "MODE" is set to "EDH", and DATA information is displayed according to the type of the ordinary symbol. It is set.

In this normal symbol designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the normal symbol in the above step S400 is the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 110c. Is set to, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol fluctuation designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, "MODE" is set to "EEH", and DATA information is set according to the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols. Is set.

In this normal symbol fluctuation designation command, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. , Will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "hit opening designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are started, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

In this hit opening designation command, when the auxiliary game is started, the hit opening designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and in step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

The "hit ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games have been completed, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

In this hit ending designation command, when various auxiliary games are completed, the hit ending designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and the step It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state and whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state. "MODE" is set to "F0H", and "MODE" is set to "F0H" and " "DATA" is set.

This game state designation command enters the game state in step S310, step S330, and step S350 at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the end of fluctuation of the special symbol (at the start of the jackpot game), and at the end of the jackpot. The corresponding game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power recovery designation command" indicate whether or not the power-on to the game machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the "MODE" is "F1H". If it is set and the main RAM 110c is initialized, "DATA" is set to "00H", and if the main RAM 110c is not initialized, "DATA" is set to "01H to 03H".

The power-on designation command and the power-on recovery command are the power-on designation commands corresponding to the presence / absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c and the game state in step S10 when the power is turned on to the game machine 1. Alternatively, a power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state is set in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. "MODE" is set to "F1H" and DATA is set to "04H". ing.

This customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above step S310 when the customer waiting state in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed is performed, and in the output control process of the step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the game machine 1, "MODE" is set to "F2H", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

This error designation command is used when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality is determined in the magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process of step S600, or when the occurrence of an abnormal prize is determined in the prize confirmation detection switch input process of step S260. When the occurrence of an illegal winning is determined in the large winning opening detection switch input processing in step S220 or the second starting opening detection switch input processing in step S240, the error designation command corresponding to the error type is the main RAM 110c. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the above, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

Further, when the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is opened, the lower tray 12 is full, or the payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board 120, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is transmitted for the effect of the payout RAM 121c. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120.

The "error cancellation specification command" indicates that the error that occurred in the game machine 1 has been resolved, and "MODE" is set to "F2H", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.

When the payout control board 120 detects that the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are closed, the lower tray 12 is full, and the payout abnormality is cleared, this error cancellation designation command is used as the type of error that has been resolved. The corresponding error release designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120.

(Main processing of production control unit 130m)
Next, the main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130 m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

In step E10, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interruption, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step E30, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption, and in step E40, performs a sub random number update process. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs the input control process in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in step E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. Do.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing a power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The power-on sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power recovery designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing a power failure recovery notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The power recovery sound is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, the customer waiting effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 20 seconds). Perform the process to do. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , A customer waiting demo sound is output from the voice output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state specification command is being received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is being received is performed. Do.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold information update process in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is being received, and if so, the command is stored in the sub RAM 130c. 1 Performs a process of updating the number of special symbol reservations, the number of second special symbol reservations, the number of ordinary symbol reservations, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon change effect processing in step E500. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, processing related to the icon change effect is performed.

The icon change effect is a type of hold icon and a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display mode of the icon. The details will be described later, but the timing and change mode (normal change, symbol action change, and character) are changed. Multiple types of action change) are set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect", and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect".

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs the special figure special electric effect effect processing. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command, the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the special symbol confirmation command, the jackpot opening designation command, the round designation command, the jackpot ending designation command, etc., with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, etc. Is received, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs the Fuzu Fuden effect processing. Specifically, whether or not the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is used to receive the normal figure designation command, the normal figure variation designation command, the normal symbol confirmation command, the hit opening designation command, the hit ending designation command, and the like. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and when the command is received, a process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not an error specification command or an error release specification command is being received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command is produced. Performs processing for executing, and processing for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E900. Specifically, it performs processing such as outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150. ..

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a returns the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Icon change effect processing of the effect control unit 130 m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for updating (changing) the display mode of the already displayed icon (hold icon and the icon), and ends the current icon change effect processing. To do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination process of effect control unit 130 m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start opening winning designation command has been received. When the start opening prize designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the start opening prize designation command is not received, the icon change effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is moved to step E510-4, and if it is not the feasible period of the icon change effect, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

The executable period of the icon change effect is when the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed.
It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, the conditions may be different from the above three conditions.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a has all the pre-determination results of the advance hold (holding memory corresponding to the start opening winning designation command received earlier) equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, all the advance determination results of the advance hold are normally changed. Judge whether it is shortened fluctuation or normal reach. If all are below the normal reach, the process is transferred to step E510-5, and if all are not below the normal reach, the process is transferred to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 14) for determining the icon final display mode. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, and is among a plurality of icon final display modes based on the start opening winning designation command and the icon display mode determination random value. The final display mode of one icon is determined from.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (CD icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the display mode is such that the icon change effect is executed, the process is transferred to step E510-10, and if the display mode is not such that the icon change effect is executed, the process is transferred to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 15) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 15, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode and the selection rate.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the icon change effect determination process this time is completed. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is the first. It will be displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / sound control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed as the first image. It will be displayed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal) or a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the prior determination results of the advance hold are equal to or less than the normal reach. , The icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the advance hold does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the pre-judgment result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the pre-determination result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect. The icon change effect may be more easily executed (executed at a higher rate) when there is no icon change effect than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the type of the start opening winning designation command, the random value for determining the icon display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. A random number value for determining the icon display mode is assigned so as to be.

The final display mode of the icon includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit (a big hit game is executed), a red character icon, and a rainbow character. The icon is set.

The jackpot winning expectation for the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is confirmed to be a jackpot. ..

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is different depending on the effect content. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the production content is specific start winning information indicating that the production content is SP reach or SPSP reach, the production content is a normal variation, a shortened variation, or a normal reach that does not reach the reach. Character icons are selected at a higher rate than in the case of the normal start winning information shown.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the CD icon is not selected as the icon final display mode when it is a big hit, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be selected. For reference, the preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and the update mode in the fluctuations are described.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command. That is, the "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and an icon display mode that changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the variation (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table with the judgment factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed. You may decide the scenario to be made. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is higher than that during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Icon display mode update process for the production control unit 130m)
The icon display mode update process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an icon display mode update process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, whether or not there is a hold icon for changing (updating) the display mode. Is determined. If there is a hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-4, and if there is no hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 17) for the hold icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 17, among the plurality of hold icon change patterns, based on the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). Determines one hold icon change pattern from.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command according to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and according to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon for changing the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-8, and if there is no icon for changing the display mode, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a is selected from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation effect. A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 18 and 19) for the icon according to the change stage in which the icon changes is selected. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-9. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the icon shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 19, a plurality of the relevant icons are based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selectivity (%). One icon change pattern is determined from the icon change patterns.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. Therefore, the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the hold icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern for the hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of change of the hold icon in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the type of the selected hold icon change pattern. As a reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect (at the start of fluctuation) when the hold icon is shifted and displayed according to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during fluctuation with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character as the character appears is performed to display the icon. The character action change pattern 01 whose mode changes and the change notification symbol (special symbol) indicating that the icon display mode changes as a result of the variation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the change notification symbol acts on the hold icon as a starting point. A symbol action change pattern 01 is set in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by performing the action effect.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the hold icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode that is two levels higher.

The timing for generating the change effect of the hold icon is the above three timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
18 and 19 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 18 is a diagram in which the display mode of the icon is changed by one step. It is a table referred to in the case, and FIG. 19 is a table referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the type of the selected icon change pattern. As a reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the fluctuation with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change in the display mode of the hold icon during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon by performing an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character as the character appears are set.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the start of the change) and when the change effect is being executed (during the change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the icon, 1 UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be possible to select it. For example, in the variation effect in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the pseudo variation is performed.

Pseudo-continuous production means that the jackpot judgment based on winning a prize (ball winning) at one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) is executed as if the change display of the effect symbol is performed multiple times. In order to make it look as if it was done, all the productions within the special figure fluctuation time determined for the winning (ball winning) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) This is a variation display of the effect symbol in a special mode in which the re-variation display that starts the variation again after the symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is the above-mentioned two timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Relationship between hold icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 20A is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the hold icon and the occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change effect than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. ing.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is more when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting higher.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is more when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a red character icon. The predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins a prize at the start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) and a hold icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing of the change, and the normal change pattern 01.
Further, the change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command are the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command is the predetermined command. Since the frequency of change effects that change to the red character icon, which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the frame update timing according to the reception of, is high, the player can be made to pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, since the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command occurs more frequently than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command, the change effect that changes to the blue character icon occurs, so that the variation effect is early. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a big hit, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to the subsequent fluctuation production and improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 1)
FIG. 20B is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to pull the expectation of the jackpot game of the person for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 2)
FIG. 20C is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing and the change effect occurrence frequency 2.

When a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the icon is likely to change at a later time of the change effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by pulling the expectation of the jackpot game of the person until the late period of the variable production.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 20D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generation notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when the hold icon and the blue character icon are generated as the icon (when changed to), When the second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (change), and the hold icon and the red character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the icon is generated (when it changes to). When the third generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of change) and the icon changes to the rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. Is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the generated notification sound when the CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon. , And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, or when a CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and only when the icon changes to any mode, the notification sound is output. It may be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided to make three types.

(Main processing of the overall control unit 141)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the control CPU 142, and the control CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the integrated CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the centralized ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the centralized RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step T3, the centralized CPU 142 sets interrupt permission for permitting timer interrupts, and in step T4, determines whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130 m with reference to the receive buffer of the integrated RAM 144. If it is determined and not received, the process is moved to step T7, and if it is received, the animation pattern is determined and set from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command in step T5. Performs animation pattern setting processing.

Examples of the effect instruction command include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, and an ending effect pattern command.

The animation group is the type of object that constitutes the production image, the scene (timing) and weight frame (display time) at which the production image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that specifies (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the production image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by being done.

The types of animation groups include, for example, an effect symbol group for displaying the animation of the effect symbol 70a, an icon group for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the icon, and a variable effect animation such as a background and a character. Examples include a variable production group, a notice production group for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a special game production group for displaying an animation of a special game production.

In step T6, the general CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing (drawing a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is moved to step T4 and the frame switching flag is set. If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the control CPU 142 generates a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and performs display list generation / output processing for outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and is one unit. Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control process described later, a drawing control command is set for each set animation pattern according to the contents of the animation scene information. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group having the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group having the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set to the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the control CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and draws the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer into the first image display device. A process of displaying on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

In step T11, the general CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of sound control command groups, and performs sound list generation / output processing for outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when outputting a new sound. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the control CPU 142 performs a sound output command process for instructing the voice control unit 148 to output a sound based on the sound list output. By performing this sound output command processing, the voice control unit 148 outputs a sound based on the sound list from the voice output device 9.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, but the audio output device 9 outputs various sounds so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. May be stopped and vice versa.

In step T13, the general CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. After that, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, and the command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m.

In step T20, the control CPU 142 performs a command reception process for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m in the reception buffer of the control RAM 144 is performed, and the command reception interrupt process this time is completed.

(V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the V-blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141, and the V-blank interrupt processing ends the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (second = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

In step T30, the general CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating (for example, adding “1”) a predetermined number of various counters (scene switching counter, weight frame counter, frame counter, etc.), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( A frame buffer switching command process for instructing the VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 is performed.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer". It will switch alternately to and.

In step T32, the control CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change effect at the time of winning)
24 and 25 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 45.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to display the display mode of the first hold icon with the blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 gives the second generation notification sound. Output is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, the drawing of the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronically), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production change at the time of winning)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. Normally, a variable effect is executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 45, a start port prize designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130 m, and the icon change effect determination process is executed, as a change scenario. It is assumed that "scenario 02" (display mode of the first hold icon is displayed by a blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 26B, the first hold icon (blue character) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 45. Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second generation notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26C, stop display is performed in a combination (here, “234”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, so that the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the fluctuation effect. The same applies to the following FIGS. 29, 32, 33, 36, and 37.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
27 and 28 show timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 that changes the first hold icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation occurs from the sound output device 9. The output of the notification sound is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variation effect (the timing at which the variation effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images (images, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character) is displayed on the image display device. (Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronically), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an effect example when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (shift).

As shown in FIG. 29A, when the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29B, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 is started. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon. In addition, the CD icon is changed to the blue character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, "164") indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, so that the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
30 and 31 show timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process, and various timings when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has determined to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon TH to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the character or the like, and the sound is heard. The output of the third generation notification sound from the output device 9 is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the image display device normally displays the variable effect display screen d (character display), but the sound output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound. Not started.

The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the image display device normally displays the variable effect display screen e (character display), but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of an image, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the image display device is displayed on the normal variable effect display screen j (red character). (Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of production of character action change pattern 01)
32 and 33 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character action change pattern 01) during the variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. The normal fluctuation effect to be made is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), after the character C1 is displayed (see FIG. 32 (b)), the character C1 performs a throwing kiss operation to direct the heart H toward the icon (CD icon) TH. The production of skipping is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the voice output device 9 sets the third generation notification sound. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of symbol action change pattern 01)
34 and 35 show various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the change symbol or the like, and the voice output device 9 The output of the third generation notification sound is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is performed in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed is started on the image display device, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. The output does not start.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 notifies the third occurrence. Sound output is started. The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol image, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen i (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is displayed. Output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen k (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
36 and 37 are diagrams showing an effect example when the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the red character icon (design action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in a state where the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the effect symbol 70a is varied and displayed. The production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left fluctuation display area, "3" in the right fluctuation display area, and "change" in the center fluctuation display area is stopped and displayed (provisional). An effect like a lightning bolt appears toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 from the change symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the variable display area in the center (stop display). Upon hitting, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the sound output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command (starting port winning designation command or variation pattern designation command). Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by increasing the variation of the change effect. Become.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and the scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, but the present invention is not limited to such a determination method. .. For example, it may be decided whether or not to change the display mode each time the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes is the timing at which the display mode of the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) can be changed. When it becomes, it may be decided each time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the icons (corresponding icon, hold icon) are 4 as a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon. Although it was a type, it is not limited to four types, and may be many or few.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided, which has a lower expectation of winning a jackpot than the blue character icon and may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (after receiving the change pattern specification command) It is desirable not to change to a special icon in the change effect) that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing. By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), which are likely to change to a display mode with a high expectation of winning a big hit. Since it will not change to a special icon due to the change effect that occurs in (), it is possible to increase the variation of the icon display mode while preventing the player from being discouraged, and to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the above special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon in this order. You just have to make it higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the character C1 or the changed symbol is displayed in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be a case where the character C1 or the change symbol is displayed but not changed (so-called ghost effect). When such a ghost effect is provided, the ghost effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) is provided. The execution rate is higher than that of the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02 and the character action change. It is desirable that only the pattern 01 and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one variation effect, but may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) are changed normally because the timing is only once during the change effect. The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may change a plurality of times in one variation effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (starting port winning designation). The frame update timing was set to be two frames after the number of frames received (command or variable pattern specification command), but it is not limited to two frames, and if it is not extremely late after receiving the specified command, the number is even one frame later. It may be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern specification command, but the change effect is not limited to this timing, for example, special. The change effect may be executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the symbol memory designation command or the effect symbol specification command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 02", the "character action change pattern 01", and the "design action change pattern 01" are executed, at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command. Although the change effect has been executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect of notifying that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such an effect, and in addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, hold) is used by using the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10. The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode of the icon). In this case, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is the same as the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound. At the same time (synchronically), the lamps of the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10 may be started to emit light, and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamps is set to end after a lapse of a predetermined time. Alternatively, the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) may be terminated at the frame update timing (synchronized) to be deleted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be infeasible. By doing so, since the fluctuation time is set short in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the character action change pattern 01 executed during the fluctuation are set. By restricting the execution of the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command), the playability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without damaging it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon and the icon itself, but the display is not limited to such a change, and the hold icon and the icon itself are displayed. The mode may not be changed (the CD icon remains), and an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the hold icon or the icon, or around the hold icon or the icon (near). A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit may be displayed on the screen, or a character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ren") suggesting an effect to be executed around (near) the hold icon or the icon) May be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, it is determined regardless of the winning of the jackpot, but it may be determined by referring to the winning of the jackpot. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). ..

In this way, when deciding the change scenario by referring to the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and it changes to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2" rather than "1" or "2". In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to the red character icon, the red character at the time of winning is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) makes it difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
Also, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if it is lost and changes to the red character icon, the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning than when the jackpot is won and changes to the red character icon. Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

Further, in the present embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, but it is decided by referring to the current number of holdings and the winning of the jackpot. You may. Specifically, one hold icon from a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). The change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the hold icon change pattern by referring to the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon, the current number of holds is "1" or " The selection rate (%) may be set so that "normal change pattern 01" is more easily selected as the hold icon change pattern in the case of "3" or "4" than in the case of "2".
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is more when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) is difficult to select "normal change pattern 01".
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the jackpot is lost and the icon changes to the red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is "normal change pattern 01" rather than if the jackpot is won and the icon changes to the red character icon. ] Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

As described above, when the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) change to the red character icon, the current number of holds is "1". "3" and "4" have a higher expectation of winning a big hit than "2" and "2", so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, the same parts as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

In the second embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 39A, a special symbol TZ that is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol is provided in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70. It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying is provided.

Further, a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and a current first reserved number display area 70E are displayed at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70. 2 It is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the special symbol reserved number (U2) is provided.

The first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F correspond to the first hold information, and the first hold icon display area. The first hold icon displayed on the 70B and the second hold icon displayed on the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to the second hold information, and the icon displayed on the icon display area 70C is the execution information. Corresponds to.

(Specific example when variable production is started from waiting for customers)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. FIG. 38 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 39 (a) to (f) and 40 (g) to (k) are FIGS. 38 (a) to (k). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demo production is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is performed. Output starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 in a normal size. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of the customer waiting state). 5th frame from). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first hold number by non-animation, and the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon by animation to the icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the output of the first generation notification sound is started (14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C is continued, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon (25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH is set, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variation effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variation effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area on the center and the right side.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area in the center.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variation effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. Stop display is performed with the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display by non-animation of the hold number and hold icon is the shortest for one frame. Since it ends in a period (time), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and change display of the hold icon) so as not to be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is until the timing (frame update) after the end of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon (frame update). Since it continues, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol reservations is reduced (changed from "1" to "0"), the reduction display of the hold number by non-animation and the change display of the hold icon by animation to the icon are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing when the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed (frame update), the special symbol is held. While producing a change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special symbols held has decreased due to the reserved number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next production symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production is started after the hold memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

When the number of special symbols held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed non-animated, but rather than the increase display of the hold number. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of special symbol reservations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decrease display of the hold number and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same (frame update) timing, the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update). If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has decreased while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed than usual), the change display of the hold icon is displayed. The scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started shortly before the completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holds increases during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 42. FIG. 41 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation effect, and FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42B, in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in an extremely small size, and the enlarged display is started. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (70th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases, the non-animated increase display of the hold number and the increase display by the animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the player can tell that the special symbol hold number has increased. It is possible to surely recognize the game and improve the interest of the game.

Also, since the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the number of special symbol hold changes. While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special symbols held has increased due to the reserved numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the variation effect, the increase display of the hold icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of special symbol hold increases while waiting for customers. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), the number of special symbols held is increased. It is possible to effectively produce the increased number and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increase display of the hold icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, the variation effect is started. It can be emphasized and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the increase display of the hold number and the increase display of the hold icon are not started at the same timing (frame update), but the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier, whichever May start first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has increased while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be longer than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be made the same length as the period related to the display of the change of the hold icon to the icon, instead of being shorter.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 44. FIG. 43 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 43 (a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a and the special symbol TZ of “4”, “6”, and “8” indicating the loss are stopped and displayed. ing. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) based on the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first hold number by non-animation, the change display of the first hold icon by animation to the icon, and the reduction by animation of the first hold icon. The display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". .. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the change display and decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification when the icon occurs are notified. The output of the generation notification sound, which is a sound, will be on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon (40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increased display of the waiting first hold icon by animation is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TH, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in an extremely small size to start the enlarged display, and the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 is started. To.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2 to continue the enlarged display. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 continues. In addition, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed. In addition, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed (frame update). Since the increase display of the hold number is started even before the timing, the player can be made to recognize that the number of special symbol hold has increased even during the execution of the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols held increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted). When the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so that it is difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbols held. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. May be good.

Also, when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are not started (start is delayed than usual), but the hold icon is changed. The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started shortly before the display and decrease display are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbols reserved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols held increases during the increase display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted) in the same manner as during the change display or decrease display of the hold icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 46. FIG. 45 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 45 (a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect by the SP reach fluctuation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "7" are temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area move to the upper left of the screen. Start moving and reducing the display.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the development production for developing into the SP reach production continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the central variable display area are scrolled. The effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, while the development production ends, the SP reach production starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen, and in the center of the screen. The confrontation production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Further, the hold icon (here, the hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D) displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) is left with the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C. The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon at this timing or when the icon is generated The generation notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for notifying whether or not it is a big hit) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final production (decision production) of the confrontation production is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is displayed. Temporarily stops (becomes a swaying state) with a combination (“777”) indicating that is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a, which has been reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (swaying state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in a normal size.

Finally, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a, "777". In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, if the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the hold number will be changed even before the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). Since the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol pending, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the timing when the number of special symbol hold increases increases. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing of executing the increase display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol hold increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that it has been done, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of special symbols held increases more than once during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the increase display of the hold number is executed while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). It is preferable to execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) in one frame.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound. May be good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is illustrated as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included in the specific effect.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. 47 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 48 (a) to (f) and 49 (g) to (i) are FIGS. 47 (a) to (i). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48A, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B has been erased, and the second hold icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display units 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. The icon TH is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the number of fluctuation effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining times") is displayed, and at the upper right of the screen, a game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU that prompts the player to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, it is an increase display of the first hold icon and a notification sound when the icon is generated. The generation notification sound will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the start of the variation effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, a result display indicating the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and during the “special time end” indicating the end of the specific gaming state and the predetermined advantageous period. The number of jackpot games executed The characters "big hit x 1" are displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters “TOTAL 1200pt” indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen to stop and display, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is performed with the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the second hold number by non-animation, the change display of the second hold icon by animation to the icon, the reduction display by animation of the second hold icon, The non-animated return display of the first hold icon and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed in the above start moving (shifting) toward the adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is returned and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. It is displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a left-handed image HU that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the left area of the game area 5a is displayed.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TH, the second hold icons H22 to H24 that have moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (520th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is waited (restricted), while the increase display of the first hold number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of 1st special symbol hold (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the 1st hold icon is displayed at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update). Therefore, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before that is overlooked, it is possible to recognize that the number of the first special symbol reserved has increased, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the special symbol is held. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing when the number increases and the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so that the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of holdings has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next production symbol) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the production during the variable production, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of 1st special symbol hold increases by a plurality during the specific game state, while the hold number increase display is executed, the hold icon increase display is waited (restricted). It is sufficient to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update) in one frame.

Further, when the number of the first special symbol hold increases during the specific game state, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Instead, only the first hold icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F are set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but are set in the second image display device 71 (in this embodiment). It may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when setting to a dedicated LED, the number of special symbol reservations may be displayed according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 50-1 to 56-2. Here, the same parts as those in the second embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

[Explanation of transition from the first display mode to the second display mode]
First, in the third embodiment, the transition of the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ displayed by the first image display device 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3. FIG. 50-1 is a diagram illustrating a transition of the display mode when displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode. FIG. 50-2 is a diagram illustrating a transition of the display mode when the SP reach effect is executed. FIG. 50-3 is a diagram illustrating a transition of the display mode when displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode.

As shown in FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ in the third embodiment shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode. In the first display mode, at least two effect symbol rows out of the effect symbol 70a composed of three effect symbol rows are stopped, and one non-stopped effect symbol row is variablely displayed, and 3 This is a display mode in which at least two symbol rows of the special symbol TZ composed of one symbol row are stopped, and one non-stopped symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the first display mode, in the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol is invisible in at least one of the three effect symbol rows, that is, the display mode is unrecognizable. Further, in the special symbol TZ, the symbol sequence is unrecognizable in at least one of the three symbol rows. On the other hand, in the second display mode, all the three effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped, and all the three effect symbol rows of the special symbol TZ are also stopped, so that all the effect symbol rows and symbol rows can be visually recognized. That is, it is a mode of recognizable display.

As shown in FIG. 50-1 (a), when the first display mode is the normal reach mode, for example, the two effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed at the same effect symbol such as "7". One effect symbol sequence is variablely displayed, and two symbol strings of the special symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed. The symbol "7" corresponding to the effect symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and one symbol string is variablely displayed. are doing. Next, as one aspect of the second display mode after being displayed in the normal reach mode, as shown in FIG. 50-1 (b), for example, in the effect symbol 70a, variable display is performed in the first display mode. One of the effect symbols that had been displayed is displayed in a reach loss suggestion mode that is stopped and displayed with a different effect symbol from the effect symbol of the effect symbol string that was stopped and displayed in the first display mode, such as "3". There is also a symbol TZ that is stopped and displayed in a reach loss suggestion mode consisting of a symbol corresponding to the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed. Further, as another aspect of the second display mode after being displayed in the normal reach mode, as shown in FIG. 50-1 (c), for example, in the effect symbol 70a, the variable display is performed in the first display mode. In addition to being displayed in a jackpot suggestion mode in which the same effect symbol as the effect symbol of the effect symbol string that was stopped and displayed in the first display mode is displayed, such as one effect symbol string being "7", the special symbol TZ is displayed. In some cases, the stop display is performed in a jackpot suggestion mode consisting of a symbol corresponding to the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 50-2 (a), in the first display mode when the SP reach effect is executed, for example, the two effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed at the same effect symbol such as "7". One effect symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, and two symbol rows of the special symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed. The symbol "7" corresponding to the effect symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and one symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. are doing. Next, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (b), a battle effect, which is an SP reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other, is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (c), when the ally character C2 is defeated in the battle effect, as one aspect of the second display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (d). In the effect symbol 70a, the stop display is performed in the reach loss suggestion mode after returning to the original size, and in the special symbol TZ, the stop display is also performed in the reach loss suggestion mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (e), when the ally character C2 wins in the battle effect, as another aspect of the second display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (f). In the effect symbol 70a, the stop display is performed in the jackpot suggestion mode after returning to the original size, and in the special symbol TZ, the stop display is also performed in the jackpot suggestion mode. In addition, in FIG. 50-2 (c) and FIG. 50-2 (e), although the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and all the effect symbols can be recognized, at least one of the special symbol TZ is 1. This is a display mode in which one symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the display time of FIG. 50-2 (c) is 2 seconds and the display time of FIG. 50-2 (e) is 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 50-3 (a), when the first display mode is displayed in a non-reach mode, the two effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are different from each other, such as "7" and "1". The effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and one effect symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner, and the two symbol strings of the special symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed. The effect symbols "7" and "1" are stopped and displayed. One symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner. Then, as one aspect of the second display mode after being displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 50-3 (b), the variable display is performed in the first display mode. The one effect symbol string that has been displayed is displayed in a non-reach loss suggestion mode that is stopped and displayed with an effect symbol different from the two effect symbols of the effect symbol string that was stopped and displayed in the first display mode, such as "2". At the same time, there is a special symbol TZ that is stopped and displayed in a non-reach loss suggestion mode.

[Explanation of fluctuation end suggestion effect]
Next, the variation end suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2. FIG. 51-1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation end suggestion effect, and FIG. 51-2 is a diagram for explaining another example of the variation end suggestion effect. The variation end suggestion effect is an effect executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode, and in particular, the second display mode in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change end. It is an effect that suggests the end of this fluctuation by being executed immediately before. In this variation end suggestion effect, all the effect symbols can be recognized because the three effect symbol rows are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol 70a, but at least one symbol sequence is variablely displayed in the special symbol TZ. There is. The variation end suggestion effect is not always executed between the first display mode and the second display mode, and may be changed to the second display mode without being executed after the first display mode.

As shown in FIG. 51-1 as one specific example of the variation end suggestion effect, for example, a predetermined behavior such that each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed vibrates is executed. There are some aspects. The variation display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 (a) is a case where the variable display suggestion effect is displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode or a case where the SP reach effect is executed, and the reach loss suggestion mode is the second display mode. For example, the transition is as shown in FIG. 50-1 (a) → FIG. 51-1 (a) → FIG. 50-1 (b), or FIG. 50-2 (c) →. It can be executed when the transition is made as shown in FIG. 51-1 (a) → FIG. 50-2 (d). Further, the variable display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 (b) is a case where the variable display suggestion effect is displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode or a case where the SP reach effect is executed, and the jackpot suggestion is made in the second display mode. It is executed when the embodiment is established, and for example, the transition is as shown in FIG. 50-1 (a) → FIG. 51-1 (b) → FIG. 50-1 (c), or FIG. 50-2 (e). ) → Fig. 51-1 (b) → Fig. 50-2 (f). Further, the variation display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 (c) is executed when it is displayed when the first display mode is the non-reach mode and the second display mode is the non-reach loss suggestion mode. For example, it can be executed when the transition is made as shown in FIG. 50-3 (a) → FIG. 51-1 (c) → FIG. 50-3 (b).

As shown in FIG. 51-2, as another specific example of the variation end suggestion effect, for example, the variation end in which each of the effect symbols glitters as a background image HG in the vicinity of the periphery of the effect symbol 70a which is stopped and displayed. There is a mode in which a suggestion display is displayed. The variation display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2 (a) is a case where the variable display suggestion effect is displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode or a case where the SP reach effect is executed, and the reach loss suggestion mode is the second display mode. For example, the transition is as shown in FIG. 50-1 (a) → FIG. 51-2 (a) → FIG. 50-1 (b), or FIG. 50-2 (c) →. It can be executed when the transition is made as shown in FIG. 51-2 (a) → FIG. 50-2 (d). Further, the variable display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2 (b) is a case where the variable display suggestion effect is displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode or a case where the SP reach effect is executed, and the jackpot suggestion is made in the second display mode. It is executed when the embodiment is established, and for example, the transition is as shown in FIG. 50-1 (a) → FIG. 51-2 (b) → FIG. 50-1 (c), or in FIG. 50-2 (e). ) → Fig. 51-2 (b) → Fig. 50-2 (f). Further, the variation display suggestion effect mode shown in FIG. 51-2 (c) is executed when the first display mode is a non-reach mode and the second display mode is a non-reach loss suggestion mode. For example, it can be executed when the transition is made as shown in FIG. 50-3 (a) → FIG. 51-2 (c) → FIG. 50-3 (b).

In the present embodiment, for example, the display time of FIGS. 50-1 (b) and 50-2 (d) is different from the display time of FIGS. 50-1 (c) and 50-2 (f). It is short, and the display time shown in FIG. 50-3 (b) is further shortened. That is, the time during which the second display mode is displayed is set to increase in the order of the jackpot suggestion mode, the reach loss suggestion mode, and the non-reach loss suggestion mode. Further, for example, the display time of FIGS. 51-1 (b) and 51-2 (b) is 3 seconds, and the display time of FIGS. 51-1 (a) and 51-2 (a) is 1.5. It is assumed that the display time in FIGS. 51-1 (c) and 51-2 (c) is 0.5 seconds. That is, the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect is set to increase in descending order of the possibility of becoming a big hit.

[Explanation of pseudo-continuous production]
Next, the pseudo-continuous production will be described with reference to FIGS. 52-1 and 52-2. FIG. 52-1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect when displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode, and FIG. 52-2 is displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the pseudo-continuous production in the case of. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is an effect executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode, and in particular, when the variation end suggestion effect is executed, the first display is performed. It is an effect executed between the mode and the variation end suggestion effect. For example, in the first display mode, after being displayed in the normal reach or non-reach mode, it is suggested that the pseudo continuous effect is executed and is executed as the pseudo continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 52-1 (a), in the pseudo-continuous effect when displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode, first, one effect symbol of the effect symbol 70a in the normal reach mode in the first display mode is used. A pseudo-continuous display such as "chance" is displayed in the area where the columns are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 52-1 (b), all the symbol sequences of the effect symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner again. Next, after the variable display again, as shown in FIG. 52-1 (c), the two symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed again with the same symbol such as "7", and one symbol sequence is variable displayed. Will be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 52-1 (d), although the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and all the effect symbols can be recognized, at least one symbol sequence of the special symbol TZ fluctuates. It becomes the displayed display mode.

As shown in FIG. 52-2 (a), in the pseudo-continuous effect when displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode, first, one of the effect symbols 70a in the non-reach mode in the first display mode is used. A pseudo-continuous display such as "chance" is displayed in the area where the symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 52-2 (b), all the symbol sequences of the effect symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner again. Then, after the variable display again, as shown in FIG. 52-2 (c), the two symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed with the same symbol such as "7", and one symbol sequence is variablely displayed. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 52-2 (d), although the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and all the effect symbols can be recognized, at least one symbol sequence of the special symbol TZ fluctuates. It becomes the displayed display mode.

In the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous production, the case where the display is simply displayed in the normal reach or non-reach mode in the first display mode has been described, but there is a chance over so-called multiple variations that suggests a change in the effect mode. The effect symbol 70a may be combined with an effect in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed by the eye. For example, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the chance. Further, the SP reach effect may be executed after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the chance. Further, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous production, the display time of FIG. 52-1 (d) is assumed to be 2 seconds. Further, when the reach loss suggestion mode is obtained in the second display mode, a display in which the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed but can be recognized in the reach loss mode in the effect symbol 70a may be displayed, and this display time may be set. It may be 1 second.

Further, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, FIGS. 52-1 (d) and 52-2 (d) are displayed from the display of the temporarily stopped state in FIGS. 52-1 (a) and 55-2 (a). This is a mode in which the pseudo-continuous effect up to once is executed, but it may be a mode in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed 2-3 times. Specifically, in FIG. 52-1 or FIG. 52-2, there may be an embodiment such as (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ..., or (a) → (b) → (a). The pseudo-continuous production may be executed a plurality of times, such as → ..., or may be a combination of FIGS. 52-1 and 52-2. Further, the degree of expectation for the jackpot when executing the pseudo-continuous production including the mode (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 52-1 or FIG. 52-2 is (a). ) → (b) → (a) → ... It may be set to be higher than the degree of expectation for a big hit when executing a pseudo-continuous effect. In the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous production, the display time in FIG. 52-1 (a) is 2 seconds, whereas the display time in FIG. 52-2 (a) is 1 second. It should be noted that the display time of FIG. 52-1 (d) is longer than the display time of the temporary stop of FIG. 52-1 (a), or the display time of FIG. ) May be longer than the display time of the temporary stop.

[Explanation of revival production]
Next, the revival effect will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of a revival effect when the SP reach effect is executed. Here, the revival effect is an effect executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode, and in particular, when the variation end suggestion effect is executed, the first display is performed. It is an effect executed between the mode and the variation end suggestion effect. For example, in the battle production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 of the SP reach effect after the first display mode described in FIG. 50-2 confront each other, the ally character C2 is defeated and the battle effect ends once. After that, the battle effect is executed again. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53A, a display mode indicating that the ally character C2 has been defeated in the battle effect and suggesting that the battle effect is terminated is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and all the special symbols TZ are displayed in a variable manner, and the display modes of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are maintained during the execution of the revival effect. It will be in the state of being. Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), a resurrection suggestion display such as "resurrection" is displayed in the area where the effect of confronting the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 are again made larger than before the defeat and the enemy character C3 is smaller than before the victory. The confrontation effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), a character such as "victory" is displayed in the area where the effect of confronting the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), the display suggests that the ally character C2 wins in the battle effect and ends the battle effect, and the three effect symbol rows in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed. Although all the effect symbols can be recognized, at least one symbol string of the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner. In the above-mentioned revival effect, the display time of FIG. 53 (e) is assumed to be 1 second.

In the above-mentioned revival effect, characters such as "victory" are displayed before displaying the display mode suggesting that the battle effect indicating the victory of the ally character C2 is terminated. It doesn't have to be. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), although the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, a darkening effect may be performed such that the entire background image HG is darkened black. That is, the revival effect of the mode such as FIG. 53 (c) → FIG. 53 (f) → FIG. 53 (e) may be executed. Further, in the above-mentioned resurrection effect, a mode in which the player wins the battle effect after the resurrection and shifts to the jackpot suggestion mode of the second display mode has been described. It may be a mode that shifts to the mode of suggesting reach loss. In the revival effect in the case of such a defeat, for example, the mode may be changed as shown in FIG. 53 (c) → FIG. 53 (f) → FIG. 50-2 (c).

It can be said that the above-mentioned battle effect, revival effect, and pseudo-continuous effect are effects that improve the degree of expectation that is a jackpot suggestion mode before the so-called second display mode. Further, since the effect is executed in such a manner that the degree of expectation is gradually improved with the lapse of the execution time of the effect, it can be said that the effect is an effect of gradually increasing the degree of expectation. Further, the effect may be such that the recognizable state of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times during one variation of the special symbol TZ.

[Explanation of Other Embodiments]
Next, another example of the variation end suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 54-1 to 54-8. Each of FIGS. 54-1 to 54-6 and 54-8 is another example of the variation end suggestion effect and is a diagram for explaining an example, and FIG. 54-7 shows the variation end in the effect symbol 5470a. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestion effect.

The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-1 is an embodiment in which each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed moves to change the position. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-1 (a), although the effect symbol of "7" which was stopped and displayed moves upward, one of the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a which is variablely displayed. The position is displayed so that it does not change. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-1 (b), while the position of the moved effect symbol is maintained as it is, the effect symbol sequence that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-1 (c), the position of the effect symbol that was moving upward changes, returns to the position where the original effect symbol 70a was displayed, and all the effect symbols 70a are stopped. Is displayed.

In the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-2, a variation end suggestion display in the form of a shutter door is displayed as a background image HG in the vicinity of the periphery of the effect symbol 70a in which one effect symbol sequence is variablely displayed. This is an aspect of the above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-2 (a), the shutter doors opened on both sides of the effect symbol 70a in a state in which the effect symbol 70a in which one effect symbol sequence is variablely displayed can be recognized. Such a fluctuation end suggestion display is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-2 (b), the variation end suggestion display changes so that the shutter door closes, and all the effect symbols 70a become invisible. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-2 (c), the variation end suggestion display is changed so that the closed shutter door is opened, and all the effect symbols 70a can be recognized.

The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-3 (a) is such that each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed vibrates in a predetermined manner. The mode of vibration shown in FIG. 54-3 (a) is different from the mode shown in FIG. 51-1. Specifically, the vibration of the effect symbol 70a shown in FIG. 51-1 is a mode in which the effect symbol 70a vibrates in small steps in the up, down, left, and right directions, whereas the vibration of the effect symbol 70a shown in FIG. Is a mode that vibrates greatly in the left-right direction. Next, the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-3 (b) is such that a predetermined action is executed so that each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed shines. The shining mode shown in FIG. 54.3 (b) is different from the mode shown in FIG. 51-2. Specifically, in the effect symbol 70a shown in FIG. 51-2, the background image HG has a mode in which the vicinity of each of the effect symbols glitters, whereas it is shown in FIG. 54-3 (a). The shining mode of the effect symbol 70a is such that each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed shines. These fluctuation end suggestion effects shown in FIG. 54-3 are, for example, non-reach loss suggestion mode and reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode, assuming that they are executed in the fluctuation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. In the variation pattern, the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 or FIG. 51-2 may be executed. That is, in the fluctuation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, although it is a variation end suggestion effect of a mode similar to the non-reach loss suggestion mode such as vibration and brilliance and the fluctuation end suggestion effect in the reach loss suggestion mode, it is peculiar. It can be of any aspect.

The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-4 is such that each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a, which is stopped and displayed, executes a predetermined behavior so as to be greatly enlarged. Specifically, the effect symbol of the normal size effect symbol 70a shown in FIG. 54-4 (a) is enlarged as compared with the effect symbol of the normal size shown in FIG. 54-4 (b). This is a mode in which each of the production symbols of the production design 70a is enlarged and changed to be emphasized so that the production design becomes larger. The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-4 may be executed, for example, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. That is, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the variation end suggestion effect of a unique mode that is not executed as the variation end suggestion effect in the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the reach loss suggestion mode is executed. it can.

The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-5 is such that each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed is reduced to a small size by executing a predetermined behavior. Specifically, at least one of the effect symbol rows is fluctuating in the effect symbol 70a larger than usual shown in FIG. 54-5 (a), which is larger than the normal effect shown in FIG. 54-5 (b). With the large effect symbol 70a, all of the effect symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbols are reduced and smaller than the normal size effect symbols shown in FIG. 54-5 (c). This is a mode in which each of the effect symbols of 70a is reduced and changed. The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-5 may be executed, for example, in a variation pattern that is a non-reach loss suggestion mode or a reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. That is, in the variation pattern that is the non-reach loss suggestion mode or the reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode, the variation end suggestion effect of a unique mode that is not executed as the variation end suggestion effect in the jackpot suggestion mode is executed. it can.

The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-6 is in a mode of executing a predetermined behavior such that the effect symbol itself of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed rotates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-6 (a), each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a itself rotates in the same direction at the same speed, or as shown in FIG. 54-6 (b), the effect is produced. This is a mode in which the three effect symbols of the symbol 70a are integrally rotated. The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-6 may be executed, for example, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. That is, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the variation end suggestion effect of a unique mode that is not executed as the variation end suggestion effect in the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the reach loss suggestion mode is executed. it can.

The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-7 is composed of a number part 5470b having a number as a main component and a character part 5470c imitating a predetermined character different for each number in the number part 5470b. It is the embodiment carried out by the symbol 5470a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-7 (a), a mode in which only the character portion 5470c vibrates or performs a predetermined operation, or a mode in which only the character portion 5470c shines. Is. Further, various effects may be executed not only in the character portion 5470c but also in the number portion 5470b. For example, the number portion 5470b may vibrate in a manner different from that of the character portion 5470c shown in FIG. 54-7 (a). Further, in FIG. 54-7, the case where the reach loss suggestion mode is obtained in the second display mode is shown, but FIG. 54-7 shows a variation pattern which is a non-reach loss suggestion mode or a jackpot suggestion mode. Such a variation end suggestion effect may be executed.

In the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8, for example, during the execution of the SP reach effect, all the effect symbols are temporarily displayed with respect to the effect symbol in which one effect symbol sequence is variablely displayed. The variation end suggestion display, which is a door image TG in the form of a shutter door, is displayed so as to hide it. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 54-8 (a), it is composed of two effect symbols 5470a and one effect symbol 70a, and all the effect symbol sequences are displayed in a recognizable state. To. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-8 (b), the modes of the three effect symbols are changed, and the two effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the upper corner of the first image display device 70. The remaining one production symbol sequence fluctuates. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-8 (c), the fluctuating effect symbol sequence is stopped and displayed (for example, a stop display suggesting reach loss). Next, as shown in FIG. 54-8 (d), all the effect symbols 70a and the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, and the second hold icon display that were stopped and displayed in a recognizable state. The door image TG is displayed so as to cover the entire surface of the first image display device 70 so as to cover the entire area 70D. That is, the effect of displaying the door image TG is an effect executed in a state in which all the effect symbols 70a can be recognized and it can be recognized that the effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-8 (e), a second display mode (for example, the effect symbol 5470a) in which all the effect symbols 70a covered by the door image TG opening and disappearing are stopped and displayed is used. It is displayed as a jackpot suggestion mode).

Here, the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8 described above is executed at the time of SP reach (loss / jackpot) in the first display mode, and is non-reach (loss) or normal reach (loss / loss /). It may not be executed at the time of (big hit), and in the first display mode, the ratio of execution is different between the case of SP reach (loss) and the case of SP reach (big hit), and specifically. May be executed at a higher rate in the case of SP reach (big hit). Further, in the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8, all the effect symbol sequences can be recognized in the states (a), (c) to (e), and the special symbol TZ is changing. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the effect symbol 70a is being displayed in a variable manner, while in the state (b), although not all the effect symbols can be recognized, the effect symbol 70a is being displayed in a variable manner. Can be said to be in a recognizable state. That is, in the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8, the period in which all the effect symbol sequences can be recognized and the effect symbol 70a can be recognized as being displayed in variation is discontinuous. However, it can be said that it is the sum of all the states (a), (c), and (e). Further, in (a) to (c) and (e) of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, and the second hold icon display area 70D are Although it was displayed, it does not have to be displayed in all states. Then, in (d) of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8, the form of the image displayed so as to cover all the effect symbol rows is a door image TG such as a shutter door. As long as it covers and hides the effect pattern sequence, it may be, for example, a large image of a character.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned variation end suggestion effect is not only executed independently, but may be executed in a mode in which a plurality of variation end suggestion effects are combined. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the vibrating effect symbol 70a glitters by combining the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2 with the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2. It is possible to execute the fluctuation end suggestion effect of. Further, for example, in the case of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-1, when all the effect symbols 70a are in the recognizable states (b) and (c), FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2. , The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-3 may be combined so that the effect symbol 70a glitters or vibrates. Further, in the case of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-2, the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 51-1, 51-2, and 54.3 is combined in the state of (c). You may do so. Then, in the case of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-3, the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2 may be combined in the state of (a), or the state of (b) may be combined. Occasionally, the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 may be combined. Furthermore, in the case of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-4, in the states of (a) and (b), the variation end shown in FIGS. 51-1, 51-2, and 54-3. You may try to combine suggestive effects. Further, in the case of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-5, in the states of (b) and (c), the variation end shown in FIGS. 51-1, 51-2, and 54-3. You may try to combine suggestive effects. Furthermore, in the case of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-6, in the state of (a) or (b), the variation end shown in FIGS. 51-1, 51-2, and 54-3. You may try to combine suggestive effects. Furthermore, in the case of the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8, the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 51-1, 51-2, and 54.3 is set in the state of (c). You may try to match. Further, in each variation end suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 54-1 to 54-6, all the effect symbol sequences can be recognized, and it can be recognized that the effect symbol 70a is being displayed in variation. It may be executed in a combined manner so that the door image TZ shown in FIG. 54-8 (d) is displayed. By executing the variation end suggestion effect of different modes in combination in this way, various things that increase the player's expectation for the jackpot as compared with the case where the variation end suggestion effect of one mode is executed. It is possible to carry out the production of the aspect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, the variation end suggestion effect is not a combination of a plurality of the variation end suggestion effects of the plurality of types illustrated in FIG. 51-1 and the like, but a variation end suggestion effect of one aspect. It may be a combination of other effects. For example, the effect symbol may behave in a predetermined manner, and the variation end suggestion display by the background image HG may be displayed in the vicinity of the surroundings. Specifically, in the effect symbol 70a which is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 51-1 and the like, a predetermined behavior such that each of the effect symbols vibrates and each of the effect symbols as a background image HG in the vicinity of the surroundings. It may be a combination of a glittering display and a display. Further, in FIGS. 50-1 to 54-6, although the effect symbol 70a having numbers as the main components is described, various effects using the effect symbol 5470a instead of the effect symbol 70a are executed. You may perform various effects such as changing to the effect symbol 5470a instead of the effect symbol 70a at a predetermined timing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display of the special symbol TZ between the first display mode and the second display mode is such that at least one symbol sequence is variablely displayed, but all the symbol sequences are variable. It may be displayed. For example, in the special symbol TZ in the first display mode in FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3, all the symbol sequences may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the special symbol TZ in the effect display of the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 52-1 and 52-2, all the symbol strings are displayed during the execution of a series of effect displays or a part of the effect display. It may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, as for the special symbol TZ in the effect display of the revival effect shown in FIG. 53, all the symbol sequences may be variably displayed during the execution of a series of effect displays or the execution of a part of the effect display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the transition of the display mode when the SP reach effect is executed has been described, but the same display mode is also used when the SPSP reach effect different from the SP reach effect is executed. The transition may be performed. Then, in the above-described embodiment, the variation end suggestion effect of the mode in which the effect symbol itself executes a predetermined behavior is executed immediately before the second display mode, but the effect symbol is executed after the second display mode. You may try to perform a predetermined effect in. For example, after the second display mode of the reach loss suggestion mode or the non-reach loss suggestion mode, the effect symbol executes an effect of a mode different from the variation end suggestion effect, and all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a are executed. The effect may be such that the columns are displayed in a variable manner.

[Explanation of low / high accuracy fluctuation patterns]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the selectivity of the variation pattern in which the additional effects, which are the above-mentioned various effects, are combined will be described. FIG. 55-1 is a diagram illustrating a low-probability fluctuation pattern table which is a fluctuation pattern table in a low-probability gaming state, and FIG. 55-2 shows a high-probability fluctuation pattern table which is a fluctuation pattern table in a high-probability gaming state. It is an illustrated figure. As shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, each of the low probability fluctuation pattern table and the high probability fluctuation pattern table has 15 fluctuation patterns from the fluctuation pattern 1A to the fluctuation pattern 5C. These fluctuation patterns 1A to 5C will be described. In the low probability fluctuation pattern table and the high probability fluctuation pattern table, there is a fluctuation pattern represented by "variation pattern" + "number" + "alphabet", but when the "variation pattern" + "number" is the same. The first display mode and the second display mode have the same variation pattern. For example, the fluctuation pattern 2A and the fluctuation pattern 2B have the same first display mode in the normal reach mode and the second display mode in the reach loss suggestion mode. Further, the additional effect refers to any of the above-mentioned revival effect, pseudo-continuous effect, and variation end suggestion effect, and an effect in which these effects are combined.

The variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which the first display mode is displayed in a non-reach mode and the second display mode is a non-reach loss suggestion mode. Of these, the variation pattern 1A is a pattern in which the additional effect is not executed, and is selected with a probability of 85% in the low probability gaming state and 87% in the high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 1B is a pattern in which only the variation end suggestion effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 5% in the low probability game state and 3% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 1C is a pattern in which only the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 10% in the low probability game state and 10% in the high probability game state.

The variation pattern 2 is a variation pattern in the case where the first display mode is the normal reach mode and the second display mode is the reach loss suggestion mode. Of these, the variation pattern 2A is a pattern that executes only the variation end suggestion effect as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 70% in the low probability game state and 65% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 2B is a pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect and a variation end suggestion effect as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 5% in the low probability game state and 5% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 2C is a pattern in which only the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 25% in the low probability game state and 30% in the high probability game state.

The variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern in which the SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode and the reach loss suggestion mode is set as the second display mode. Of these, the variation pattern 3A is a pattern that executes only the variation end suggestion effect as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 60% in the low probability game state and 60% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 3B is a pattern that executes a revival effect and a variation end suggestion effect as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 10% in the low probability game state and 5% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 3C is a pattern in which only the revival effect is executed as the additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 30% in the low probability game state and 35% in the high probability game state.

The variation pattern 4 is a variation pattern in the case where the first display mode is displayed in the normal reach mode and the second display mode is the jackpot suggestion mode. Of these, the variation pattern 4A is a pattern that executes only the variation end suggestion effect as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 15% in the low probability game state and 15% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 4B is a pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect and a variation end suggestion effect as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 65% in the low probability game state and 60% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 4C is a pattern in which only the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 20% in the low probability game state and 25% in the high probability game state.

The variation pattern 5 is a variation pattern in which the SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode and the jackpot suggestion mode is set as the second display mode. Of these, the variation pattern 5A is a pattern that executes only the variation end suggestion effect as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 20% in the low probability game state and 15% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 5B is a pattern that executes a revival effect and a variation end suggestion effect as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 65% in the low probability game state and 65% in the high probability game state. The variation pattern 5C is a pattern in which only the revival effect is executed as the additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 15% in the low probability game state and 20% in the high probability game state.

In addition, in the low probability gaming state or the high probability gaming state, it is assumed that the variation end suggestion effect of a different mode is executed for each variation pattern 1 to 5. For example, in the low probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern 1 has the mode shown in FIG. 51-1, the fluctuation pattern 2 has the mode shown in FIG. 51-2, and the fluctuation pattern 3 has the mode shown in FIG. It is the embodiment shown in 54-3 (a), in the variation pattern 4, it is the embodiment shown in FIG. 54-3 (b), and in the variation pattern 5, it is as shown in FIG. 54-4. It shall be an aspect. Further, in each of the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state, it is assumed that the variation end suggestion effect of a different mode is executed although the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the low probability gaming state, it is as described above, and in the high probability gaming state, the variation pattern 1 has the mode shown in FIG. 51-2, and the variation pattern 2 has the mode shown in FIG. 51-1. In the variation pattern 3, the embodiment is as shown in FIG. 54-3 (b), and in the variation pattern 4, the embodiment is as shown in FIG. 54-3 (a). In No. 5, it is assumed that the mode is as shown in FIG. 54-6.

Further, each of the above-mentioned variation end suggestion effects may be executed at a different ratio depending on the case of the low probability gaming state and the case of the high probability gaming state. For example, in the variation pattern 5A in which the SP reach (big hit) is obtained in the first display mode, the ratio of executing the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. In the case of a state, it may be set to be low. That is, the ratio of executing the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 51-1, 51-2, 54-1 to 54-8 described above is higher than in the low probability gaming state. In the case of, it may be set to be low. Further, as described above, even when the variation end suggestion effect of different modes is executed in the combined mode, the execution ratio is different between the low probability game state and the high probability game state. You may. For example, in the variation pattern 5A in which the SP reach (big hit) is obtained in the first display mode, in the low probability gaming state, the rate at which only the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8 is executed is shown in FIG. 54-8. Although there is a high rate of execution of the effect in which the variation end suggestion effect shown is combined with the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 etc., the variation end shown in FIG. 54-8 is executed in the high probability gaming state. The rate at which only the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-8 is executed is higher than the rate at which the effect in which the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 is combined with the suggestion effect is executed. It may be set to be high. That is, among the fluctuation end suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 51-1, 51-2, and 54-1 to 54-8 described above, the ratio of the effect in which a plurality of types are combined is executed is low. It may be set to be lower in the high-accuracy gaming state than in the gaming state. In particular, regarding the mode in which the door image TZ shown in FIG. 54-8 (d) is displayed, the execution ratio may be different between the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state.

[Explanation of fluctuation patterns according to the number of pending numbers]
Using FIGS. 56-1 and 56-2, the variation pattern in which the additional effects, which are the various effects described above, are combined, is selected according to the number of the first special hold number and the second special hold number. The rate will be described. FIG. 56-1 is a diagram illustrating a small hold fluctuation pattern table which is a fluctuation pattern table when the number of holds is small (for example, when the number of holds is 1 to 2), and FIG. 56-2 shows a diagram in which the number of holds is large. It is a figure which illustrated the multi-hold fluctuation pattern table which is the fluctuation pattern table in the case of a large number (for example, when the number of hold is 3-4). As shown in FIGS. 56-1 and 56-2, each of the low-holding fluctuation pattern table and the high-holding fluctuation pattern table has the same fluctuation patterns as the low-probability fluctuation pattern table and the high-probability fluctuation pattern table described above. , It has 15 fluctuation patterns from fluctuation pattern 1A to fluctuation pattern 5C.

As shown in FIGS. 56-1 and 56-2, the low-holding variation pattern table having a relatively large number of holds is executed as an additional effect as compared with the multi-hold variation pattern table having a relatively small number of holds. The selection rate of variable patterns with little production is high. That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of holds is large, in order to promote the digestion of the hold, it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern that shortens the execution time of the variation effect for the hold, and the number of holds is small. Is set so that a variation pattern that lengthens the execution time of the variation effect for the hold is easily selected in order to prevent the execution of the variation effect from being interrupted due to all the hold being exhausted and impairing the player's interest. Will be there. Further, with respect to the time during which all the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed so that the effect symbols can be recognized, the variation end suggestion effect is executed in the multi-hold variation pattern table as compared with the small hold variation pattern table. The selection rate of the fluctuation pattern is high. That is, although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, the time during which all the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and the effect symbol can be recognized is set so that the larger the number of reservations, the longer the time. Will be there.

[Explanation of fluctuation effects in power failure recovery processing]
Here, in the power failure recovery process when recovering from the power failure in the game machine 1, in the E250 of FIG. 11, as described above, the power recovery notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140, and the power recovery notification command is transmitted. 1 The power recovery screen is displayed on the image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and the power recovery sound is output from the audio output device 9, but after the power recovery screen is displayed. The variation effect may be set to a predetermined mode. Specifically, for example, in the variation pattern which is the non-reach loss display mode or the reach loss display mode in the second display mode, when the effect symbol sequence and the special symbol TZ recover from the power failure during the fluctuation, the first image display device. After displaying the power recovery screen on the 70, the stop display is always displayed with an effect symbol such as "515" which is a specific fluctuation pattern, and the time for executing the additional effect is also specified as a specific additional effect (for example, the figure). It is also possible to execute (only the variation end suggestion effect shown in 51-2). Further, the specific mode of the variation display and the stop display of the effect symbols when the effect symbol sequence and the special symbol TZ recover from the power failure during the fluctuation is either in the case of low accuracy or in the case of high accuracy. It may be applied, or it may be applied regardless of the number of pending numbers.

[Explanation of the timing of each variation production]
The timing of the above-mentioned variation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 is a timing chart of each variation effect, FIG. 57A is a timing chart of variation effect patterns 1A and 1B, FIG. 57B is a timing chart of variation effect pattern 2A, and FIG. 57C is a timing chart of variation effect pattern 2A. It is a timing chart of the variation effect pattern 3A, and FIG. 3D is a timing chart of the variation effect patterns 5B and 5C. Here, in FIG. 57, the “normal fluctuation” means that the plurality of effect symbols 70a fluctuate apart at high speed and stop without reaching, and the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds. It is assumed that Further, the execution time of the symbol temporary stop (the execution time of the last symbol temporary stop when there are a plurality of symbol temporary stops) is the period during which the above-mentioned fluctuation end suggestion effect is executed, and the symbol main stop is executed. The time shall be the period during which the above-mentioned second display mode is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), first, in the variation effect pattern 1A and the like, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T00. Then, all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing T01 after the variable display for t1 second, and the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing T02 after t2 seconds have elapsed after the temporary stop display (t3 seconds). The fluctuation production ends.

As shown in FIG. 57B, next, in the variation effect pattern 2A, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T10. Then, the normal reach is started at the timing T11 after the variable display for t4 seconds, and all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing T12 t5 seconds after the start of the normal reach, and t6 seconds after the temporary stop is displayed. At the timing T13 after the lapse, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped and displayed (t7 seconds), and the variation effect ends.

As shown in FIG. 57 (c), next, in the variation effect pattern 3A, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T20. Then, the normal reach is started at the timing T21 after the variable display is performed for t8 seconds, and the normal reach is developed from the normal reach to the SP reach at the timing T22 after the lapse of t9 seconds after the start of the normal reach, and the SP reach is started. After that, at the timing T23, all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the timing T24 t11 seconds after the temporary stop display, the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed (t12 seconds), and the variation effect ends.

As shown in FIG. 57 (d), and in the variation effect pattern 5B and the like, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T30. Then, the normal reach is started at the timing T31 after the variable display is performed for t13 seconds, and the normal reach is developed from the normal reach to the SP reach at the timing T32 after the lapse of t14 seconds after the start of the normal reach, and the SP reach is started. After that, all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing T33, but the revival effect is started at the timing T34 t16 seconds after the temporary stop is displayed. When the revival effect is started, the central effect symbol 70a starts the variable display again. Then, at the timing T35, all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the timing T36 t18 seconds after the temporary stop is displayed, the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed (t19 seconds), and the variable effect ends. ..

In the timing chart of each variation effect shown in FIG. 57, the execution time (t2, t6, t11, t18) of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the execution time of the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a (t2, t6, t11, t18). Although specific numerical values are not shown for t3, t7, t12, t19), the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a is t2 (temporary stop display such as the variable effect pattern 1A) < The execution time increases in the order of t6 (temporary stop display of variable effect pattern 2A) <t11 (temporary stop display of variable effect pattern 3A) and t18 (temporary stop display of variable effect pattern 5B, etc.), and the effect symbol 70a The execution time of the main stop display is t3 (main stop display of the variable effect pattern 1A, etc.) = t7 (main stop display of the variable effect pattern 2A) = t12 (main stop display of the variable effect pattern 3A) = t19 (variable effect). It is assumed that the main stop display such as pattern 5B) is displayed. Further, t11, t16 and t18 may have the same execution time or different execution times, but at least t11, t16t and 18 have longer execution times than t2 and t6. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, each variation pattern when the number of holds is large (multi-hold variation pattern table in FIG. 56-2) and each variation when the number of holds is small (low hold variation pattern table in FIG. 56-1). Both of the patterns and the timing charts may be substantially the same timing charts, but fluctuation patterns of different timing charts may be used. For example, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol may be shorter when the number of holds is large than when the number of holds is small. Specifically, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a in the variation patterns 1A and 1B of the low hold variation pattern table is a normal variation, whereas the variation of the effect symbol 70a in the variation patterns 1A and 1B of the multi-hold variation pattern table. The display may be abbreviated variation. Here, the "shortening fluctuation" means that a plurality of effect symbols 70a fluctuate apart at high speed and stop without reaching, and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds, which is shorter than the normal fluctuation. It is assumed that it has been set. Although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved special symbols. Therefore, "4" is not referred to as the number of reservations.

Further, although the timing chart of the variable effect pattern in which the shortened variable effect, the SPSP reach effect, the resurrection fanning effect, the re-lottery effect, etc. is executed is not explained, the effect in the variable effect pattern in which the shortened variable effect is executed is not explained. The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the symbol 70a is shorter than the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect pattern in which the normal variation effect is executed. The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a in the variable effect pattern in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a in the variable effect pattern in which the SP reach effect is executed. The execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a in the variable effect pattern in which the revival fanning effect and the re-lottery effect are executed is the same as the execution time of the previous temporary stop display. It is assumed that the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a in the variable effect pattern in which the revival effect is executed is the same as the execution time.

That is, the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a according to the type of the variation effect pattern in the present embodiment is the variation effect pattern 2 (shortened variation effect) <variation effect pattern 1 (normal variation effect) < Fluctuation effect pattern 3 (normal reach effect) <variation effect pattern 4 to 13 (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, revival effect, revival fanning effect, re-lottery effect) are longer in this order. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

That is, the execution time of the temporary stop display before the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a according to the type of the variation effect pattern in the above-described embodiment is the variation effect pattern 1A or the like (shortened variation effect) <variation effect pattern 1A or the like (normal variation effect). ) <Variable effect pattern 2A (normal reach effect) <Variable effect pattern 3A, 5B, 5C, etc. (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, revival effect, revival fanning effect, re-lottery effect). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the execution time of the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a in the above-described embodiment is the same regardless of the variable effect pattern. Further, since the effect symbol 70a is displayed as the main stop display and the special symbol TZ is also displayed as the stop display, the execution time of the stop display of the special symbol TZ is the same regardless of the variable effect pattern. .. By doing so, even if the execution time of the temporary stop display of the main stop display of the effect symbol 70a differs depending on the variable effect pattern, the effect symbol 70a can be stopped and displayed at least for a certain period of time or more, so that a jackpot determination can be made. It is possible to prevent the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, which is the result of the above, from becoming difficult to see. Further, since the execution time of the stop display of the special symbol TZ is the same regardless of the variation effect pattern, the player can easily grasp the execution status of the variation effect by checking the special symbol TZ, and the player. Can be prevented from being confused.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of holdings is 1 or 2, the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is executed, and when the number of holdings is 3 or 4, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation is executed. However, regardless of the number of reservations, the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation and the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation may be made feasible. Even in this case, when the number of holds is 1 or 2, it is easier to execute the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation than the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation, and when the number of hold is 3 or 4, it is better than the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation. However, it is sufficient to make it easy to execute the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation. That is, when the number of holdings is 1 or 2, the effect symbol 70a performs a temporary stop display, and when the execution time of the temporary stop display elapses, after performing an action (operation, display) such that the effect symbol 70a shines. , The main stop display is executed, but when the number of holds is 3 or 4, the effect symbol 70a does not perform the temporary stop display and the action (operation, display) such that the effect symbol 70a shines, and the main stop is performed. It can also be said to execute the display.

Further, instead of determining whether or not to execute the variation pattern of the shortened variation depending on the number of holdings, it may be determined whether or not to execute the variation pattern of the shortened variation depending on the gaming state. For example, in the time-saving game state, when the number of holdings is 1 or 2, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation is executed, and when the number of holdings is 3 or 4, the fluctuation pattern of the ultra-shortening fluctuation whose fluctuation time is shorter than the shortened fluctuation is executed. In the short game state, regardless of the number of holdings, if the reach is not reached, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation may be executed.

Further, in the various variation patterns of the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the effect of a predetermined mode in the effect symbol is executed, but the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17, etc. are executed at various timings. Various accessories may be controlled to perform an effect of a predetermined mode. As described above, the timing at which the various accessories execute the effect of the predetermined mode may be, for example, the first half of the period of each change in the continuous effect executed over a plurality of changes. More specifically, in the continuous production over three fluctuations, the movable accessory may operate in the same mode or different modes immediately after the start of each fluctuation. It should be noted that, at each timing when various accessories in this continuous production are activated, the production symbols 70a of the same color or the same motif or the like are stopped and displayed (so-called chance eyes), or the same color is displayed on the first image display device 70 or the like. , Different colors of related things, backgrounds of the same motif, etc. may be displayed, or the same mode of light emission effect may be executed by the panel lighting device 76 or the like. Further, various accessories may be activated at the time of a plurality of temporary stops of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect by the first image display device 70 or the like may be combined in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect as described above.

In addition, the timing at which the various accessories execute the effect of the predetermined mode may be the time when the development effect is executed, and the various characters execute the effect of the predetermined mode during the execution of the development effect. Then, the SP reach effect may be executed after that. Further, for example, when various modes of development effects are set, the execution ratio of the effects of the predetermined modes by the various accessories may be different depending on the mode of the development effects to be executed. In particular, as one of the modes of the development effect, when an image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is output to the first image display device 70 or the like, the development effect of the mode in which the image is not output is executed. The execution rate of the predetermined mode by various accessories may be higher than that in the case of Further, as another timing, it may be when the promotion effect of whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol is promoted to the jackpot effect symbol having higher value for the player is executed, and when the promotion effect is started. Or, when the promotion effect is finished, various accessories may perform the effect of a predetermined mode, and then all the effect symbols 70a may be stopped and displayed. The other timing may be when an effect (so-called final effect) suggesting that a big hit is very high during the fluctuation of the symbol is executed, and various combinations are performed during the execution of the effect. The object may perform the effect of a predetermined mode, and then all the effect symbols 70a may be stopped and displayed. Further, as another timing, it may be the time to execute the effect when all the effect symbols 70a are displayed in the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, and various accessories may be executed during the execution of the effect. May perform the effect of a predetermined mode, and then all the effect symbols 70a may be stopped and displayed in the jackpot suggestion mode.

Further, as described above, various accessories such as the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the effect button 17 may be controlled to execute the effect of a predetermined mode at various timings. The effect sound produced by the sound output device 9 and the light emission effect produced by the panel lighting device 76 or the like may be executed in a predetermined mode at various timings similar to those described above. In particular, the voice output device 9 may output a predetermined effect sound in a standby state (so-called customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing. For example, the player's hand is placed on the firing handle 15 in the standby state. The sound output device 9 may output a predetermined effect sound when the player touches the game for a predetermined time or when the game ball is launched. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 and the like, execution of a recognizable display mode in which all the effect symbols can be recognized by the start of fluctuation of the special symbol TZ and that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Various accessories and the voice output device 9 may perform the effect of a predetermined mode. In the case of a game machine such as these, since the production of a predetermined mode by various accessories or the like is executed at various timings, when the production is executed, the jackpot suggestion mode is obtained in the second display mode. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player. In the above-described embodiment, in the recognizable display mode, when determining whether or not the effect symbol 70a is in variable display, the special symbols of the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are displayed. Although the determination is made based on the state of the special symbol TZ corresponding to the variable display, it may be determined based on whether or not the special symbols of the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are in the variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 in the normal game state, the look-ahead notice effect (image display device, audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, movable effect). A predetermined mode of production performed by using one or a plurality of the members 73Z and the panel lighting device 76) was executed, but the time-saving gaming state (the second starting port 47 was opened) was executed. If the ball enters the first starting port 45 in this state), it may be controlled so as not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect. However, when the ball enters the first starting port 45 in the time-saving game state, an increase suggesting that the number of holds has increased in the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the first special symbol hold number display area 70E. It is controlled to perform the display. If the game machine is controlled in this way, a look-ahead notice effect is executed for entering the ball into the first starting port 45, which is not directly related to the determination of whether or not the game is a big hit in the time-saving game state. Not only does it not reduce the interest of the game in the time-saving game state, but it is also displayed in an increased manner on the first special symbol hold indicator 63, etc., so that the player can easily enter the first starting port 45. And it can be recognized reliably.

Then, in the above-described embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B is an area for displaying the hold icon when the game ball enters the first start port 45, and although it is displayed in the normal game state, it is displayed. It is not displayed in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 48) or during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect) (see FIG. 46). Here, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, when the time-saving game state is changed to the normal game state, the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed and the first start port 45 during the time-saving game state is displayed. A hold icon is displayed based on the entry into the ball. At this time, the time for completing the display of the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 70B when shifting from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is based on the entry into the first start port 45 in the normal game state. It may be controlled so as to be shorter than the time when the display of the hold icon is completed (see FIG. 44). Further, as shown in FIG. 46, when the image is switched at the end of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed and the specific effect (SP reach effect) is being executed. A hold icon based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 45 is displayed (in particular, see FIG. 46 (f)). At this time, the time for completing the display of the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 70B when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed is based on the entry into the first start port 45 in the normal gaming state. It may be controlled so as to be shorter than the time when the display of the hold icon is completed (see FIG. 44). With the gaming machine controlled in this way, the player can enter the first start port 45 during the time-saving game state or the specific effect (SP reach effect) by the player. It can be recognized immediately and surely after the end of the production).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the voice output device 9 generates a notification sound when the increase display of the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 70B based on the entry into the first start port 45 is executed. Is controlled to output. In the gaming machine controlled in this way, as shown in FIG. 38, when the increase display of the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is executed in the customer waiting state, the hold icon is increased. The output period (10 frames) of the generated notification sound in the voice output device 9 can be made longer than the display execution period (1 or 5 frames). In the game machine controlled in this way, even if the execution period of the increase display of the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is short, the number of hold memories is increased by the generation notification sound by the voice output device 9. It is possible to make the player surely recognize what has been done.

[Characteristics of Third Embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are different, and the variation patterns 1A to 1C which are stopped and displayed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. In the second display mode, at least two of the effect symbols of the three effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are common, and the variation patterns 2A to 3C which are stopped and displayed in the reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode are , Although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, the recognizable times of all the effect symbols 70a can be set to be different. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the variation patterns 1A to 1C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 52-2 (d) in the pseudo-continuous effect and the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable times of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C are the display time of FIG. 50-2 (c) in the battle effect or the resurrection effect and the display time of FIG. , The execution time of the variation end suggestion effect is combined, which is 1.5 to 5.5 seconds. Further, in the fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C and the fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C, as described above, the mode of the fluctuation end suggestion effect is different, and although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in the variation, all the effects of the effect symbols 70a are produced. It is also possible to make the mode of the effect in the effect symbol during the time when the symbol is recognizable different. In such an embodiment, the recognizable times of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a are different between the non-reach case and the reach case in the first display mode, and the effect during the time is different. Since the modes are different, it is possible to prevent the player from impairing the expectation for the big hit until the second display mode suggests the result of whether or not the jackpot is achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the present embodiment, the variation patterns 2A to 2C and the effect symbols 70a, which are normal reach as the first display mode in a state where at least one effect symbol sequence of the effect symbols 70a is in a variable display and the effect symbols cannot be seen, In the variation patterns 3A to 3C in which the SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode in a state where at least one effect symbol sequence is variable display and the effect symbol is invisible, the special symbol TZ is in the variation display. The recognizable times of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a can be set to be different. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the variation patterns 2A to 2C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 52-2 (d) in the pseudo-continuous effect and the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect. , 1.5-2.5 seconds. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 3A to 3C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 50-2 (c) in the battle effect or the resurrection effect and the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect. It takes 3 to 5.5 seconds. Further, in the fluctuation patterns 2A to 2C and the fluctuation patterns 3A to 3C, as described above, the mode of the fluctuation end suggestion effect is different, and although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in the variation, all the effects of the effect symbols 70a are produced. It is also possible to make the mode of the effect in the effect symbol during the time when the symbol is recognizable different. In such an embodiment, the recognizable times of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a are different between the case of normal reach and the case of executing the SP reach effect in the first display mode, and during the time. Since the mode of the production is different, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation for the jackpot until the second display mode suggests the result of whether or not the jackpot is achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns 2B, 2C, in which at least one of the battle effect, the resurrection effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect, which are the effects in which the special symbol TZ gradually improves the expectation during the variation display, is executed. In 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C, and in the fluctuation patterns 2A and 4A in which none of the SP reach effect, the revival effect, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ varies. It is possible to make the recognizable times of all the effect symbols 70a of the effect symbol 70a, which are being displayed, different. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 2B, 2C, 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C is shown in FIG. It is a combination of the display time of (d), the display time of FIGS. 50-2 (c) and (e) in the battle effect, the display time of FIG. 53 (e) in the resurrection effect, and the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect. , 3.5-7 seconds. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the variation patterns 2A and 4A depends on whether or not the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect is included, and is 1.5 to 3 seconds. Further, as described above, the variation patterns 2B, 2C, 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C and the variation patterns 2A, 4A have different modes of the variation end suggestion effect. It is also possible to make the mode of the effect in the effect symbol during the time when all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized different even though the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. In such an embodiment, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a depends on whether or not the SP reach effect, the revival effect, and the pseudo continuous effect are executed while the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed. Since the mode of the production during the time is different as well as different, it is possible to prevent the player from impairing the expectation for the jackpot until the second display mode suggests the result of whether or not the jackpot is achieved. Can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, while the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, at least one of a revival effect and a pseudo-continuous effect in which the recognizable mode of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times during one variation of the special symbol TZ is executed. As shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the variation pattern to be performed is compared with the variation pattern in which at least none of the revival effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the variation display of the special symbol TZ. Although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized for a long time, and the probability of becoming a jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode can be increased. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols in the variation pattern in which at least one of the revival effect and the pseudo-continuous effect and the variation end suggestion effect is executed is shown in FIG. 52-1 (d) in the pseudo-continuous effect. Since the display time of the revival effect or the display time of FIG. 53 (e) in the revival effect is combined with the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect, at least one of the revival effect and the pseudo continuous effect and the variation end suggestion effect are not executed. Compared to the fluctuation pattern, the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect is longer. In such an embodiment, depending on whether or not at least one of the revival effect and the pseudo-continuous effect and the variation end suggestion effect is executed while the special symbol TZ is variable display, all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a are executed. Since the recognizable time of the game is different and the probability of winning a jackpot is different, at least one of the revival effect and the pseudo-continuous effect and the variable end suggestion effect are executed, which impairs the player's expectation for the jackpot. It can be prevented and the interest can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are different, and compared with the variation patterns 1A to 1C which are stopped and displayed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. In the second display mode, at least two of the effect symbols in the three effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are common, and the variation patterns 2A to 3C are stopped and displayed in a reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. However, as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, the time during which all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized is longer, and the second display mode is used. It is possible to increase the probability of executing at least one of the battle effect, the resurrection effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect that raises the expectation before the game. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the variation patterns 1A to 1C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 52-2 (d) in the pseudo-continuous effect and the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable times of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C are the display time of FIG. 50-2 (c) in the battle effect or the resurrection effect and the display time of FIG. , The execution time of the variation end suggestion effect is combined, which is 1.5 to 5.5 seconds. In such an embodiment, the recognizable times of all the production symbols of the production symbol 70a are different between the non-reach case and the reach in the first display mode, and the battle effect, the revival effect, and the like. Since the probability of executing at least one of the pseudo-continuous effects is different, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation for the jackpot until the second display mode is suggested as to whether or not the jackpot is the result. , Can improve the interest.

According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are different, and compared with the fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C which are stopped and displayed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. As shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C, which are the jackpot suggestion modes in the second display mode, are the effect symbols 70a in which the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. Make sure that all the production symbols can be recognized for a long time, and that the probability of executing at least one of the battle production, the resurrection production, and the pseudo-continuous production that improves the expectation before the second display mode is increased. be able to. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the variation patterns 1A to 1C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 52-1 (d) in the pseudo-continuous effect and the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable times of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C are the display time of FIG. 50-2 (e) in the battle effect, the display time of FIG. The display time shown in FIG. 53 (e) and the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect are combined, which is 3 to 7 seconds. In the present embodiment as described above, in the second display mode, the recognizable time of all the production symbols of the production symbol 70a differs depending on whether the non-reach loss occurs or the jackpot is achieved, and the battle production, the revival production, etc. Since the probability of executing at least one of the pseudo-continuous effects is different, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation for the jackpot until the second display mode is suggested as to whether or not the jackpot is the result. , Can improve the interest.

According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are different, and compared with the fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C which are stopped and displayed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. In the second display mode, at least two of the effect symbols in the three effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are common, and the variation patterns 2A to 3C are stopped and displayed in a reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. As shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the probability of executing various variation end suggestion effects can be increased. In such an embodiment, the probability of executing the variation end suggestion effect differs between the case of non-reach loss and the case of reach loss in the second display mode, so that the result of whether or not it is a big hit is suggested. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation for the jackpot until the second display mode is reached, and it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the present embodiment, the jackpot in the second display mode is compared with the variation patterns 1A to 3C in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode or the reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. As shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the variation patterns 4A to 5C, which are the suggestion modes, can have a higher probability of executing various variation end suggestion effects. In the present embodiment as described above, since the probability of executing the variation end suggestion effect differs between the case where the loss suggestion mode is adopted and the case where the jackpot suggestion mode is adopted in the second display mode, the result of whether or not the jackpot is present is determined. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation for the jackpot until the suggested second display mode is reached, and it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all the effect symbol rows of the effect symbol 70a are different, and compared with the fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C which are stopped and displayed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. Therefore, the fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C, which are the jackpot suggestion modes in the second display mode, have a higher probability of executing various fluctuation end suggestion effects as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2. That is, it is possible to make the probability that various variation end suggestion effects are executed lower in the case of the non-reach loss suggestion mode than in the case of the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. In the present embodiment as described above, since the probability of executing the variation end suggestion effect differs between the case where the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the case where the jackpot suggestion mode is adopted in the second display mode, the result of whether or not the jackpot is achieved. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation for the jackpot until the second display mode is suggested, and it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, different aspects of the variation end suggestion effect are executed between the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state. Can be. That is, in the high-probability gaming state and in the low-probability gaming state, the mode of the variation end suggestion effect is different, and although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a are recognized. It is also possible to make the mode of the effect in the effect symbol during the possible time different. In the present embodiment as described above, since the mode of the variation end suggestion effect differs between the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is high-probability or low-probability. It is easy to determine whether or not the game is played, and the game can be played without impairing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon change effect in the hold icon may be further combined. For example, the icon change effect may be executed when the first display modes of the normal reach effect, the battle effect, the revival effect, and the pseudo continuous effect are displayed. Further, the possibility of becoming a jackpot suggestion mode may be changed in the second display mode depending on whether or not the icon change effect is executed in this way. For example, the icon change effect is executed. In that case, it may be set to be more likely to be a jackpot suggestion mode than in the case where it is not executed. Further, it can be said that such an icon change effect is an effect of improving the degree of expectation which is a jackpot suggestion mode before the second display mode. Since the icon change effect can be executed so as to change stepwise in a plurality of modes, it can be said that the effect is an effect of gradually improving the degree of expectation, and it can be said that the effect is stepwise during one change of the special symbol TZ. When it is changed, it can be said that the effect is such that the recognizable state of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the special symbol TZ.

(Fourth Embodiment)
The fourth embodiment, which is an example of the embodiment of the present invention, will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 73. First, the gaming machine 1P (pachinko machine) will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 66.

In the following description, the direction toward the inside of the island installed in the game hall on one side of the game board unit 12P shown in FIG. 58 is defined as the rear direction of the game machine 1P. Further, the direction toward the player on the other side of the game board unit 12P is defined as the front direction of the game machine 1P. Further, the right, left, up, and down directions of the paper surface in the rear view of the game board unit 12P shown in FIG. 59 are the right direction, the left direction, the up direction, and the down direction of the game machine 1P, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 58, the game machine 1P of the present embodiment includes an outer frame 10Z, a game board unit 12P, and an inner frame 14P. The outer frame 10Z is directly attached to the island installed in the amusement park. The outer frame 10Z is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which the vertical direction is longer than the horizontal direction. The game board unit 12P and the inner frame 14P are rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 10Z in the vicinity of one vertical side of the outer frame 10Z.

As shown in FIGS. 58 to 60, the game board unit 12P mainly includes a base frame body 221, a game board 222, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board (not shown), and a back cover 124. There is.

The game board unit 12P is rotatably attached to the outer frame 10Z by rotatably attaching the base frame body 221 to the outer frame 10Z. The game board unit 12P is configured by assembling the game board 222, the image display device 123, the lamp relay board, the back cover 124, and the like to the base frame body 221.

Specifically, the game board 222 is attached to the front side of the base frame body 221 and the image display device 123, the lamp relay board, the back cover 124, and the like are assembled to the rear side of the base frame body 221.

When the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side, the base frame body 221 and the game board 222 are formed with openings (not shown) so that the liquid crystal screen (not shown) included in the image display device 123 can be seen from the front side. ing.

The game board 222 is formed with a game area in which the game ball flows down. The game board 222 is attached to the base frame 221 so that the game area faces the surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side of the base frame body 221. The image display device 123 is arranged so as to close the opening of the base frame body 221. Further, the lamp relay board is attached to the rear side of the base frame body 221. The back cover 124 covers a part of the back surface of the image display unit including the image display device 123 and the lamp relay board.

An assembly 2P, which will be described later, is assembled to the rear side of the game board unit 12P. The assembly 2P is assembled to the base frame 221 below the portion where the image display unit is covered by the back cover 124.

As shown in FIG. 58, the inner frame 14P is formed with an fitting space 241 into which a glass plate is fitted. Therefore, when the game machine 1P is assembled, the game area set on the game board of the game board unit 12P can be seen from the front side through the glass plate fitted in the fitting space 241. Further, an operation handle 142, an illumination lamp 143, and the like are provided on the front side of the inner frame 14P.

The assembly 2P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 60 to 62, the assembly 2P includes a pedestal 20P, a substrate case 3P, and a protective cover 23. The pedestal 20P is a component used for attaching the board case 3P to the rear side of the game board unit 12P (see FIG. 60). As shown in FIG. 62, the pedestal 20P is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left-right direction are longer than the two sides along the up-down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 21P are formed in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the lower side. A plate-shaped hook 22 is provided at the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The shaft portion 21P has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.

The board case 3P is provided with a pair of hook portions 49P that engage with each shaft portion 21P. The pair of hook portions 49P are provided on the lower side of the outer case 45P, which will be described later. The hook portion 49P is formed in a U shape that is convex toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the substrate case 3P is attached to the pedestal 20P, the substrate case 3P is arranged so that the hook portion 49P is convex toward the back surface side. Then, since the hook portion 49P is in a state where it can be engaged with the shaft portion 21P, the board case 3P is brought close to the pedestal 20P, and each hook portion 49P is engaged with each shaft portion 21P.

Then, when the hook portion 49P engages with the shaft portion 21P, the substrate case 3P is rotated around the shaft portion 21P counterclockwise when viewed from the left side (in the direction of the arrow of the symbol C in FIG. 63), and the substrate case 3P is rotated. Is superimposed on the pedestal 20P. As shown in FIG. 61, at this time, the plate-shaped hook 22 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 20P is hooked on the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the substrate case 3P. Therefore, the substrate case 3P is fixed to the pedestal 20P by the engagement between the hook portion 49P and the shaft portion 21P and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 22 and the substrate case 3P.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the protective cover 23 is then attached to the substrate case 3P. The protective cover 23 covers the lower portion of the substrate case 3P including the hook portion 49P. In this way, the assembly 2P is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board unit 12P.

The control board 501 and the board case 3P will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, the control board 501 that controls the game is housed in the board case 3P. ROM 502 is mounted on the control board 501. Further, a plurality of electronic components 595 different from the ROM 502 are mounted on the control board 501. The plurality of electronic components 595 includes various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), a plurality of connectors 771,772,773,774,775,776 are mounted on the control board 501. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 64 (b), and may be omitted in other drawings.

The ROM 502 stores the stored contents (data) used for controlling the game. Further, the ROM 502 stores stored contents (data) that affect the result of the game. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right in the lower part of the control board 501. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside the six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 3P.

Of the plurality of connectors 771 to 776, the plurality of connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connector 774, 775 is connected to at least a part of a general winning opening detection switch, a first starting opening detection switch, a second starting opening detection switch, and a large winning opening detection switch that detects that a game ball has won a prize. Signal is input. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are of a general winning opening detection switch, a first starting opening detection switch, a second starting opening detection switch, and a large winning opening detection switch 1 for detecting that a game ball has won a prize. It is assumed that all signals are input. The detection signal connector 774,775 has a different color from the other connectors 771,772,773,776. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent colors, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different colors from the fluorescent colors.

The ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582. The first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits a signal between the ROM 502 and the control board 501. The first signal pin 582 is visibly arranged via the substrate case 3P. Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the main body 580 of the ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the control board 501. Therefore, the first signal pin 582 can be visually recognized from the front via the substrate case 3P.

The signal pin provided in each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is referred to as a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 62). The second signal pin 583 transmits a signal between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the control board 501. The signal is not limited to a digital signal, but also includes an analog signal. It is visibly arranged via the substrate case 3P. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, left, right, or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected to the control board 501. Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the substrate case 3P.

As shown in FIG. 62, the board case 3P is a box-shaped case that houses the control board 501 and ROM 502 in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. Further, the board case 3P includes the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 64 (b)) mounted on the control board 501 can be visually recognized. The substrate case 3P is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic.

The substrate case 3P includes a plurality of members 511 that include the control substrate 501, and a cutting member 6P that cuts the sealing seal 7P. The plurality of members 511 include an inner case 40P, an outer case 45P, and a cap 8P. The inner case 40P is combined with the outer case 45P to form an inner case 581 that includes the control board 501. The outer case 45P is provided on the rear side of the substrate case 3P, which is the ROM 502 side. The inner case 40P is provided on the front side of the substrate case 3P, which is opposite to the ROM 502 side. Note that, in FIG. 61 (c), of the electrical components provided on the control board 501 included in the transparent substrate case 3P, only the ROM 502 is shown, and the other electrical components are not shown. (The same applies to FIG. 66 (a) and the like).

As shown in FIG. 65, each of the cases 40P and 45P is a seal constituting the control board storage portions 41P and 46P for accommodating the control board 501 (see FIG. 62) and the sealing base portion 5P (see FIG. 66) described later. It is provided with stopping portions 51P and 56. The control board storage portions 41P and 46P are projected from the plate portions 42P and 47P formed in a substantially rectangular shape and the peripheral edges of the plate portions 42P and 47P, and have one surface of each plate portion 42P and 47P. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 43P and 48P that surround it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the control board 501 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 42P of the inner case 40P. The cylindrical portion 565 is formed with a hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction. A screw thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the control board 501, a hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

The control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40P. More specifically, the hole portion 567 of the control board 501 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the inner case 40P. The shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 64) is inserted into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 from the rear side of the control board 501 via the hole portion 567. The screw thread formed in the hole portion 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the screw thread provided in the shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 64 (b)). As a result, the control board 501 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40P. That is, the control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40P side.

As shown in FIG. 65, of the flange portion 43P of the control board storage portion 41P, a portion (hereinafter referred to as a “male portion”) protruding from the plate portion 42P along two long sides of the plate portion 42P. Is formed with three hook grooves 430 formed in an L shape.

On the other hand, of the flange portion 48P of the control board storage portion 46P, the portion protruding from the plate portion 47P along the two long sides of the plate portion 47P (hereinafter referred to as "female portion") has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 480 into which the male portion of the control board storage portion 41P can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. Further, a hook piece 481 is formed in each insertion groove portion 480.

When the inner case 40P to which the control board 501 is screwed by the screw 769 and the outer case 45P are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 43P is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 48P. Then, the control board housing portions 41P and 46P are slid to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 65 along the left-right direction. Then, since the hook groove 430 provided in the male portion engages with the hook piece 481, the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

When combined in this way, the control board housing portions 41P and 46P form a box-shaped inclusion portion 581 that is shielded from the outside inside. The control board 501 (see FIG. 62) is housed in the inclusion portion 581. Therefore, the possibility that the control board 501, ROM 502, etc. are illegally replaced can be suppressed.

The control board 501 is attached to the inside of the control board storage portion 46P before the control board storage portions 41P and 46P are combined. At this time, the IC or the like mounted on the control board 501 is attached so as to face the plate portion 47P of the control board storage portion 46P. This is because the plate portion 47P is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the control board 501 is housed in the board case 3P, the electronic components such as the ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501 are illegally replaced. This is so that it can be confirmed from the outside via the plate portion 47P. As shown in FIG. 59, in the present embodiment, when the assembly 2P including the board case 3P is attached to the game board unit 12P, the control board 501 in the board case 3P is connected to the control board 501 from the back side of the game machine 1P through the outer case 45P. The mounted electronic components can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 65, sealing portions 51P and 56 are provided at the right end portions of the cases 40P and 45P, respectively. As shown in FIG. 66, the cases 40P and 45P are provided with a first screw stop piece 91 and a second screw stop piece 96 above the sealing portions 51P and 56.

When the control board housing portions 41P and 46P are slid and combined, the sealing base portion 5P is formed by the sealing portions 51P and 56 at the longitudinal end of the sealing body 4P in which these are combined.

As shown in FIG. 64, when the cap 8P is attached to the sealing body 4P by covering the sealing base portion 5P, the first screw stop piece 91 and the second screw stop are attached to the end portion of the sealing body 4P in the longitudinal direction. In addition to the piece 96, the third screw stop piece 98 included in the cap 8P overlaps to form the screw stop portion 9P for screwing.

As shown in FIG. 65, the sealing portions 51P and 56 project to the right from the right end portions of the control board housing portions 41P and 46P. The sealing portions 51P and 56 have the same height along the left-right direction and the same width in the vertical direction.

Long groove portions 512 and 562 are formed in the sealing portions 51P and 56 along the left-right direction. Two groove portions 562 parallel to each other in the left-right direction are formed in the sealing portion 56 so as to be separated from each other for a predetermined period of time, and one groove portion 512 is formed in the sealing portion 51P along the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 66, when the cases 40P and 45P are combined as described above, the sealing portions 51P and 56 form a sealing base portion 5P on the right portion of the combined control board housing portions 41P and 46P. To do.

In the sealing base portion 5P, the sealing portions 51P and 56 are arranged in parallel at regular intervals, and an insertion / extraction space 5ap (see FIG. 66) is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 51P and 56 facing each other. To.

As shown in FIG. 65, the sealing seal 7P is used as a means for sealing the substrate case 3P, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by a certified organization or the like.

The seal seal 7P is provided with an adhesive surface on one surface of an easily cut material such as paper in consideration of cutability, and a plurality of cuts are formed. Although not shown, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), or the like is printed on the seal sticker 7P, for example. In addition, the word "opening prohibited" is also printed on the seal sticker 7P.

The cutting member 6P is formed in a shape having a base portion 60P, a pair of gripping portions 61P, and a cutting portion 64P. The foundation portion 60P, which is the basis of the cutting member 6P, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64P is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 60P. The cut portion 64P is a portion where the tip of the base portion 60P is formed in a blade shape. The pinching portions 61P are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base portion 60P, and are formed in a shape bent in a "<" shape as a whole. The left end portion of the picking portion 61P is referred to as a free end portion 61a.

The cap 8P is formed in a size that can cover the entire sealing base portion 5P by covering the sealing base portion 5P, and is formed to be detachably attached to the sealing base portion 5P.

The cap 8P includes a box portion 80 formed in a bowl shape that covers the sealing base portion 5P, and a third screw stop piece 98 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the box portion 80. On the inner surface of the box portion 80, a protrusion 82 is provided at a position where the free end portion 61a of the pinching portion 61P of the cutting member 6P inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5ap is caught when the cap 8P is attached to the sealing base portion 5P. It is provided. A groove 86 is formed on the inner surface of the box 80.

The cutting member 6P is inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5ap (see FIG. 66) of the sealing base portion 5P. After that, the sealing sticker 7P is attached. Further, when the cap 8P is put on the sealing base portion 5P, the groove portion 86 fits into a part of the cutting member 6P inserted in the insertion / extraction space 5ap. Further, the protrusion 82 engages with the free end portion 61a of the grip portion 61P of the cutting member 6P.

As shown in FIG. 64, as described above, when the cap 8P is put on the sealing base portion 5P, the third screw stop piece 98 becomes the first screw stop piece 91 of the inner case 40P and the second screw stop piece 91 of the outer case 45P. It overlaps with the combination of the screw stop piece 96 and constitutes the screw stop portion 9P for screwing. When the caulking member 30P is driven into the screw fastening portion 9P, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P, and the cap 8P are fixed to each other.

When the substrate case 3P is unsealed, the caulking member 30P is removed and the cap 8P is removed from the sealing base portion 5P. The same applies when the seal of the board case 3P is illegally released.

The cutting member 6P and the cap 8P are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 8P is removed from the sealing base portion 5P, the cutting member 6P is also removed from the sealing base portion 5P at the same time. Then, the seal seal 7P is irreparably scratched by the cut portion 64P or the like.

The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, the identification display 520 is attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P, and the cap 8P. The identification display 520 is a display including information about the game machine 1P. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the control board 501 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the outer case 45P is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the inner case 40P is referred to as an identification display 524. The identification display 520 provided on the cap 8P is referred to as an identification display 525.

As shown in FIG. 62, the identification display 521 is displayed by silk printing on the upper part of the back surface of the control board 501. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification displays 523, 524, 525 attached to the board case 3P are information identification units for displaying specific information. The identification display 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the inner case 40P by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the inner case 40P (see FIG. 66). The identification display 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 8P by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the cap 8P. The display mode of the identification display 523 and the relationship with the information identification unit will be described later.

Identification labels 521 to 525 are related to each other and include at least identification labels 529 suggesting the same content. In the present embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string of "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string of "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The identification display 529 suggesting the same content in the identification display 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to a manufacturer name, a model name, or the like. In the present embodiment, as an example, among "ABCD", "AB" represents a manufacturer name and "CD" represents a model name.

In the identification display 521 to 525, the manufacturer name itself is displayed as "AA company" in the identification display 1595 and 1596 of FIG. 72, instead of displaying the manufacturer name by "AB" included in "ABCD". You may. Further, instead of displaying the model name by "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed as in "CR Ai" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 of FIG. 72. Further, the identification display 521 to 525 may display a model like the model "GH101" in the identification display 1595, 1596 of FIG. 72. In this case, the identification indications suggesting the same contents in the identification indications 521 to 525 are the model name "CR Ai", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA company".

In the following description, in the outer case 45P, the surface forming the inside of the substrate case 3P is referred to as an inner surface 532. In the outer case 45P, the surface forming the outer side of the substrate case 3P is referred to as an outer surface 531. As shown in FIGS. 61 (c), 64 (c), and 66, a position display unit 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. The position display unit 541 is a portion that displays a position to which the identification display 523 is given. The position display unit 541 is provided in a portion of the substrate case 3P that is different from the portion that overlaps the ROM 502. More specifically, the position display unit 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the outer case 45P. The ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display unit 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display unit 541 is a recess recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmitting material is attached to the position display portion 541. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example. A printing unit 797 is printed on the seal unit 542. In the present embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is an identification display 523. Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, the position display portion 541 is in a state where the identification display 523 is attached. The seal portion 542 is arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the substrate case 3P. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the substrate case 3P when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 64 (b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and in reality, other electronic components (see FIG. 62) also exist. The identification display 523 of the outer case 45P is displayed so that the mounting portion of the ROM 502 has a visible angle. In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502. The identification display 523 may overlap with the mounting location of the ROM 502 when the substrate case 3P is at a predetermined angle, as in the case of the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 73) in the modified example described later.

In this way, when a sticker or the like with an identification mark is attached by printing or the like and the object is in a state where the identification mark is attached, the sticker or the like including the identification mark is called an information identification part. I will do it. In the present embodiment, the seal unit 542 including the identification display 523 is an information identification unit. The identification display 520 is attached to the control board 501, ROM 502, inner case 40P, outer case 45P, and cap 8P, but not one is attached to each, but two or more are attached to each. Sometimes. For example, the ROM 502 may be provided with two identification displays, and may also have two information identification units.

As described above, the game machine 1P according to the present embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a substrate case 3P containing the control substrate 501 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 61, 62, 64, and 66, the substrate case 3P is provided with a position display unit 541 which is a portion for displaying a position to which the identification display 523 is applied. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3P as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, at the time of manufacturing the game machine 1P, it is easier for the manufacturer to grasp the position to which the identification display 520 is given, as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification display 523 is given by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification display 523 is given at different positions among the plurality of game machines 1P can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3P as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the position display unit 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3P and is a recess for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display unit 541 is provided as a recess, the inspector can grasp the position of the position display unit 541 as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is displayed on the flat surface of the substrate case 3P by printing or the like. Easy to do. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

In addition, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display unit 541 which is a recess. Therefore, in the case of mass-producing the game machine 1P, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1P. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1P, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the position display unit 541 is provided at a portion different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502 in the substrate case 3P. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display unit 541 and the ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily discovered that the ROM 502 has been replaced due to fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the position display unit 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3P and is a recess for positioning the identification display 520 (523). Since the position display portion 541 which is a recess is provided, it is possible to prevent the seal from peeling off as compared with the case where the seal portion 542 is attached to the flat surface of the substrate case 3P, for example, when touched by a hand. it can. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is fraudulent and the inspection takes time. However, since the seal portion is protected by such a position display portion 541, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the seal unit 542 including the identification display 523, which is the information identification unit attached to the substrate case 3P, and the identification display 522, which is the information identification unit attached to the ROM 502, have at least the same identification display. Includes 529. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P is displayed so that the mounting portion of the ROM 502 has a visible angle. Further, in the present embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502. Since the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P is displayed so that the mounting location of the ROM 502 has a visible angle, the inspector can see the ROM 502 with the same identification display 529 and the substrate case 3P. It can be confirmed and it can be easily confirmed that no fraudulent activity has been carried out. Further, even if the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can determine whether or not the ROM 502 and the identification display 529 attached to the board case 3P are the same. It can be easily confirmed that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the seal unit 542 including the identification display 523, which is the information identification unit attached to the board case 3P, the identification display 522, which is the information identification unit attached to the ROM 502, and the information identification displayed on the control board 501. The identification display 521 which is a part includes at least the identification display 529 (character string of "ABCD" in the present embodiment) suggesting the same contents. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been performed by confirming the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3P to which the identification display 529 suggesting the same contents is attached. Further, even if at least one of the control board 501 and the ROM 502 is replaced with the other control board 501 and the ROM 502 due to fraudulent activity, the identification display 529 attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3P is the same. By determining whether or not there is, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

The board case 3P includes a control board 501 so that a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 can be visually recognized. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is illegally connected to the connectors 771 to 776. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are in a fluorescent color, the inspector can easily see them as compared with the case where the detection signal connectors are not in a fluorescent color. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is illegally connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, a plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to confirm the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 as compared with the case where there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is illegally connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the first signal pin 582 included in the ROM 502 is visibly arranged via the substrate case 3P. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the first signal pin 582. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the second signal pin 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 is visibly arranged via the substrate case 3P. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is illegally connected to the second signal pin 583. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40P side by a screw 769 (see FIG. 64B). Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the control board 501 as compared with the case where the control board 501 is not screwed. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P are slid to each other and combined. Therefore, even if a person who intends to cheat simply tries to separate the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P in order to separate the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P are separated. It is hard to be done. Therefore, it is difficult to replace the control board 501 illegally. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made. In each of the following modifications, the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above embodiments are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The position display unit 541 was a recess, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position display unit 541 may be a convex portion. FIG. 67 shows an arrow cross section at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 64 in the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1003 according to the modified example of the substrate case 3P. As shown in FIG. 67, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1003 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the outer case 45P and projects to the rear side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display unit 541 by a seal unit 542.

Further, the position display unit 541 is provided on the outer surface 531 but is not limited to this. For example, the position display unit 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 68 shows the cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 64 in the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1103 according to the modified example of the substrate case 3P. As shown in FIG. 68, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1103 is a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 1103, and is recessed on the rear side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display unit 541 by a seal unit 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1103 via the transparent outer case 45P.

FIG. 69 shows the cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 64 in the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1203 according to the modified example of the substrate case 3P. As shown in FIG. 69, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1203 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 1203 and protrudes to the front side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display unit 541 by a seal unit 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1203 via the transparent outer case 45P.

As described above, the position display unit 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3P, and is a convex portion or a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display unit 541 that is a convex portion or a concave portion is provided, the inspector can display the position of the identification display 520 as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is displayed on the flat surface of the substrate case 3P by printing or the like. , Easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520 attached to the substrate case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

In addition, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display unit 541 that is a convex portion or a concave portion. Therefore, in the case of mass-producing the game machine 1P, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1P. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1P, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the plurality of members 511 including the control board 501 may not include a part of the outer case 45P, the inner case 40P, and the cap 8P. Further, the plurality of members 511 may further include members different from the outer case 45P, the inner case 40P, and the cap 8P.

Further, the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the plurality of members 511 are provided with the identification display 520, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 may be attached with the associated identification display 520. For example, the identification display 525 may not be attached to the caps 8P included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification display 524 may not be attached to the inner case 40P included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification display 523 may not be attached to the outer case 45P included in the plurality of members 511. The inspector can check the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 to easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, whether or not the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 is related. By determining whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P. In this case, the inspector shall check the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P, and easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. Can be done. For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P is related. By determining whether or not it is done, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least the outer case 45P and the ROM 502. In this case, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed by checking at least the identification display 520 attached to the outer case 45P and the ROM 502. For example, even if the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can easily determine whether or not at least the outer case 45P and the identification display 520 attached to the ROM 502 are related. It can be confirmed that cheating has been committed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 520 may be related to each other. For example, the identification display 520 may be all the same identification display (for example, all “ABCD01” or the like). Further, the identification display 520 may be different from each other, and the same identification display 529 may not be included. The description content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Further, the identification display 520 does not have to be a character string. For example, the identification display 520 may have various marks. Moreover, the mode in which the identification display 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification display 521 but also the identification displays 521 to 525 may be printed and attached to the seal portion. Further, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Further, the identification indications 523 to 525 may all be stamped by the mold for manufacturing the substrate case 3P.

Further, the identification display 520 may be formed inside the material of the substrate case 3P. Hereinafter, the modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The substrate case 1303 shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 is a modification of the substrate case 3P. In the board case 1303, the portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as the identification display unit 1390. Further, the portion outside the identification display unit 1390 is referred to as an outer portion 1391. As shown in FIG. 71, the identification display unit 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391. Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391.

The identification display 523 is formed inside a member (the material of the outer case 45P in this embodiment) that forms the identification display unit 1390. The identification display 523 is provided in the identification display unit 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers (four in the present embodiment) in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384.

The letter 1371 of "A" of the identification display 523 is formed in the layer 1381. The letter 1372 of "B" is formed in the hierarchy 1382. The letter 1373 of "C" is formed in the layer 1383. The letter 1374 of "D" is formed in the hierarchy 1384. The character "0" 1375 is formed in the hierarchy 1382. The letter 1376 of "3" is formed in the layer 1383.

The method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display unit 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification display 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. The 3D laser engraving is a technique of condensing a laser and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns inside the material of the substrate case 3P at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm. By forming a plurality of the cracks, the identification display 523 is formed inside the substrate case 3P.

In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, for example, the identification display 523 is more difficult to remove than the case where the entire identification display 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. Further, when the identification display 523 is removed by fraud, a scratch is formed on the substrate case 1303. Therefore, the inspector can easily detect fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 523 is provided in the identification display unit 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. Therefore, it is difficult to remove the identification display 523 as compared with the case where the identification display 523 is formed only on one layer. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, in the substrate case 1303, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In this case, it is necessary to scrape the substrate case 3P deeper when an unauthorized person tries to remove the identification display 520 as compared with the case where L1 is L2 or less. Therefore, the substrate case 1303 is liable to be scratched. Therefore, the inspector can easily detect fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

The identification display 523 may not be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display unit 1390. For example, the identification display 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 may be equal to or less than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. Further, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification display 520 provided on the substrate case 1303 such as the identification display 524 and 525 may be similarly formed inside the substrate case 1303.

In the above embodiment, the substrate case 1303 is an example of the "case portion" of the present invention.

Further, various seals may be attached to the substrate case 3P in addition to the seal portion 542 and the like. Further, the content displayed on the printing unit (for example, the printing unit 797) provided on various seals such as the seal unit 542 is not limited. For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1561 are attached to the substrate case 1551 according to the modified example shown in FIG. 72. In FIG. 72, members having the same configuration as that of the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper part of the central portion in the left-right direction of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1551. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 3P. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmitting material. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 62), respectively. In FIG. 72, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 62) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.

A printing unit 1571 is printed on the seal unit 1560. The printing unit 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing unit 1571 is colored and has a white background as an example in the present embodiment. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code unit 1572, an information display unit 1573, and a description area 1570. The seal unit 1560 is provided so that the printing unit 1571, the code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the description area 1570 are positioned so as not to overlap with the ROM 502.

The cord portion 1572 is provided in the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. The code unit 1572 includes predetermined information. The code unit 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). There is. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code unit 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code unit 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 stored in a device different from the game machine 1P (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Resource), which is information included in the code unit 1572, is read by a camera provided in an information mobile terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information mobile terminal includes the delivery destination of the control board 501 (for example, the name of the store to which the game machine 1P was delivered), and whether or not the game machine 1P has been discarded. Information is included. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 and the information such as whether or not the game machine 1P has been discarded.

The information display unit 1573 includes various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the character string "EF001" is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored area (white in the present embodiment). The character string is, for example, a control number of the control board 501. With the control number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the game machine 1P and whether or not the game machine 1P has been discarded from the information associated with the control number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. Further, the rectangular region of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

As an example, the description area 1570 is provided in a total of six in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. The description area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) substrate. Above the upper left description area 1570, "Opener" is printed in black. "Opening date" is printed in black above the description area 1570 on the upper right. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the description area 1570 on the upper left. Circle 2 is printed on the left side of the description area 1570 in the center of the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the description area 1570 at the lower left.

For example, when the substrate case 3P is opened, the inspector describes the name of the inspector in the description area 1570 on the left side, and the date when the substrate case 3P is opened is described in the description area 1570 on the right side. The inspector may describe in the description area 1570 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the control board 501 was fraudulent.

The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 798. The peep portion 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The peep section 1574 has light transmission. In the present embodiment, the peep portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In the present embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the description areas 1570 in three lines in the up-down direction. Further, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the cord portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side and the upper two description areas 1570. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the description areas 1570 in two rows in the horizontal direction.

Further, the seal unit 1561 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name, a model, and a manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which such information is printed is also referred to as a printing unit 1563. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai", a model "GH101", and a manufacturer name "AA".

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is attached to the left side of the identification display 522 "ABCD02" of the ROM 502. The seal unit 1562 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name, a model, and a manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1596 has a model name "CR Ai", a model "GH101", and a manufacturer name "AA". The identification display 522 of the ROM 502 is also an information identification unit, that is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two information identification units.

Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least identification indications 1595 and 1596 suggesting the same contents. In the present embodiment, the species name "CR Ai", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA" in the identification labels 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but some of them may be the same.

Although the identification indications 1595 and 1596 are attached to the substrate case 3P and the ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, on the control board 501, the identification display 1595, 159
It may be displayed including the same identification display as in 6.

As described above, the substrate case 1551 and the control substrate 501 according to this modification are formed. In this embodiment, the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 have a plurality of electronic components 595 (FIG. 6).
Since it is arranged so as to straddle at least a part of (see 1), for example, the seal portion 542,1560.
By confirming the positional relationship between the 1561 and the electronic component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the control board 501 has been fraudulent. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the area 1575 is provided, the inspector may enter the name of the inspector and the date when the substrate case 3P is opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the description area 1570). it can. In addition, the inspector can also describe in the area 1575 the date and the like on which it is confirmed whether or not the control board 501 has been fraudulent. Further, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the inspector to confirm the characters and the like described in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the viewing unit 1574 is provided, the inspector can confirm the electronic component 798 via the viewing unit 1574. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 798 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the viewing portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the cord portion 1572 is provided at a position where it does not overlap with the ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the code unit 1572 is associated with the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 stored in a device different from the game machine 1P. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 by using the code unit 1572. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the control board 501 with a different delivery destination has been fraudulently mounted. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the fraud in which the ROM 502 is replaced by checking the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name. Can be done. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name, the model, and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The shape of ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 64, the ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body portion 580 may extend back and forth and left and right. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the control board 501. Further, when the main body portion 580 extends back and forth and left and right, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body portion 580.

Further, various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed so that the mounting location of the ROM 502 has a visible angle. For example, FIG. 73 is a view of the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 as viewed diagonally upward from the rear. In FIG. 73, members other than the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 are not shown. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps with the mounting location of the ROM 502. That is, FIG. 73 is a view from an angle at which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the ROM 502. However, as shown in FIG. 72, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 72 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed so that the mounting portion of the ROM 502 has a visible angle. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, the information of the identification display 523) is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. It should be done.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Next, a fifth embodiment, which is an example of the embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 74-1 to 74-6. In the fifth embodiment described below, those having the same configuration as the fourth embodiment use the same reference numerals as those of the fourth embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the outline of the configuration of the substrate case 1700 and the control substrate 1705 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74-1 to 74-4. FIG. 74-1 is a rear view of the substrate case 1700 in which the control substrate 1705 according to the fifth embodiment is housed. FIG. 74-2 (a) is a schematic view illustrating the configuration of the seal portion 1710, and FIG. 74-2 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the date mark portion 1720. FIG. 74-3 (a) is a schematic view illustrating the configuration of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, and FIG. 74-3 (b) describes a state in which the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to the substrate case 1700. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 74-4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display configuration of the information display 1750.

As shown in FIG. 74-1, the game machine 1P of the fifth embodiment includes a control board 1705 and a board case 1700 for accommodating the control board 1705. The substrate case 1700 has substantially the same configuration as the substrate case 1551 which is a modification of the fourth embodiment, but includes a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an opening prohibition seal 1730, and a RAM clear operation portion 1785, which will be described later. ing. The control board 1705 has substantially the same configuration as the control board 501 which is a modification of the fourth embodiment, but includes an information display 1750, an operation key unit 1780, and a RAM clear button, which will be described later.

The seal portion 1710 is made of a light-transmitting material, and is attached to the upper part of the central portion in the left-right direction of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1700. Each of the seal portions 1710 is arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) and the like. The date mark portion 1720 is formed at the lower part of the central portion of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1700 in the left-right direction so as to have a convex shape from the outer case 45P on the front side of the outer case 45P. The opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to the seal sticking portion 1701 formed at the right end portion in the left-right direction of the substrate case 1700. The sticker sticking portion 1701 is a portion covered by the cap 8P. The RAM clear operation unit 1785 is formed in the lower portion of the outer case 45P of the board case 1700 on the right side in the left-right direction, and is configured to be able to operate the RAM clear button of the control board 1705. The operation key unit 1780 has a structure in which a specific key can be inserted and rotated, and the control board 1705 is a board case because the insertion port for the specific key is exposed from the outer case 45P of the board case 1700. It is provided so that it can be operated while being stored in the 1700. The operation key unit 1780 is connected so that a signal as to whether or not the operation key unit 1780 has been operated can be transmitted to the main CPU that controls the game of the game machine 1P.

The information display 1750 is provided at the upper corner of the control board 1705 on the right side in the left-right direction, and is arranged inside the board case 1700 made of transparent resin that covers the control board 501. Further, the information display 1750 is located at a position different from the position where the main CPU, the main ROM, and the main RAM are provided on the control board 501, and is a RAM clear operation unit provided on the board case 1700. It is provided at a position where visibility is not hindered by 1785, a seal portion 1710, or the like. Further, none of the plurality of electronic components provided on the control board 1705 such as the electronic component 595 is provided around and in the vicinity of the information display 1750. Although such an information display 1750 is provided on the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, it stands out, so that the displayed information can be easily visually recognized.

Here, the information display 1750 and the out-ball detection switch (not shown) will be described. The out-ball detection switch detects all the game balls (referred to as "out-balls" in this embodiment) fired in the game area, and can transmit the detection result data to the main control board 300 to the connection cable. Is connected. The information display 1750 displays various performances of the game machine 1P by a numerical value calculated by the main CPU based on the detection result of the out-ball detection switch (a value calculated by a calculation formula described later). is there. It is possible to determine whether or not the performance of the game machine 1P is maintained depending on whether or not the numerical value displayed on the information display 1750 is within a predetermined range.

As shown in FIG. 74-2 (a), the seal unit 1710 has substantially the same configuration as the seal unit 1560, and includes a printing unit 1711, a cord unit 1712, an information display unit 1713, a description area 1570, and a viewing unit 1574. I have. Further, by reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1712 with a predetermined terminal, the information displayed on the predetermined terminal includes the character string described in the information display unit 1713. .. That is, the predetermined information including the specific information is displayed in different modes such as the QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1712 and the character string of the information display unit 1713. Here, the configuration of the code unit 1712 and the information display unit 1713 is different from the configuration of the code unit 1572 and the information display unit 1573 of the seal unit 1560. Specifically, the character string "EF001" is printed across the colored area of the code unit 1712 and the colored area of the information display unit 1713. In the case of the seal unit 1710 having such a configuration, if either the colored area of the code unit 1712 or the colored area of the information display unit 1713 is scraped off and the information is illegally changed, the information is changed as compared with the seal unit 1560. The traces of changes can be easily clarified, and unauthorized changes in information can be suppressed. Further, as described above, the electronic component 798 provided at the position covered by the seal portion 1560 is visible from the viewing portion 1574, which means that at least a part or the whole of the electronic component 798 is relative to the control board. Not only is it visible through the peep section 1574 from the direction perpendicular to the control board, but it also means that it is visible through the peep section 1574 from a direction forming a predetermined angle rather than perpendicular to the control board. Is. Specifically, the electronic component provided at the position covered by the seal portion 1560, which is difficult to see due to the colored region 1575 from the direction perpendicular to the control board 1705, is the seal portion. It is visible through the viewing portion 1574 from a direction forming a predetermined angle rather than perpendicular to the 1560.

As shown in FIG. 74-2 (b), the date mark unit 1720 is a portion that displays the date when the substrate case 1700 is manufactured, and is composed of a date display unit 1721 and a date display unit 1726. .. The date display unit 1721 has scales 1 to 31 formed on the outer edge of the circle, and has a form in which the date manufactured is indicated by an arrow extending from the center of the circle. The year / month display unit 1726 has a scale of 1 to 12 formed on the outer edge of the circle, and the month manufactured by the arrow extending from the center of the circle is indicated, and the number manufactured at the center of the circle indicates the month. The year is shown. That is, in the date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 74-2 (b), it is shown that the substrate case 1700 was manufactured on “December 1, 2014”. The date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 74-2 (b) is a case where the outer case 45P is visually recognized from the front side of the game machine 1P, and the substrate case 1700 is visually recognized from the back side of the game machine 1P. If this is the case, it will be shown inverted (see, for example, FIG. 74-1).

As shown in FIG. 74-3 (a), the opening prohibition seal unit 1730 includes an information display unit 1731 on which a predetermined character string is printed, a code unit 1732 on which a QR code (registered trademark) or the like is printed, and is difficult to forge. A hologram display unit 1735, on which a hologram is formed, is provided. By reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1732 with a predetermined terminal, the information displayed on the predetermined terminal includes the character string described in the information display unit 1731. May be good. That is, predetermined information including specific information may be displayed in different modes such as a QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1732 and a character string of the information display unit 1731.

As shown in FIG. 74-3 (b), and when the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to the seal attachment portion 1701, it is attached so as to straddle the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1700. It will be attached so as to cover a part of the boundary portion 1738 when the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are combined. That is, since it comes into contact with the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, when the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are disassembled, the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is broken. That is, the opening prohibition seal unit 1730 is an identification display unit whose shape changes when the substrate case 1700 is disassembled, unlike the identification display unit to which various identification information such as the seal unit 1705 is attached. Further, the information display unit 1731 and the cord unit 1732 of the opening prohibition sticker unit 1730 are attached with the opening prohibition seal unit 1730 so that the entire back side of the game machine 1P in the seal attachment unit 1701 can be visually recognized. Further, the information display unit 1731 and the cord unit 1732 of the opening prohibition seal unit 1730 are provided at positions such that the top surface of the substrate case 1700 in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 is one step lower in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700. Be done. That is, the sealing portion 1710 and the opening prohibition sealing portion 1730 in the substrate case 1700 are configured so that the distances from the virtual surface obtained by extending the control substrate 1705 in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the control substrate 1705 are different. ing.

As shown in FIG. 74-4, the information display 1750 has a control unit (not shown), four 7-segment displays 1770a to 1770d configured to form a horizontal row, and a lower right of each 7-segment display. It is composed of four formed dot display units 1775a to 1775d. Further, the information display 1750 receives data from the main control board 300 so that the main control board 300 that has received the result detected by the out-ball detection switch 302a outputs the data measured based on the detection result. Output is possible and connected. Further, the information display 1750 is always lit when the power of the game machine 1P is ON. In the information display 1750, the two 7-segment display units 1770a and 1770b and the two dot display units 1775a and 1775b located on the left side are designated as the identification display unit 1780a when viewed from the front, and the two are located on the right side. The 7-segment display units 1770c and 1770d and the two dot display units 1775c and 1775d are designated as ratio display units 1780b. It is assumed that the circuits of the four 7-segment display units 1770a to 1770d and the four dot display units 1775a to 1775d are connected.

[Explanation of display mode in information display 1750]
Next, a specific display mode in the information display 1750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74-5 and 74-6. FIG. 74-5 is a table for explaining the contents and display form displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the performance display of the game machine 1P, and FIG. 74-6 shows the information display 1750 regarding the setting display of the game machine 1P. It is a table explaining the content to be displayed and the display form.

As shown in FIG. 74-5, when the performance of the game machine 1P is displayed on the information display 1750, the numerical value calculated by the main control board 300 is displayed on the ratio display unit 1780b. Specifically, the game when the game state in the predetermined section from the first power-on (every time the total number of out-balls becomes 300,000 after the first power-on becomes 60,000) is low. The ratio between the number of balls to be paid out and the number of out-balls of the game ball in the low probability state (for example, when the game is not in the low probability state and the time is not shortened) is output, and the calculation formula is "(Payout in the low probability state). The number of balls) ÷ (the number of out balls in the low probability state) × 100 ”, and the value rounded to the first decimal place is output. When the output numerical value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed on the ratio display unit. Further, even when the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on again, the measurement up to now is set to be taken over unless the RAM is abnormal.

In the identification display unit 1780a, identifiable information about the type of the numerical value displayed in the ratio display unit 1780b is displayed. Specifically, "bL." Is displayed when the measured value of the current section at the present time is displayed, and "b1." Is displayed when the calculated value in the section from the previous section to the section before the previous one is displayed. "-" B3. "Is displayed. The blinking cycle in FIG. 74-5 is 0.3 seconds for lighting and 0.3 seconds for extinguishing, and the display switching timing of "bL." To "b3." Repeats the display for 5.0 seconds in each display. It shall be.

Here, the flow of measurement in the game machine 1P of the present embodiment will be described. First, when the power is turned on for the first time in the game machine 1P and the game is started, the out ball detection switch starts the detection of the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge port in the low accuracy state. Here, since the game balls discharged from the out ball outlets are from all the out ports in the game area, the number of game balls based on the detection result by the out ball detection switch is the total number of out balls. Then, after the total number of out balls reaches 300, the payout ball measurement switch for each predetermined section in the low probability state (a switch for detecting the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, which is not shown) and Based on the detection result of the out-ball detection switch, the calculated value calculated by the main CPU is output on the information display 1750.

Further, the game machine 1P is such that the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, and the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed by operating the setting key 1780 and the RAM clear button of the RAM clear operation unit 1785. Specifically, when the power of the game machine 1P is ON and the RAM clear button is set to "ON" with the setting key unit 1780 "ON", the jackpot probability setting is changed according to the number of times the RAM clear button is pressed. When the setting is set to be changed, the setting can be confirmed by setting the setting key unit 1780 "OFF". Further, if the power of the game machine 1P is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 "ON", the setting of the current jackpot probability of the game machine 1P is displayed on the information display 1750 as described later. , You can check the settings. When the game machine 1P is shipped, the recovery information is damaged, or the power is turned on / off while the setting is being changed and a recovery error occurs, the power is turned on and the RAM is pressed with the setting key unit 1780 "ON" as described above. When the clear button is set to "ON", the setting can be changed, but if the power is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 "ON", the game is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 74-6, specifically, in the game machine 1P of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set from the first setting (low probability: 1/300) to the sixth setting (high probability: 1/250). ) Can be set in 6 stages. In this setting change and setting confirmation, in the 7-segment display unit 1770d located on the right side of the information display unit 1750, "1" to "6" are displayed according to the setting value to be changed or the currently set setting value. It is lit. Further, when the setting is changed, all the 7-segment display units 1770a to 1770d and the dot display units 1775a to 1775d blink for 5 seconds from the end of the setting change. Then, after blinking for 5 seconds, the identification display unit 1780a and the ratio display unit 1780b start displaying the performance of the game machine 1P described above. In addition, in the setting change and setting confirmation, during the setting change / setting confirmation, a voice indicating the current state such as "setting is being changed" and "setting is being confirmed" and a warning siren are output and the main The LCD displays "Settings are being changed / Settings are being confirmed". In such a game machine, regardless of the type of setting of the jackpot probability, the selection rate and the loss of a specific effect (referred to as “first effect” in FIG. 74-6) at the time of a jackpot. The selection rate of a specific effect at the time is constant.

Here, the terms and phrases used in the table of FIG. 74-6 will be described. "(At the time of big hit / at the time of loss" first effect selection rate "means that" first effect "is selected (executed) in the effect executed when it is determined to be" big hit "or" lost ". It is a probability. As described above, this "first effect selection rate" is constant regardless of the jackpot probability of each setting of the first setting to the sixth setting. "(When a jackpot / loss) The "first effect appearance rate" is the probability that the "first effect" will be executed in the effect executed based on the entry into the first starting device or the second starting device. In the case of "big hit" The "first effect appearance rate" is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the "big hit probability" in each setting by the "first effect selection rate". In addition, the "first effect appearance rate" at the time of "loss" Is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the "loss probability" in each setting by the "first effect selection rate". The "loss probability" is the first starting device or the second starting device in the case of a non-probability variable gaming state. It is the probability of being judged as "missing" in the judgment based on entering the ball, and is a numerical value that can be calculated by subtracting the "big hit probability" from "1". , This is the probability that the "first effect" is executed in the effect selected (executed) together with the determination based on the entry into the first starting device or the second starting device in the non-probability changing gaming state. The "total first effect appearance rate" is a numerical value that is the sum of the "first effect appearance rate at the time of a big hit" and the "first effect appearance rate at the time of loss" in each setting. The "effect reliability" is the "first effect" executed when the "first effect" is executed in accordance with the determination based on the entry into the first starting device or the second starting device in the non-probability changing gaming state. It is the probability that the "directing" is the "first directing" executed together with the judgment of "big hit". This "first directing reliability" changes the "first directing appearance rate" to the "comprehensive first directing appearance". It is a numerical value that can be calculated by dividing by "rate".

[Action and effect of the fifth embodiment]
In the case of the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, since the peep portion 1574 is provided in the seal portion 1720, the inspector can use the substrate case via the peep portion 1574. By visually observing the control board 1705 housed in the 1700, it is possible to confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with, as compared with a game machine provided with a board case that is not provided with such a peep section 1574. , It can lead to reduction of the possibility of fraud. Further, in such a seal portion 1720, since a predetermined character can be described in a description area 1570 which is a plurality of colored areas, a predetermined character is specified in a transparent part without a colored area such as a decrease in light transmission. It is also easier for the inspector to confirm the content of the information in characters, as compared to a sticker on which the characters of are written. Further, in such a seal portion, since the transparent viewing portion 1574 is provided between the description region 1570, the cord portion 1712, and the information display portion 1713, which are a plurality of colored regions, only the plurality of colored regions are arranged side by side. The colored area becomes more conspicuous than the one provided, and it is easy for the inspector to confirm the characters and the like described in the description area 1570, the code unit 1712, and the information display unit 1713.

Further, according to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the opening date and the date mark described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark. Although the information is different from the date of manufacture displayed in the unit 1720, it has a predetermined time-series relationship. Specifically, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 is always a new date as compared with the manufacturing date displayed on the date mark portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector confirms the consistency between the opening date of the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the manufacturing date of the date mark portion 1720 to perform fraudulent acts such as illegal replacement of the control board. It can be easily confirmed.

Further, according to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 as in the present embodiment, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720. Is associated with the information displayed on the opening prohibition seal portion 1730. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board by confirming the consistency between the information of the seal unit 1720 and the information of the opening prohibition seal unit 1730. Further, in the cord portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, the distance from the virtual surface obtained by extending the control substrate 1705 in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 is set from the virtual surface. The seal portion 1720 is provided so as to be different from the distance to the cord portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713. Therefore, the inspector can compare the cord portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, the cord portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 to be provided on the same plane at the same height. Information between the code unit 1732 of the opening prohibition seal unit 1730, the code unit 1712 of the seal unit 1720, and the information display unit 1713 can be easily visually recognized, and fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board can be easily confirmed.

Then, according to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the character 1371 and the character 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the character 1371 and the character 1372 are different in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Since the layers are formed so as to form a layer, the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed so that the distances from the top surface of the substrate case 1700 are different. Since such an identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, for example, the identification display 523 is removed as compared with the case where the entire identification display 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It's difficult. Further, since the identification display 523 is provided at a position where the distance from the top surface of the substrate case 1700 in the thickness direction is different, that is, the identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove than when it is present. With such an identification display 523, if it is removed by fraud, it is polished or scraped to form conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700, so that the inspector finds fraudulent activity. It can be said that this is easy and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Further, since the characters 1371 and the character 1372 in the identification display 523 have no overlapping portion and are separated from each other in the plan view, when the assembly 2P is visually recognized from the back side of the game machine, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are separated from each other. It is possible to take a bird's-eye view of both the characters 1372 and easily confirm the presence or absence of fraudulent acts on the control board 1705 or the like.

Furthermore, according to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Since the layers are formed so as to be different layers, the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed in a direction perpendicular to a predetermined surface of the control board 1705 (for example, the control board 1705 in the thickness direction). It is formed so that the distance from the stretched virtual surface) is different. Since such an identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, for example, the identification display 523 is removed as compared with the case where the entire identification display 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It's difficult. Further, since the identification display 523 is provided at a position where the distance from the predetermined surface of the control board 1705 is different, that is, it is divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. It is harder to remove than that. With such an identification display 523, if it is removed by fraud, it is polished or scraped to form conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700, so that the inspector finds fraudulent activity. It can be said that this is easy and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Further, since the characters 1371 and the character 1372 in the identification display 523 have no overlapping portion and are separated from each other in the plan view, when the assembly 2P is visually recognized from the back side of the game machine, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are separated from each other. It is possible to take a bird's-eye view of both the characters 1372 and easily confirm the presence or absence of fraudulent acts on the control board 1705 or the like.

Further, in the case of the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display unit 1713 are described. Information that is linked to each other and contains the same specific information is displayed in different modes. Therefore, fraudulent activity against the code unit 1712 is difficult, and even if the information in the information display unit 1713 is tampered with, the inspector can easily check the consistency with the code unit 1712 to check for fraudulent activity. It is possible to confirm and deter fraudulent activities. Further, in the seal unit 1720, since the peep unit 1574 is formed between the code unit 1712 and the information display unit 1713 and the description area 1570, the control board 1705 is illegally performed as described above. Since it can be easily confirmed whether or not it has been damaged, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the present embodiment, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 and the like have the peep portion 1574. It is visible without intervention. Therefore, some electronic components that need to be visually recognized immediately and easily can be easily visually recognized, so that fraudulent activity can be easily confirmed. Further, since some of the electronic components that can be visually recognized without passing through the peep section 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the peep section 1574, they can be visually recognized without passing through the peep section 1574. It is possible to deter fraudulent activity against some possible electronic components. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition by opening the game board unit 12 of the game machine 1P, it is required to exert the above-mentioned effects.

[Other forms of the fifth embodiment]
In the above-described embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, the seal portion 542,1561,1562, the identification display 521,522,523, and the connectors 771 to 776 are also provided. Of these, the seal portions 542,1561,1562 and the identification display 521,522,523 may be so-called identification displays because predetermined information that can be identified is displayed. In addition, as the information that can be identified, the seal unit 1710, the date mark unit 1720, the opening prohibition seal unit 1730, and the information display 1750 that displays the performance display and setting display of the game machine are also identified and displayed. It may be included in. Further, although not shown, among various electronic components provided on the control board 1705, the color code displayed on the lead resistor, the identification code displayed on the network resistor, and the model number displayed on the IC, capacitor, or transistor. Since the code or the like also displays predetermined identifiable information, it may be an identification display. Since the shapes of the openings and the number of pins of the connectors 771 to 776 in the above-described embodiment are different from each other, the shapes and the number of pins of the respective openings of the connectors 771 to 776 are identifiable information and can be identified. It may be included in the display. Although not shown, a connector number is displayed on the control board 1705 in the vicinity of each of the connectors 771 to 776, and this connector number is also identifiable information and is included in the identification display. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the electronic component of the control board 1705 can be visually recognized from the peep section 1574 in the peep section 1574 of the seal portion 1710, but the area where the electronic component can be visually recognized is limited to this. However, as long as the electronic components of the control board 1705 are visible through the board case 1705, they may be of various modes and have the same effect. For example, if a region that is difficult to see is provided in a plurality of colored regions and the control board can be visually recognized from a region having higher light transmission than the colored region among the plurality of regions that are difficult to see, the same applies to the region. Play the effect of. Further, in these visible areas, not only the electronic components of the control board can be visually recognized, but also the control board itself, the wiring pattern of the control board, the legs of the electronic components, and the like can be visually recognized, and the same effect can be obtained. .. Further, in these visible areas, the transparent socket (connector) of the ROM, which will be described later, can also be visually recognized, and the transparent socket (connector) not only for the ROM but also for various electronic components such as ICs, transistors, and various resistors. If are provided, those transparent sockets (connectors) can be visually recognized. When such a visible area is provided, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts on electronic components, which has the same effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, but is formed inside the member forming the substrate case 1700 as described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The identification display 523 may be provided. Such an identification display 523 may be composed of characters 1371 to 1376 as described above, but is not limited to this and may have various configurations. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of identifiable predetermined information, that is, a so-called plurality of identification displays. That is, a plurality of identification displays may be formed by being divided into a plurality of layers. For example, it may have a configuration as shown in FIG. 74-7. FIG. 74-7 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the identification display formed inside the member forming the substrate case, and FIG. 74-7 is a cross-sectional view of the identification display unit 1791 of the substrate case 1790 according to the modified example. (B) is a cross-sectional view of the identification display unit 1796 of the substrate case 1795 according to the modified example. It is assumed that the identification displays 1794 and 1799 of FIGS. 74-7 are formed by 3D laser engraving, for example, inside the identification display units 1791 and 1796, similarly to the identification display 523 of FIGS. 70 and 71. .. Further, the identification display 1794, 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 70 and 71) may be formed by molding the substrate case with a mold.

As shown in FIG. 74-7 (a), the identification display 1794 in the substrate case 1790 according to the modified example has five identification displays of "A", "B", "C", "0", and "3". It is configured and is formed inside a member (material of the outer case) that forms the identification display portion 1791. Further, the identification display 1794 is provided in the identification display unit 1791 divided into three layers 1793a to 1793c in the thickness direction. In the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b of "A" is formed in the layer 1793a, and the identification display 1792c of "B" is formed in the layer 1793b, and the identification display 1792a and "0" of "C" are formed. The identification display 1792d of No. 1792d and the identification display 1792e of "3" are formed in the layer 1793c so as not to overlap in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 74-1). Then, when the identification display unit 1791 having such a configuration is visually recognized from the left side (the direction from the left to the right in the left-right direction of FIG. 74-1), each of "A", "B", and "C03" is different. In addition to being visually recognizable in a hierarchical manner, the identification display 1794 having a configuration in which "C", "0", and "3" do not overlap can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 74-7 (b), the identification display 1799 in the substrate case 1795 according to the modified example is "A", "B", "C", "0", "3", similarly to the identification display 1794. It is composed of five identification displays, and is formed inside a member (material of the outer case) forming the identification display unit 1796. Further, the identification display 1794 is provided in the identification display unit 1791 divided into four layers 1793a to 1793d in the thickness direction. In the identification display 1799, the identification display 1797b of "A" is formed in the layer 1798a, the identification display 1797d of "B" and the identification display 1797c of "0" are formed in the layer 1798b, and "3". The identification display 1797a of "C" is formed in the layer 1798c, and the identification display 1797e of "C" is formed in the layer 1798d. Then, when the identification display unit 1796 is visually recognized from the back side of the game machine 1P, "A", "B", and "C" can be visually recognized so as not to overlap in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 74-1). When the identification display unit 1796 is visually recognized from the left side (the direction from left to right in the left-right direction of FIG. 74-1), the identification display 1799 has a configuration in which "0" and "3" do not overlap in different layers. Can be visually recognized.

According to the identification indications 1794, 1799 and the identification indication 523 (see FIGS. 70 and 71) having such a configuration, the distance from the top surface of the substrate case to the specific identification indication is different, or the identification indication is stored in the substrate case. It can be configured so that the distance from the control board 1705 to the specific identification display is different. Specifically, for example, in the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b has a smaller distance from the top surface of the substrate case 1790 but a larger distance from the control board 1705 than the identification display 1792a. It is formed. Further, the identification display 1792c is formed so that the distance from the top surface of the substrate case 1790 is smaller than that of the identification display 1792a but larger than that of the identification display 1792b. On the other hand, the identification display 1792c is formed so that the distance from the control board 1705 is larger than that of the identification display 1792a but smaller than that of the identification display 1792b.

Further, according to the identification display 1794, 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 70 and 71) having such a configuration, the surface forming the thickness of the identification display unit (the side surface in the left-right direction of FIG. 74-1). The distance from the surface to be formed) to the specific identification display can also be configured to be different. Further, according to the identification display 1794, 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 70 and 71) having such a configuration, the top surface of the substrate case, the control substrate 1705, and the surface constituting the thickness of the identification display unit. It can also be configured so that the specific identification display distances from any of the above are substantially the same. In the case of the identification display formed in a plurality of layers inside the member forming the identification display unit as described above, it is difficult to remove each identification display and when the identification display is scraped and removed as described above. Since traces of removal remain in the, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. In the above, the distance from the control board 1705 to each identification display means the distance from the surface of the control board 1705 on which the wiring pattern is formed to each identification display.

Further, according to the identification display 1799 having such a configuration, the visible direction and angle can be different for each identification display. Specifically, as described above, the identification display 1797a and the identification display 1797b in the identification display 1799 are configured to be visible from different directions and angles. Therefore, with the identification display formed in this way, the identification display can be formed in a direction or angle that is easy for the inspector to see, which can lead to suppression of fraudulent activity. Further, when there is a member in the vicinity of the identification display unit that hinders the visibility of the identification display (for example, a member having a thickness larger than the thickness of the identification display unit), the position is such that the visibility is not hindered by the member. Each identification display can also be formed. On the other hand, a member that hinders the visibility of the identification display may not be provided in the vicinity of the identification display unit.

Further, in the above-mentioned identification displays 1794 and 1799, it is assumed that they are individually composed of the identification displays 1792a to 1792e and 1797a to 1797e, but one of the plurality of identification displays is one. It may be something that constitutes an identification display.
Specifically, in the identification display 1794, predetermined information that can be identified by the two identification displays 1792b and 1792c is configured, and predetermined information that can be identified by the three identification displays 1792a, 1792d, 1792e is configured. May be. In the identification display 1799, the two identification displays 1797a and 1797c constitute predetermined information that can be identified, and the three identification displays 1797b, 1797d and 1797e constitute predetermined information that can be identified. Different identification displays may be configured depending on the direction and angle. Then, in the identification displays 1794 and 1799, as in the case of the identification display 523 described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, each of the five identification displays may constitute one identifiable predetermined information. Specific examples of the five identification displays constituting one identifiable predetermined information include combinations such as "manufactured", "built", "number", "number", and "NO.". More specifically, for example, in the identification display unit 1791, "manufactured" and "made" are displayed as identification displays on the layer 1793a, and "number" and "number" are displayed as identification displays on the layer 1793b. "NO." Or "1234" may be displayed as an identification display. Further, in the identification display unit 1390 (see FIGS. 70 and 71), "manufactured" is displayed as an identification display at the position of the identification display 1371 of the layer 1381, and "manufactured" is displayed as the identification display at the position of the identification display 1372 of the layer 1382. "Building" is displayed, "number" is displayed as an identification display at the position of identification number 1373 in layer 1383, "number" is displayed as an identification display at the position of identification number 1374 in layer 1384, and identification display 1375 in layer 1382 is displayed. "NO." May be displayed as an identification display at the position of, and "1234" may be displayed as an identification display at the position of the identification number 1376 in the layer 1383.

Then, according to the above-mentioned identification display 1794, 1799 and identification display 523 (see FIGS. 70 and 71), the identification display is "A", "B", "C", "0", "3". Although it is assumed that the identification display is composed of five identification displays, the identification display is not limited to this, and various types of identification display may be displayed. Specifically, in the identification display unit 1791, the "manufacturer name" is displayed as the identification display on the layer 1793a, the "model name" is displayed as the identification display on the layer 1793b, and the "manufacturing place" as the identification display on the layer 1793c. The "manufacturing date" and "material name of the control board" may be displayed. Further, as another specific example in the identification display unit 1791, "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display on the layer 1793a, "model name" is displayed as an identification display on the layer 1793b, and identification is performed on the layer 1793c. The display may be such that the "maker name" is displayed. Further, in the identification display unit 1791, "manufactured" and "manufactured" are displayed as identification displays on the layer 1793a, "number" and "number" are displayed as identification displays on the layer 1793b, and "NO" is displayed as the identification display on the layer 1793c. ".", "1234" may be displayed, and so on.

Further, in the identification display unit 1390 (see FIGS. 70 and 71), the "maker name" is displayed as the identification display in the layer 1381, the "model name" is displayed as the identification display in the layer 1382, and the layer 1383 displays the "model name". The "manufacturing place" and "manufacturing date" may be displayed as the identification display, and the "material name of the control board" may be displayed as the identification display on the layer 1384. Further, as another specific example in the identification display unit 1390, the "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as the identification display on the layer 1381, the "model name" is displayed as the identification display on the layer 1382, and the identification is performed on the layer 1383. The "maker name" may be displayed as a display, and the "material name of the control board" may be displayed as an identification display on the layer 1384. Further, in the identification display unit 1390, "manufactured" and "manufactured" are displayed as identification displays on the layer 1381, "number" and "number" are displayed as identification displays on the layer 1382, and "NO" as the identification display on the layer 1383. "." Is displayed, "1234" is displayed as an identification display on the layer 1384, and the identification displays are displayed so as not to overlap so as to be visible from the back side of the game machine 1P. Good.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the identification display formed on the identification display unit of the substrate case has been described in detail, but predetermined identifiable information may be displayed on the control board. For example, in a control means having a control board and a board case, various identification indications are displayed at different positions in the thickness direction of the board case. Specifically, the "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display at the position closest to the top surface of the board case, and the position closer to the control board than the "QR code (registered trademark)" as the identification display. The "model name" is displayed as an identification display, and the "maker name" is displayed at the position closest to the control board or on the control board itself.

(Sixth Embodiment)
Next, a sixth embodiment, which is one of the modifications of the fourth embodiment of the present invention described above, will be described with reference to FIGS. 75-1 to 75-9. FIG. 75-1 is a rear view of the board case 1803 in which the control board 501 according to the sixth embodiment is housed. FIG. 75-2 is a diagram showing a state in which the electronic component 595 is viewed from diagonally above through the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1561. FIG. 75-3 is a plan view (a) and a side view (b) of the transparent socket 1801. 75-4 are cross-sectional views (a) to (d) in the direction of the arrow in the substrate case 1805 to 1808 at positions corresponding to the CC line of FIG. 75-1. 75-5 are cross-sectional views (a) and (b) in the direction of the arrow in the substrate cases 1809 and 1810 at positions corresponding to the lines CC of FIG. 75-1. FIG. 75-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a special position display unit 541. FIG. 75-7 is an explanatory diagram of one method of reducing the light transmission of the seal portion 1560. FIG. 75-8 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1813 in which the prize ball substrate 1811 is housed. FIG. 75-9 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1823 in which the effect board 1821 is housed. In the sixth embodiment described below, those having the same configuration as the fourth embodiment use the same reference numerals as those of the fourth embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75-1, the gaming machine 1P of the sixth embodiment mainly houses the control board 501, the ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501, and the plurality of electronic boards 595 mounted on the control board 501. It is composed of a case portion 1803, a seal portion 1560 attached to the case portion 1803, a seal portion 1561, a seal portion 1562 attached to the ROM 502, and an identification display unit 1390 provided on the case portion 1803. Except for the case portion 1803, it has already been explained. The case portion 1803 has almost the same contents as the case portion 1551 except that the position display portion 541 is provided on the seal portion 1560.

As described above, the information identification unit refers to the seal unit with the identification display, but in the description of the sixth embodiment, the seal unit without the identification display does not appear. Therefore, in the description of the sixth embodiment, the seal unit will be referred to as an information identification unit. Specifically, the seal unit 1560 may be referred to as a first seal unit, and may be referred to as a first information identification unit. The seal unit 1561 may be referred to as a second seal unit, and may be referred to as a second information identification unit. The seal unit 1562 may be referred to as a third information identification unit. Further, it is also possible to regard the entire seal portion as an aggregate of a plurality of information identification portions, instead of treating the entire seal portion as one information identification unit. Therefore, for example, when the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal unit 1561, it may be described as including three information identification units.

[Mounting part of ROM 502]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75-3, the ROM 502 is detachably mounted on the control board 501 via the transparent socket (connector) 1801. FIG. 75-3 (a) is a plan view of the state in which the ROM is mounted in the transparent socket, and FIG. 75-3 (b) is a side view of the state in which the ROM is mounted in the transparent socket. The control board 501 is omitted in both figures. The transparent socket 1801 has the same function as a normal socket, but has a height and the resin portion of the socket is made of a transparent body. That is, even inside the socket, it is possible to visually check whether or not an illegal wiring or the like is connected to the first signal pin 582 of the ROM 502. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as so-called hanging substrates. Furthermore, the pin 1802a of the transparent socket 1801 can be visually recognized with the transparent socket 1801 mounted on the control board 501. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized wiring or the like from being connected to the pin 1802a. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

[Position display unit 541]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75-4 (d), the position display unit 541 is a linear recess. FIG. 75-4 (d) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of the case portion 1803 at a position corresponding to the line CC of FIG. 75-1. As shown in FIG. 75-4 (d), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1803 is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and is a linear recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803. It is a recess that is recessed toward the rear side. A sticker portion 1560 on which the printing portion 1571 is printed is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1803.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portions 1103 and 1203, and the seal portion 1560 is used as a mark on the outer surface 531. It may be pasted (not shown). Further, as another modification, as shown in FIG. 75-4 (c), the position display portion 541 may be a linear convex portion. FIG. 75-4 (c) shows an arrow cross section of the case portion 1807, which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to the line CC of FIG. 75-1. As shown in FIG. 75-4 (c), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1807 is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and is a linear convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1807. , Protruding to the front side. A sticker portion 1560 on which the printing portion 1571 is printed is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1807. That is, the position display unit 541 described in this paragraph and the preceding paragraph is formed by concave or / or convex on the inner surface 532.

In this way, when the concave or / and convex position display portion is formed on the inner surface 532 and the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531, the position display portion 541 becomes the seal portion 1560 no matter where the seal portion is attached. Since it does not interfere, it does not interfere with sticking. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is fraudulent and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display unit 541, the inspector can easily confirm the printed unit 1571 printed on the seal unit 1560. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

When the seal portion is attached to the outer surface 531 and the position display portion 541 is provided on the inner surface 532, the position display portion 541 is the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531 and / or the inner edge of the seal portion 1560. Alternatively, it can be formed so as to intersect the inside and outside of the seal portion 1560. This will be briefly described. The position display portion 541a provided on the case portion 1820 in FIG. 75-6 is formed on the inner edge of the seal portion 1560, and the portion of the position display portion 541b extending in the left-right direction in the drawing is the seal portion 1560. It is formed so as to intersect inside and outside. The portion of the position display portion 541 extending in the vertical direction in the drawing is on the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and it can be said that this is also formed so as to intersect the inside and outside.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75-2 (a), the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1805, and the position display portion 541 is formed as a linear convex portion on the outer surface 531. It may be provided. FIG. 75-2 (a) shows a cross section in the arrow direction at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 75-1 in the case portion 1805 which is a modification of the case portion 1803. As shown in FIG. 75-2 (a), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1805 is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and is a linear convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 and is on the rear side. It is protruding. A sticker unit 1560 on which the printing unit 1571 is printed is attached to the inside of the position display unit 541.

Since the position display portion 541 which is a linear convex portion is provided, the seal portion 1560 has a seal portion 1560 as compared with the case where the seal portion 1560 is attached to the flat case portion, for example, when touched by a hand. It is possible to prevent peeling. That is, the seal portion 1560 can be used as a mark to be attached, and the seal portion 1560 can be prevented from peeling off after the attachment. If a part of the seal portion 1560 is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display unit 541, the seal unit 1560 is protected, so that the inspector can easily confirm the print unit 1571 printed on the seal unit 1560. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, as another modification, as shown in FIG. 75-2 (b), the position display unit 541 is provided with the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1806 and the position display portion 541 provided on the outer surface 531. May be a linear recess. FIG. 75-2 (b) shows a cross section in the arrow direction at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 75-1 in the case portion 1806 which is a modification of the case portion 1803. As shown in FIG. 75-2 (b), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1806 is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and is a linear recess formed on the outer surface 531 toward the front side. It is a dented recess. A sticker unit 1560 on which the printing unit 1571 is printed is attached to the inside of the position display unit 541.

Further, as another modification, as shown in FIG. 75-5 (a), the position display unit 541 is provided with the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1809 and the position display portion 541 provided on the outer surface 531. May also be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 75-5 (a) shows a cross section in the arrow direction at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 75-1 in the case portion 1809 which is a modification of the case portion 1803. The position display portion 541 of the outer surface 531 protects the seal portion 1560, and the position display portion 541 of the inner surface 532 can attach the seal portion 1560 to a more accurate position.

Further, as another modification, as shown in FIG. 75-5 (b), the position display unit 541 is provided with the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1810 and the position display portion 541 provided on the outer surface 531. May be a convex portion and a concave portion. FIG. 75-5 (b) shows a cross section in the arrow direction at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 75-1 in the case portion 1810 which is a modification of the case portion 183. The seal portion 1560 can be more protected.

The position display portion 541 is a convex portion and / or a concave portion, but it does not have to be a convex portion and / or a concave portion as long as the position where the seal portion 1560 is attached can be displayed. The position display unit 541 is formed at a position avoiding the peeping unit 1574 described later. The term "formed" means not only the one formed integrally but also the one attached by a seal or the like. Further, the position display unit 541 may be an L-shape that displays the position of a part (corner portion) of the seal portion 1560. Further, the predetermined position on the back of the first surface 531 of the case portion 1803 does not only refer to the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803. If it is assumed that the seal portion 1560 is attached without the substrate 501, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner case 40P, and the seal portion 1560 may be attached with the substrate 501 included. If it is assumed, the position display unit 541 may be provided on the substrate.

[Seal part 1560]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75-1, the seal portion 1560 on which the print portion 1571 is printed is lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561, and the electronic component 595 can be seen through. It has a predetermined light transmission property. The light transmission of the seal portion 1560 does not have to be uniform. For example, the light transmission may be reduced by printing something like a pattern. In this case, even if the light transmission is different in each portion, the light transmission may be lower than that of the case portion 1803 and the sealing portion 1561 as a whole. Also in this embodiment, a thin line pattern is printed on the shaded area in the figure to reduce the light transmission. It will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 75-7 that the light transmission differs depending on the pattern. In FIG. 75-7 (a), the background of the seal portion 1560 has a wave-like pattern, and in FIG. 75-7 (b), the background of the seal portion 1560a has a grid pattern. Both companies can see through the electronic component 595, but it can be seen that FIG. 75-7 (a) has lower light transmission.

The case portion 1803 has the highest predetermined light transmittance, and the seal portion 1561 has a predetermined light transmittance slightly lower than the light transmission of the case portion 1803. As a result, the ROM 502 can be visually recognized by the light transmission of the case portion 1803, and the electronic component 595 can be visually recognized by the light transmission of the seal portion 1561 or the seal portion 1560. As a method of making the light transmission of the seal portion 1561 lower than the light transmission of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561, the light transmission of the material of the seal portion 1561 may be lowered, or the light transmission of the material of the seal portion 1561 may be lowered. Permeability may be reduced.

When the light transmission of the seal portion 1560 and the light transmission of the case portion 1551 and the seal portion 1561 are equivalent, it becomes more difficult to forge the seal portion 1560, and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Further, when the light transmission is lowered by the pattern, it cannot be seen at first glance that the light transmission is lowered by the pattern, so that it becomes more difficult to forge the seal portion 1560, and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75-1, a unique portion of the seal portion 1560, which is not a colored region 1575 and is not provided with a predetermined character, can be identified only when viewed from a predetermined angle. Information 1804 (K in this embodiment) is displayed. In this embodiment, although it is a character, it may be a symbol or a figure. Further, the continuity of the pattern changes at the boundary between the first region 1814 where the unique information is formed by the pattern and the second region 1815 where the unique information is formed by the characters and the pattern. According to this, forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult, so that the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be further suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. The seal unit 1560 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75-2, at least one or more different electronic components 595 are attached to the range visible through the seal portion 1561 and the range visible through the seal portion 1560. By attaching a seal portion having light transmission according to the type of the electronic component 595, it is possible to easily detect fraud and make it difficult to perform fraud. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

As the information described in the seal portion 1561, a model name, a model code, external terminal information, a manufacturer name, a QR code (registered trademark), a rated voltage, power consumption, precautions, and the like are assumed. Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1560 are attached at positions at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized.

[1st display, 2nd display]
Further, in the present embodiment, the case portion 1803 including the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the electronic component 595 is called a control means, and the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are provided at different predetermined positions of the control means. ing. The distances from the surface 501a on the side of the control board 501 on which the ROM 502 is mounted to the display of the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are different between the first display 1371 and the second display 1372. The first display 1371 and the second display 1372 do not only refer to the identification display unit 1390, but are provided on the control means as shown in FIG. 75-6 on the side where the ROM of the control board 501 is mounted. This is also included if the distance from the surface 501a is different. The surface 501a on the outer case 45P side of the control board 501, the opposite surface, the marking on the inner case 40P, the marking on the outer case 45P, various seals, and the like are assumed.

However, the information identification unit and the display do not represent the same information. It should be noted that the seal unit and the information identification unit are not synonymous with each other, and it is assumed that a plurality of information identification units may exist in one seal unit. For example, when the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal unit 1561, it means that there are three information identification units. The relationship between the information identification unit and the display will be explained with examples. For example, if the first information identification unit is the manufacturer name, the first display is not the manufacturer name, so for example, the model name is displayed on the seal unit. Further, the second display is, for example, a model name displayed on the surface of the substrate 501 on the inner case 40P side. The second information identification unit is, for example, the opener information of the seal unit 1560, and the third information identification unit is, for example, the manufacturer name of the seal unit 1562. Since the control means is provided with a complicated first display and a second display in which the distances from the control board are different, it is possible to prevent forgery of the board 501 and the case portion 1803.

[Prize ball board 1811]
Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball substrate 1811 and the case portion 1813 thereof are included in the configuration of the invention. As shown in FIG. 75-8, the prize ball substrate 1811 capable of bidirectional communication with the control substrate 501 is housed in a case portion 1813 having light transmission. The ROM 1812 is mounted on the prize ball substrate 1811. Further, a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1812 are mounted on the prize ball substrate 1811. The ROM 1812 stores data used for controlling the prize ball.

A seal portion 1816 made of a light-transmitting material is attached to the case portion 1813. The seal portion 1816 is printed with a plurality of colored regions 1817, which are regions in which light transmission is reduced. Further, the seal portion 1816 has a peeping portion 1819 capable of peeking at the electronic component 595 in a portion between the colored regions 1817 where a predetermined character is not attached. The seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 are light-transmitting so that the electronic component 595 can be seen through, and the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 are different in light transmission. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 1560 has a lower light transmittance than the seal portion 1816. For example, the seal portion 1560 may have a wave-like pattern as shown in FIG. 75-7 (a), and the seal portion 1816 may have a lattice pattern as shown in FIG. 75-7 (b).

Since the light transmission between the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 is different, it becomes difficult to forge the seal portions 1560 and 1816, and it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts such as replacing the case portions 1551 and 1813 with the illegal substrates 501 and 1811. Can be done. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Although not provided in the present embodiment, the case portion 1813 including the prize ball substrate 1811, the ROM 1812, and the electronic component 595 is used as the prize ball means, and the first and second displays are performed at different predetermined positions of the prize ball means. A third display and a fourth display may be provided as in (1371, 1372).

[Direction board 1821]
Further, in the present embodiment, the effect substrate 1821 and the case portion 1823 thereof are included in the configuration of the invention. As shown in FIG. 75-9, the effect board 1821 capable of effect control by unidirectional communication from the control board 501 or the prize ball board 1811 is housed in the case portion 1823 having light transmission. ROM 1822 is mounted on the effect board 1821. Further, a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1822 are mounted on the effect board 1821. The ROM 1822 stores the stored contents used for controlling the effect. The control board 501 and the prize ball board 1811 are foot-insertion type boards as shown in FIG. 75-6, and the effect board 1821 is a surface mount type board. Examples of surface mount include surface mount on both sides, surface mount on one side, surface mount on the entire surface, and surface mount on some sides.

The case portion 1823 is formed of a light-transmitting material such as the seal portion 1560, and a plurality of colored regions, which are regions with reduced light transmission, are printed, and predetermined between the colored regions is determined. A seal portion having a viewing portion capable of viewing the electronic component 595 is not attached to the portion not marked with. The seal portion having the colored region and the peep portion is not attached to the case portion 1823, but is attached only to the case portion 1803. Since the handling of the seal portion is different in this way, it becomes difficult to forge the seal portion 1560 and the case portion 1803, so that the player can play with peace of mind and the interest of the player is improved.

As shown in FIG. 76, the control board 501 may have a first region 1900a and a second region 1900b having a mode different from that of the first region 1900a. Here, the different aspect means a difference in which the distinction can be visually recognized, for example, a mode in which the color is different between the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b, or the shade of the color is different. Or, a frame-based mode such that the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are surrounded by lines or patterns, or a shape-based mode such that the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are stepped. One or a combination of the above can be used. For example, the resist applied to the surface of the control substrate 501 may have a second region 1900b darker or lighter green than the first region 1900a. Further, it is preferable that the first region 1900a is set corresponding to the range in which the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 and the ROM 502 are arranged on the control board 501. On the other hand, the second region 1900b is preferably set according to the range in which the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 and ROM 502 and the board-mounted components such as the connectors 771 to 776 are not arranged in the control board 501. , It is preferable to set it at the edge of the control board 501. In the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b itself, the above-mentioned aspects such as colors may be different. For example, the arrangement range of the ROM 502 and the arrangement range of the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 on the control board 501 may be different. It may be different in mode. The first region 1900a and the second region 1900b can be provided on either or both of the mounting surface (rear surface) of the control board 501 and the front surface facing the back surface of the game board unit 12P. Further, the first region 1900a may be provided on one of the rear surface or the front surface of the control board 501, and the second region 1900b may be provided on the other surface or the front surface of the control board 501.

As shown in FIG. 76, the control board 501 may be provided with an information identification unit 1902 for displaying specific information in the second region 1900b. Then, the information identification unit 1902 may include an identification display 521 containing the same information as the above-mentioned identification display 529. In this way, by providing the information identification unit 1902 in the second region 1900b, which has a different aspect from the first region 1900a, the information displayed by the information identification unit 1902 can be made easy to see. Therefore, the inspector can easily determine whether or not the control board 501 has been fraudulent, and can facilitate management. Then, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

When the control board 501 is particularly distinguished, the board body excluding the board-mounted parts such as the mounted electronic parts 502 and 595 may be referred to as a "board", and the board-mounted parts mounted on the "board" may be referred to as "board". Sometimes called "control unit". The first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are preferably provided on the substrate, but regions of different aspects may be provided on the substrate mounting component.

The above-mentioned identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-back direction) in the identification display unit 1390, and only the identification display 523 provided on the outer case 45P is provided. Instead, the identification display 524 provided on the inner case 40P, the identification display 525 provided on the cap 8P, the identification display 521 provided on the control board 501, the identification display 522 provided on the ROM 502, and the like are attached to the control unit. It can be applied to the identification display 520. The target divided into layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 is not limited to the characters 1371 to 1376, and may be a display including a plurality of identifiers such as a figure, a pattern, a code, and a combination of characters. For example, the relationship between the identification displays 520 may be divided into the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 as described above.

The positions of the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are described in the object provided with the identification display 523 (in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390), but if the identification display 523 is provided on the outer case 45P, If the position is different in the thickness direction of the outer case 45P and the identification display 524 is provided on the inner case 40P, the position is different in the thickness direction of the inner case 40P and the identification display 521 provided on the control board 501 or the board mounting component. If it is 522, the position is different in the thickness direction of the substrate. It can be said that the identification display 521 attached to the board and the identification display 522 attached to the ROM 502 are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the board, and the identification display attached to the mounting surface (rear surface) of the board and the identification display of the board It can be said that the identification display attached to the front surface is at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate. Further, the outer case 45P forming the surface on which the board-mounted components are mounted is separated from the board more than the inner case 40P in order to secure the installation space for the board-mounted components, and the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P. It can be said that the identification display 524 attached to the inner case 40P is at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate.

The identification display associated with each other is not limited to a mode in which the relationship can be directly recognized by the manufacturer, etc., but can be collated with the information held by the administrator, etc., or converted by the device owned by the administrator, etc. It may be a relationship whose relevance can be grasped by doing so. For example, the identification signs 523 to 525 attached to the board case 3P are the identification signs 521, attached to the control board 501.
Even if the identifier that matches 522 is not included, by referring to the information held by the administrator, it can be mentioned that both identification displays 520 include common information. In other words, the identification display associated with each other may include a mode in which the relevance can be directly grasped from the information that can be visually recognized, and a mode in which the relevance cannot be directly grasped from the information that can be visually recognized. .. In this way, since the relationship between the identification displays is not apparent at first glance, rewriting by anyone other than the manufacturer or administrator becomes difficult, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

In this case, "first display", "second display", "third display", "fourth display", "first information display", "second information display", "first information identification unit", The "second information identification unit", "third information identification unit", and "fourth information identification unit" are not limited to those described in the above embodiments, but are not limited to those described in the above embodiments, but are limited to those described in the above embodiments, and the code information and characters printed on the stickers, and on the case. It is possible to adopt the display method and general display contents of information on the board and the game machine on the board case, such as the stamp, the model name, the manufacturer name, the board management information, and the case management information.

(7th Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of game machine)
First, the configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the game machine 1 in the present embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), a game ball paid out from a payout device 100 described later, and the like are used. The upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls of the above, the lower plate 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper plate 11, and the firing operation of the game balls. A launch operation device 13 for performing the above is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the effect of lighting is performed by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later are provided. It is installed side by side.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the 17 is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The effect button 17 can perform effect light emission by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode, and is button-driven. By the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the device 17b, it moves in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the effect position located above, and / or the button drive device 17b. It is possible to perform the effect operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of the button vibration motor which is a part of the button position detection sensor (not shown), and the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position. To.

The selection button device 18 is connected to a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending / returning operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the game machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game ball. Is performed, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the game ball is full is provided in the lower plate 12, and the lower plate 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. Is detected, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the player's hand are touching the launch handle 15. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) composed of a 15a (see FIG. 2) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes a front side portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been done. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the 4 to the closed state and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The launching device 26 includes a launching member 28 for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the launching member 28, and an ascending member 28 toward the lower left portion of the game board. An inclined launch rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guiding member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At substantially the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, on the side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced inside the vehicle is rolled and flows down below the decorative frame 40.

At the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and the general winning openings 43 are provided at intervals. When the winning (winning) game balls are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are added as prize balls from the payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 (normal map starting area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball passing through the normal map gate 44 is provided. When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45 (special drawing starting area) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, on which a game ball can always win (win a ball), and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the winning game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are placed on the upper plate 11 as prize balls from the payout device 100. It is supposed to be paid out. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, the game ball is from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for winning a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (ball winning) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 has a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) where the game ball can win (winning) and a second detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that converts (variable) the second start port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second start port open / close solenoid for opening / closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) is provided. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the second start port 47 are detected by the second start port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the payout device 100. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, a winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided. It is possible to produce light emission by emitting light from a panel lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LED or the like).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal map gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a jackpot judgment of a special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided that converts the (basic mode) into an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50 (FIG. 2), an opening / closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51. Then, when the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are placed on the upper plate 11 as prize balls from the payout device 100. It will be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second start port detection switch 47a and the large winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball flow path that receives and collects the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39 and flows down are provided. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. The game ball that has flowed down the out-ball flow path and is detected by the out-ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first device 63, a second special symbol hold display 64, and the like. A normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, and a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state. Right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a, and a status confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. A main information display device 59 including a device 68 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is affixed in the vicinity of the main information display device 59 (not shown). The winning probability display sticker is printed with the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4-1) of the jackpot of the game machine 1 of the present embodiment. The sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the game machine 1.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is a variable display, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot determination of the first special symbol is for jackpot determination by acquiring a random value for jackpot determination (first special symbol determination information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing the random number value and the jackpot judgment value. When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol display 60 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Be told. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The jackpot judgment of the second special symbol is for jackpot judgment by acquiring a random value for jackpot judgment (second special symbol judgment information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing the random number value and the jackpot judgment value. When the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is made, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Be told. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. To do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, lost mode) indicating the result of each jackpot determination.

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means that the jackpot game (special game) is executed in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. It refers to the state in which the right to do so has been acquired. The "big hit game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are opened in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game)" is in an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage to the player can be generated, which will be described in detail later.

In the hit lottery of the ordinary symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the hit judgment random value is acquired, and the acquired hit judgment random value is compared with the hit judgment value to be "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not. When the winning lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed, the ordinary symbol display 62 performs a variable display of the ordinary symbols, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a stop display of the ordinary symbols indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (winning mode or losing mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of a normal symbol. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the hit game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 is used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variation display is easily satisfied). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The jackpot determination of the first special symbol (of the first special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing (variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first reserved storage. It should be noted that the first hold storage is stored up to four, but may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. The jackpot determination of the second special symbol (of the second special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing (variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reserved storage. The maximum number of the second hold storages is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol that is stored when the game ball wins (passes) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Public figure hold storage), and lights up or blinks in a mode indicating the number of normal figure hold memory. It should be noted that although the maximum number of memory reserved for normal figures is four, it may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot judgment of a special symbol is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it is turned off and "-" is displayed. It is good to repeat. Before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when the variation display starts, the variation display can be displayed by starting from turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand that it has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and the LEDs are in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 2 jackpot games, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and is right to encourage the right-handed game area to be fired (so-called right-handed) in the jackpot state (special game state) and the time-saving game state. It is for displaying the hitting display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the mode shifts to, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED turns off. In this way, since the state confirmation indicator 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the game machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is provided. It is possible to easily check whether or not it is set to.

The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the game machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting display) is the same regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is possible to recognize which of the settings is set. You may. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked. However, when the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 is lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it can also be used as another indicator. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of any of the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right inside the game area 5a, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82Z, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 , A sub-information display device 80Z including a sub-normal figure holding display 86Z and a sub-right-handed display 87 for urging a game ball to be launched (so-called right-handed) toward the right side area of the game area 5a is provided. The sub-information display device 80Z is not provided with a display device such as the status confirmation display device 68 described above that indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The sub first variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub second variation indicator 82Z displays the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. It is for (notifying), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is variable display), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is a big hit. The result of the judgment (lights up in the case of a big hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the sub 1st fluctuation display 81 and the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z blink and stop during the fluctuation display of the special symbol so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being performed can be grasped. When it is displayed, it may be turned on or off.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold storages (number of holds), and the sub second hold indicator 84Z displays the number of second hold storages (number of holds). This is for the purpose, and each consists of two LEDs on the left and right. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the LED on the left turns on and the LED on the right turns off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of holds is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of holds is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is in progress can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold indicator 86Z is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages (number of holds), and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved figures is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off. When "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of reserved figures is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the production space 40a, and is below the production space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided, and a character's face is above the effect space 40a. A first movable member 73 imitating the above is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the effect space 40a.

The image display device including the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the special symbol variation display is not performed, and an effect symbol executed during the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display is not performed. There is a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of 70a.

The display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three rows of variable display areas such as a left side area, a central area, and a right side area, and is displayed in each variable display area. By scrolling the effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. Corresponding to (synchronizing with), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (oscillating display) before the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display). As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to the symbol indicating a number.

The "temporary stop display" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not done) Say the aspect.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular production symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is another mode. is there. The mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as reach effects, background images, characters, and movies are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second, depending on the result of the jackpot determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's expectation that the jackpot (special game) will be executed (hereinafter referred to as "big hit winning expectation") has been increased. There is.

Here, the "reach effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for a player in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), two effect symbols 70a are set in the left side area and the right side area. 7 ”is a mode in which the remaining effect symbol 70a is fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect".

The "normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a is in the center area. It is a reach effect that is executed in a state where a fluctuating reach state is formed.

The "SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect symbol 70a in the state where the reach state is formed is reduced and displayed in the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (high expectation of a big hit). ) It is a reach production in which movies (movies, animations, etc.) are played.

"SPSP reach production" is a reach that is executed after the normal reach production or SP reach production, and a movie (movie, animation, etc.) with a higher production effect (high expectation of a big hit) than the normal reach production or SP reach production is played. It is a production.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed with all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot. In the present embodiment, it is a reach effect that is executed only when the jackpot determination is won.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation related to the reach production is higher in the order of normal reach production <SP reach production <SPSP reach production <full rotation reach production (big hit confirmed).

Further, in order to display the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1), which is the current number of first hold storages, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 1st hold icon display area 70B and 2nd hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of 2nd hold icons corresponding to the current number of 2nd hold storages (U2). The icon display area 70C for displaying the (related) icon corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) is displayed. That is, the number of the first hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special figure hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays 2 The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory is displayed thirdly, and the change display of the first special symbol is executed thirdly on the third display unit 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Will be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the like. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2). That is, the number of the second hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease of the second special figure hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2 The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory is displayed secondly to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, and the third display unit 70D3 executes the variable display of the second special symbol third. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold memory on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special figure hold number" may be referred to as the "first special figure hold number" and the "second special figure hold number" may be referred to as the "second special figure hold number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). When the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first hold icon", the "second hold icon", and the "corresponding icon" may be collectively referred to as an "icon".

The first movable member 73 can perform effect light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. The vertical direction is between the standby position (origin position) located above and the effect position located below due to the driving force of the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving to, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform effect light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. Between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the effect position located on the lower left by the driving force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving diagonally in the vertical direction, and the second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed so that their production positions partially overlap with each other, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 basically operate at the same time. By not doing so, they do not collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the effect position and then returns to a position that does not overlap with the effect position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the effect position.

The game board mounting frame 3 and the back side of the game board 5 are supplied from a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, and the like. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores and supplies the game balls to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a main control. A payout control device 120A (not shown) having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the board 110, and an effect control according to an effect control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device 130A (not shown) with a built-in effect control board 130 to be performed, a power supply device 160A (not shown) with a built-in power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game outside the game machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) for outputting information (game signal) is provided.

The main control device 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted on the surface, a transparent resin board case for accommodating the main control board 110 inside, and a board case for restricting the opening of the board case. It includes a sealing seal 104 and a transparent resin-based seal cover member 105 that is attached to a substrate case so as to cover the sealing seal 104.

On the front surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m are cleared or the game is at the stage of the degree of advantage of the game (game). (Different advantages) Input a signal for updating the set value RWM clear switch 111a, a signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by an operation using the setting key. The setting key switch 112a for inputting the above, the information display 113 for displaying the performance information and the set value that can grasp the actual performance of the game machine 1, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying set values and performance information (normal base values described later), and four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP are arranged side by side. It is composed of things. Then, an identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits are configured. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of set values and performance information is configured by.

The board case includes a concave chamber-shaped lower case member in which the portion facing the back surface side of the main control board 110 is open, and a concave chamber-shaped upper case member in which the portion facing the front surface side of the main control board 110 is opened. By closing the lower case member and the upper case member, a storage space for accommodating the main control board 110 is formed.

On the upper surface of the upper case member, a model name sticker on which the model name (model name) of the game machine 1 is printed so as not to overlap the information display 113 in the front-rear direction, and a management number in which the control number of the main control board 110 is printed are printed. The number stickers are attached side by side. Further, an operating member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Then, when the operating member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

Further, at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a, an insertion portion (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed. This insertion portion has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a tubular portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. are doing. Then, when the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a turns ON and the setting key cannot be pulled out from the keyhole, and is turned to the left. When the position is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key is removed from the keyhole.

The control number sticker has an opener entry section for entering the name of the opener of the main control board 110 and an opening date entry section for entering the opening date of the main control board 110 on the surface of the colorless and transparent base seal. It is provided side by side.

The opener entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is provided on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually confirming the mounted electronic components.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the electronic components.

The first to fourth entry areas of the opener entry section are adjacent to the first to fourth entry areas of the opening date entry section at intervals, and the surface of the main control board 110 is located between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the electronic components mounted on the circuit board.

As the information display 113, a performance display unit in which a circuit unit including four 7-segment displays and a board is unitized may be mounted on the main control board. Even in that case, it is desirable to arrange them so that they do not overlap with each other so that the visibility is not restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker and the control number sticker.

Further, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on the dedicated board. It may be mounted and board-to-board connected to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

Further, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or the dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power supply board 160 if the player cannot operate it. It may be provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 or may be provided on the back surface side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, it is preferable that the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a is input to the main control unit 110m.

Further, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal of may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110 or the main control board 110, or the power supply board may be mounted as a position that the player cannot operate. It may be provided on the 160, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

Further, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set value on the information display 113, another display is executed on the main control board 110 or the dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, and eventually. The performance information may be displayed on one of the indicators, and the set value may be displayed on the other indicator.

(Control configuration of game machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the game machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the entire game machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) serving as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is provided with a main control unit 110 m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling devices (various solenoids and various displays). The device) is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 has a general winning port detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting port detection switch 45a, a second starting port detection switch 47a, a large winning port detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 has a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a main information display device 59, and a game information output. The terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like are connected. A game that notifies the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) from the drive control signal for controlling various solenoids, the display control signal for controlling various indicators, and the game information output terminal board via the output port. Information etc. is output.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

Access to the memory area of the main ROM 110b is prohibited: a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored. A vector table in which an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as a program title and version are stored, and a start address of a timer interrupt process described later are set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and the end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in order.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game. The stored game data area and the second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the game machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the game machine. The information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program are arranged in this order. There is.

The game RWM area temporarily stores the game work area used as the work by the game program, the first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the game program. A stack area for games to be evacuated and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The game work area changes depending on the setting value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area temporarily saves the information work area used by the information program as a work, the unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the information program. The information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the game machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program. The relationship will be explained.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. In addition, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, when performing processing based on the information program, in the processing based on the game program, after saving the flag register in the game RWM area, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the information is used. Immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are set to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program. There will be no such thing.

The payout control board 120 is a secondary control board that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and causes the payout device 100 to perform arithmetic processing. It controls and sends a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

An open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the like are connected to the input port of the payout control unit 121. The payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the payout ball detection switch 100a. When the payout of the game ball is detected, the control of paying out the game ball is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the launch volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch intensity is set according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. The solenoid 28b is driven to launch a game ball.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the game ball is launched in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a sub-control board (sub-control means) that controls the effect (performed by the game machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130 m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main). Display / sound control unit 140 that controls the liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the sound output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the panel. It includes a lamp / drive control unit 150 that controls a lighting device 76, a panel drive device 75, and the like, and an input port, an output port, and the like for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. Control is performed to cause various control units (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150). Output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display / voice control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. Or control the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display / audio control unit 140 includes a centralized CPU 142Z that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 143Z that stores an integrated control program, an integrated control unit 141 that has a centralized RAM 144Z that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP as an image processor ( An image control unit 145 composed of a Video Display Processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. It includes a VRAM 147, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored, an input / output port and the like.

The centralized CPU 142Z receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the integrated ROM 143Z, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the integrated RAM 144Z as a work area, and receives it from the effect control unit 130 m. The image control unit 145 and the voice control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are output) in response to the effect instruction command and the like.

The general ROM 143Z is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for this are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method. , The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) include various information such as a duty ratio as a parameter of brightness.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and is stored in the CGROM 146 with commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142Z). The drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the image data. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image and a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol. , Character image, and material data representing individual images such as dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142Z), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub). It has a frame buffer area and the like corresponding to the liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) uses the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 as a "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142Z). The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the image control unit 145 (VDP) from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Further, a general-purpose image data is converted into a predetermined image format and output between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The board 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) for displaying image data and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The voice control unit 148 is connected to the voice output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 2 Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The lamp / drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the effect from the effect control unit 130 m. In response to the received effect instruction command or the like, the controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices is controlled to perform a predetermined effect (data and commands are output).

A frame lighting device 10, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button driving device 17b, a panel lighting device 76, and a sub information display device 80Z are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit. Lighting of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80Z based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the 130m (sub CPU 130a). It controls and controls drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the button drive device 17b and the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and uses the main power supply as the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, It is supplied to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. Note that the backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state" as states relating to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and a "non-time saving gaming state" as a state relating to the movable member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47. "And" time-saving game state ".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving game state that is "low-probability game state" and "non-time-saving game state" (2) Low-probability time-saving game state that is "low-probability game state" and "time-saving game state" (3) " High-probability time-saving game state that is both "high-probability game state" and "time-saving game state"

The game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the game machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving game state", and this game state is set to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. I will call it. In the present embodiment, the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" are sometimes referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" is, for example, the first starting port 45 or the first starting port 45 or when the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage degree of the game is "1". In the jackpot determination of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the winning probability of the jackpot is set as low as about 1/300. On the other hand, in the "high probability gaming state", the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability is as high as about 1/60. Says the set game status.

Specifically, there are four types of set values, "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability gaming state is about 1/300, which is high. The jackpot winning probability in the stochastic gaming state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability gaming state is about 1/295, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state is about 1/295. The winning probability is about 1/59, and when the set value is "3", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is about 1/290, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is about 1/58. When the set value is "4", the jackpot winning probability in the low-probability gaming state is about 1/285, and the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". Further, the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. Refers to a game state in which is set longer than the "time saving game state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winning is won is set short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is successful, the second starting port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. A gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving game state". Say. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example 127. It is set as high as / 128. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advance the game advantageously without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. Is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. .. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of the normal symbol may be, for example, 0/128.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of determination is not limited to 5 times, and any value such as 3 times or 8 times may be set as long as the value is 10 times or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit that is less advantageous to the advantager than the big hit is not won in the big hit determination, but for example, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/100. May be good. In this case, it is preferable that the small hit probability is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "4".

In addition, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability is higher), but conversely, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability is higher). It may be.

Further, all the set values (1 to 4) may have the same probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state, and for example, two or three set values (2 or 3 setting values) may be set. In 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same.

Further, the set value of the present embodiment has four stages of 1 to 4, but the setting value is not limited to the four stages, and may be more or less than the four stages.

(Type of jackpot game)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of jackpot games that can be executed as a result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and " The types of jackpot games that have the "third jackpot game" and can be executed as a result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 are the "first jackpot game" and the "second jackpot game". "have.

In the "first big hit game", a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. In the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first big hit game, the high-accuracy time-short game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

The "second jackpot game" is a round game executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second big hit game, the low-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" means that a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third big hit game, the high-accuracy time-short game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

In addition, the fluctuation display number of the specific game state (high probability time short game state, low probability time short game state) set after the big hit game (in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10000 times) is referred to as "high probability number of times". ] Or "time reduction frequency" may be expressed.

In the present embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but the number is not limited to three, and may be less than or more than three. Further, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds for any big hit game (first big hit game to third big hit game), but the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds. The opening time may differ depending on the round game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of hits will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of winning games that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the Fuzu Gate 44, there are "first winning game" and "second winning game", and a winning game is provided. If it is in a non-time saving game state when the lottery is executed, it is a "first hit game", and if it is in a time saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it is a "second hit game".

The "first hit game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened for up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second hit game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first hit game and the second hit game, the hit game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

In this way, in the "time-saving game state", the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 47, and the player has an advantage in the game without consuming the game ball as compared with the "non-time-saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the game machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step SZ1, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step SZ2, and performs start-up waiting processing for other boards in step SZ3. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are waited for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step SZ4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step SZ5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching device 26 to launch the game ball.

In step SZ6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step SZ7 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is transferred to step SZ8 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step SZ7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step SZ8 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step SZ9 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step SZ10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step SZ9. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, every time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated set value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is set. When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area as the setting value is confirmed, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 ends. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and a process for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 are displayed on the setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are predetermined while the setting is being changed. It is fully lit with the emission color (for example, white) of. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step 0, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area and the checksum calculated in step SZ7 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process is moved to step SZ11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process is moved to step SZ11. Assuming that the control state before the power is turned off cannot be restored normally, the process is transferred to step SZ12.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step SZ11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step SZ13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process is performed in step SZ12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs an unrecoverable error process in step SZ12. Specifically, after displaying the error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibit timer interrupt After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to the process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without the setting change operation, the setting is not canceled. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. During an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

It should be noted that the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, but it may be canceled even when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred, and an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Change settings" is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Please go. ”), Turn on the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. It is to output an unrecoverable error sound ("It is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been cut off.
The audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the panel lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a “directing device”.

The main CPU 110a determines in step SZ13 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step SZ14 as if the RWM clear operation is executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step SZ16.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clear process in step SZ14. Specifically, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed.

In step SZ15, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process is transferred to step SZ21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on on the image display devices 70 and 71. ) Is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the sound output device 9 to the RWM area is displayed. It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that it has been initialized over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

The main CPU 110a determines in step SZ16 whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process shifts to step SZ17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, in order to return the control state of the game to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step SZ18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step SZ17. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting confirmation specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when there is a confirmation end operation in which the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated, and the status confirmation display on the status confirmation indicator 68 is terminated. Performs processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

The effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command will perform a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed, or the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 may emit a predetermined amount of light while the setting is being confirmed. All lights are turned on in color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“confirming the set value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step SZ18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step SZ19, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for terminating the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification.

The "power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was turned off, and the image display devices 70 and 71 are displayed on the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration. The symbol "135") can be displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 can be fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the sound output device 9 can be displayed. It is to output a power recovery notification sound (“power has been restored” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step SZ20, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a first special figure hold number (U1), a special figure hold number designation command indicating a second special figure hold number (U2), and a normal figure hold number (G). A command for specifying the number of reserved numbers to be shown) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure hold and the number of normal figure hold, and the process for displaying the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 70 can be performed. It will be done.

In step SZ21, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step SZ22, and permits all interrupts in step SZ23.

In step SZ24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random value, and in step SZ25, the jackpot determination Initial value random value update processing is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step SZ26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if no power failure detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step SZ24 to detect the power failure. If a signal is input, the process proceeds to step SZ27.

In step SZ27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, performs processing for clearing the output port in step SZ28, and in step SZ29, sets the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c. The checksum (abnormality determination data) of (excluding) is calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step SZ30, the backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step SZ31, Performs a process to prohibit RAM access and waits until the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off.

In this way, regarding the setting change operation, since multiple conditions (operations) are set, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so that fraudulent activity can be suppressed and the security of the gaming machine is improved. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, when the checksum is abnormal, the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation, which is a nuisance to the game store and the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the set value area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set. Become.

Further, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70, 71, and the frame lighting device are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking 10 and the lighting device 76 for the panel, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the game machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (it is the first power-on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step SZ10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. Then, the process may be transferred to step SZ13.

In addition, when it is determined that there is a backup flag (power recovery) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step SZ10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. , The process may be transferred to step SZ13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game state, but after the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent, the current game state is sent. The game state specification command indicating the above may be transmitted.

Further, when the power is turned off or the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the non-recoverable error processing.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clear process is performed after the setting change is performed, but the RWM clear process may be performed before the setting change is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) on the main control board 110.

First, in step SZ100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step SZ110, the special game timer counter such as the update process of the special symbol time counter, the opening time of the special electric accessory, and the like. Time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, and a start port close timer counter is performed.

In step SZ120, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value, the hit determination random number value, the normal symbol determination random number value, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update the random number value. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. Initial value to be performed The random number value is set as a new lap initial value and the random number value is newly updated.

In step SZ130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination in step SZ130, as in step SZ30. Initial value to be updated Random value Update processing is performed.

In step SZ200, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a gate detection switch 44a, an out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and if there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

In step SZ300, the main CPU 110a determines the number of special figure reservations (big hit determination, etc.), controls the display of special symbols, controls the opening / closing of the big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), controls the gaming state, and the like. Perform control processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

In step SZ400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal figure normal electric control process for performing a normal figure storage number determination (hit determination, etc.), display control of a normal symbol, opening / closing control of a second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. Do.

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure normal symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal diagram and the normal symbol, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step SZ500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10 prize ball counter and the 15 prize ball counter), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step SZ600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality, and specifies a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. Performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic anomaly error designation command or the radio wave abnormality error designation command, the effect control board 130 performs control for performing the magnetic abnormality error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step SZ700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, start port opening / closing data output to the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening opening / closing data, 1st special symbol display 60, special symbol display data output to 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator Data creation processing is performed to create data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold indicator 65.

In step SZ750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and winning opening opening / closing data created in step SZ700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , Special symbol hold display data, display output process to output signals such as normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission process to send the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Or, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step SZ800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program) in step SZ810. Specifically, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during the normal gaming state, the number of payouts during the normal game, and the outs during the normal gaming state. A process is performed to count the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the game state.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of regular outs, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which can be useful for grasping the performance of the game machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program) in step SZ830. Specifically, the normal base value ((number of normal payouts ÷ number of normal middle outs) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is set. The normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and a normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program) in step SZ850. Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program) in step SZ870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the game machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step SZ880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step SZ850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step SZ870 are performed. ..

In step SZ890, the main CPU 110a performs the game program return processing. Specifically, the process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step SZ900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step SZ100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, since the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, the RWM clear processing, and the setting confirmation processing, the number of payouts and the number of outs are counted, the performance information of the game machine is calculated, and the game machine is used. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step SZ25 and step SZ26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step SZ210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no input of the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step SZ220.

When the detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating 10 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (10 prize ball counter) for the general winning opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and then the general winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step SZ220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. In this large winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the large winning opening 50. If there is no input of the detection signal from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step SZ230.

When the detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the large prize opening used for the prize balls. It is updated and updated (D ← D + 1) by adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening, and whether or not the jackpot game (special game) is currently in progress. Is determined. If the jackpot game is currently in progress, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the jackpot 50 and update (C ← C + 1) to update the jackpot. The detection switch input process ends.

If the current game state is not in the special game state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. "1" is added to the counter (E) and updated (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number (for example, 10), and the illegal winning is won. If the value of the ball counters (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, it is assumed that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which the game ball wins (winning) outside the winning period, and an error for illegal winning is specified. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies that the illegal winning error has occurred to notify that the illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect a large winning opening. The switch input process ends. As a result, the illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (identify) that the illegal winning has occurred in the external device.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in step SZ230. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in step SZ240. In this second start port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 80, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step SZ250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal figure hold storage, which is the number of normal figure hold storage stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved figures is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is less than 4, the number of reserved figures is updated by adding "1" to the number of reserved figures (hit judgment random value, normal symbol determination random value, normal figure fluctuation pattern). (Random value for determination) is acquired, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal figure judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step SZ230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input (the game ball wins the first start port 45). When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to step SZ230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

In step SZ230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and in step SZ230-3, the special figure determination information ( The jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random value) are acquired.

In step SZ230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the number of 1st special figure hold (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step SZ230-5, and if the number of 1st special figure hold (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time is performed. Mouth detection switch Ends input processing.

In step SZ230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special figure reservation number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step SZ230-6, the updated first special feature. The first special figure hold number designation command corresponding to the figure hold number (U1) is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special figure hold number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special figure hold number.

In step SZ230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and inputs the acquired special symbol determination information to the vacant storage units. Remember.

As described above, the special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, and special symbol variation pattern determination) is stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The first hold storage consisting of random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step SZ230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the non-time saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time saving game state, the process is transferred to step SZ230-9, and if it is not in the non-time saving game state, the first start port detection switch input process this time is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step SZ230-9. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure judgment information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol based on the judgment information is performed. Judgment is made, and the scheduled fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern to be executed, is determined.

In step SZ230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process of step SZ230-8 in the transmission data storage area for production, and this time, the first 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 is executed before or before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead advance notice effect that executes a predetermined advance notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. The look-ahead notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. Is done using.

Regarding the second start port detection switch input process, the first start port detection switch 45a, the first start port 45, the first special symbol hold storage area, the first hold storage, the first special symbol hold number (U1), The first special figure hold number designation command, the first pre-determination process, and the first look-ahead designation command are executed by the second start port detection switch 47a, the second start port 47, the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold storage, respectively. It may be read as the second special figure hold number (U2), the second special figure hold number designation command, the second pre-determination process, and the second look-ahead designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data in step SZ301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step SZ302, and holds the special figure if the special figure special electric processing data = 0. The process is transferred to the number determination process (step SZ310), the process is transferred to the special symbol variation process (step SZ320) if the special figure special electric processing data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step SZ320) if the special figure special electric process data = 2. The process is transferred to step SZ330), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game processing (step SZ340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process is processed to the jackpot game end process (step SZ350). To move.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. ..

In step SZ310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol hold number determination process of determining a jackpot, determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is "1" or more, and when the second special figure holding number (U2) is not "1" or more. In, it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0"). Is a change display of a special symbol, and a customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not a customer waiting state in which a jackpot game is not executed (a waiting state in which the game is not progressing) is started is set to "0". It is determined whether or not it is.

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, the customer waiting state specification command is set in the transmission data storage area for production, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. If the customer waiting status determination flag is not "0" after the current special figure hold number determination process is completed, it is assumed that the customer waiting status has already started, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained this time. Ends the special figure hold number determination process.

When the number of 2nd special symbol reservations (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, and then the second special symbol reservation storage area is stored. Various random number values (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to the fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the number corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2) after subtraction is obtained. 2 Set the special figure hold number specification command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the second special figure hold number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the second special figure hold number.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination (determination at the start) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random value and the game RWM area Based on the set value (1 to 4 in this case) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. "" Or "miss" is judged as a big hit.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special figure reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, the first special symbol reservation storage area is stored. After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage unit. The first special figure hold number designation command corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) after subtraction is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special figure hold number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special figure hold number.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination (determination at the start) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random value and the game RWM area Based on the set value (1 to 4 in this case) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. "" Or "miss" is judged as a big hit.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The jackpot special symbol or the loss special symbol is determined based on the random value for the jackpot symbol, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage unit is used. A special symbol (big hit special symbol, lost special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and a special symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the special symbol fluctuation random value, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter to obtain the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the corresponding special figure fluctuation pattern specification command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value and the random value for special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the special diagram corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set. Set the variation pattern specification command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets the variation display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED) in the predetermined processing area. ..

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in the step SZ600, and the created data is output in the step SZ700. The first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 performs variable display of the special symbol.

Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is set to the special figure special electric processing data = 1, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the special figure hold number determination processing this time is completed.

In step SZ320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process for determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in step SZ310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 1.

When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the jackpot special symbol or the lost special symbol determined in step SZ310 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, and is determined in advance. The stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the special symbol variation processing this time is completed.

In step SZ330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process for determining whether or not the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step SZ320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of time reductions> 0, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction counter to update, when the number of time reductions = 0, the time reduction game flag is cleared, and when the number of high probability times> 0, it is high. It is updated by subtracting 1 from the probability count counter, and when the high probability count = 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a jackpot special symbol, the time saving game flag, the high probability game flag, the time saving number counter, and the high probability number counter are cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to the special figure special electric processing data = 3 are set. Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the special symbol stop processing this time is completed.

On the other hand, if it is a lost special symbol, set the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to the special figure special electric processing data = 0, prepare to move to the subroutine of the special figure hold number determination processing, and stop this special symbol. End the process.

In step SZ340, the main CPU 110a is for executing the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step SZ310. Perform jackpot game processing.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 according to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the drive data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening / closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game count (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (win) during this opening, or when the opening time of the large winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), the large The output of the drive data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening / closing member 51. As a result, one round game is completed. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the predetermined number of round games (4 times or 16 times in this embodiment) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 Set the special figure special electric processing data = 4, prepare to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and end the jackpot game processing this time.

In step SZ350, the main CPU 110a determines the probability gaming state of either the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state, and also determines the gaming state of either the time-saving gaming state or the non-time-saving gaming state. Performs jackpot game end processing.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step SZ310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number of times, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the time saving number of times are performed. Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to the special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special figure hold number determination processing, and the current jackpot game end processing is completed.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. 82 and 83 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "first special figure hold number designation command" indicates the first special figure hold number (U1), and when the first special figure hold number (U1) increases or decreases, the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c Is set in, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "second special figure hold number designation command" indicates the second special figure hold number (U2), and when the second special figure hold number (U2) increases or decreases, the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c Is set in, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In the present embodiment, the "first special figure hold number designation command" and the "second special figure hold number designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "special figure hold number designation command". Note that this is not a command that indicates the number of holds, but a command that indicates an increase in the number of holds (1st special figure hold increase command, 2nd special figure hold increase command) and a command that indicates a decrease in the number of holds (1st special figure hold decrease command). , The second special figure hold reduction command) may be transmitted.

The "special symbol designation command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the main RAM 110c is transmitted for production. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol designation command indicates the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot end. It can be said that.

The "first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60. When it is started, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "second special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, and the variation display of the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 61. When it is started, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In the present embodiment, the "first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" and the "second special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "special figure fluctuation pattern designation command".

The "special symbol stop designation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is the main when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol stop designation command" indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62. It is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "look-ahead designation command" is for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (determination of the special figure determination information) in advance, and the game is played in the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. When the ball wins a prize, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "big hit opening designation command" indicates that the big hit game (special game) starts, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various big hit games start, and is set on the production control board. It is transmitted to 130.

The "round number designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the round game of the jackpot game is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130. To.

The "big hit ending designation command" indicates that the big hit game ends, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various big hit games end, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130. To.

The "Public figure hold number designation command" indicates the normal figure hold number (G1), and is the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c when the value stored in the normal figure hold number (G1) storage area increases or decreases. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "ordinary symbol designation command" indicates the type of the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 62, and when various ordinary symbols are determined and the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started, the main RAM 110c It is set in the effect transmission data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started. And transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "hit opening designation command" indicates that the hit game (auxiliary game) starts, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the hit game starts, and the effect control board 130. Will be sent to.

The "hit ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are completed, and when the hit game is completed, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130. To.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether or not the game is in the time-saving game state and whether or not the game is in the high-probability game state. At the start of the change of the special symbol and at the end of the change of the special symbol (start of the jackpot game). Time) and at the end of the jackpot, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power recovery designation command" indicate whether or not the power-on to the game machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the power supply of the game machine 1 is When it is turned on, the presence / absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power-on designation command corresponding to the gaming state, or the power recovery designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not performed is entered, and when the customer waiting state is reached, the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c is stored. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates that an error has occurred in the game machine 1 and the type of the error, and when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality is determined by the above-mentioned magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process. When the occurrence of an illegal winning is determined in the above-mentioned large winning opening detection switch input processing or the above-mentioned second starting opening detection switch input processing, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the effect control board 130. Will be sent to.

Further, even when the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is opened, the lower plate 12 is full, or a payout abnormality is detected in the payout control board 120, the payout RAM 121c is set in the production transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c, and the effect control board is set. It is transmitted to 130.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error generated in the game machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c or the payout RAM 121c when the resolution of various abnormalities is detected. And transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "set value designation command" indicates the set value set in the game machine 1, and specifically, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are issued. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
Next, the main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130 m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt in step EZ10, and performs initialization processing in step EZ20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step EZ30, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption, and performs sub random number update processing in step EZ40. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step EZ40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a in the stack area in the step EZ100, and performs the timer update process in the step EZ120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in step EZ130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in step EZ150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. Do.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change / confirmation process in step EZ170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change designation command or the setting confirmation designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if the setting change designation command is received, the above-mentioned setting is performed. The process for executing the change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, the processing for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step EZ200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing the power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The power-on sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step EZ250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power recovery designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing the power failure recovery notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The power recovery sound is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, it should be noted.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing in the step EZ300. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing a customer waiting demo effect after a lapse of a predetermined time is performed. Do. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , A customer waiting demo sound is output from the voice output device 9. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state update process in step EZ350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state specification command is being received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is being received is performed. Do.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold information update process in step EZ400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special figure hold number specification command or a normal figure hold number specification command is being received by referring to the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, it is stored (understood) in the sub RAM 130c. ) Performs processing to update the number of 1st special figure hold, 2nd special figure hold number, normal figure hold number, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect processing in step EZ500. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a look-ahead designation command or a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is being received, and if so, the icon is changed as a look-ahead system effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous notice production, and lamp change production. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

The "icon change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect in which the player is expected to execute the jackpot game by changing the hold icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect", and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect".

The "continuous notice effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that makes a player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
The "ramp change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by changing the light emitting mode of the winning opening lamp over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step EZ600, the sub CPU 130a performs the special figure special electric effect effect processing. Specifically, the special symbol designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the special figure stop designation command, the jackpot opening designation command, the round number designation command, and the jackpot ending designation command are referred to with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Etc. is determined, and if it is received, processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command.

In step EZ800, the sub CPU 130a performs the Fuzu Fuden effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to receive a normal symbol designation command, a normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command, a normal figure stop designation command, a hit opening designation command, a hit ending designation command, and the like. It is determined whether or not it is present, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step EZ850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not an error specification command or an error release specification command is being received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command is produced. Performs processing for executing, and processing for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step EZ900. Specifically, it performs processing such as outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150. ..

In step EZ950, the sub CPU 130a returns the information saved in step EZ100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Customer waiting production processing of the production control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step EZ300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting state designation command is received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state specification command has not been received, the process is moved to step EZ300-4, and if the customer waiting state specification command has been received, in step EZ300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demo production. Select the demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 87) for determining the waiting time of. The details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step EZ300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 87, one demo waiting time is determined from a plurality of demo waiting times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step EZ300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demo is waiting. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the demo standby timer is set. If the demo is not waiting, the customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demo effect is not executed. If the demo is waiting, the demo standby timer is updated by -1 in step EZ300-5. ..

The sub CPU 130a determines in step EZ300-6 whether or not the demo standby timer = 0. If the demo standby timer is not 0, the customer waiting demo effect is not executed yet, and the customer waiting effect process is terminated. If the demo standby timer is 0, the customer waiting demo effect is produced in step EZ300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the customer waiting effect processing this time is completed. As a result, the customer waiting demo effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect that appeals to the player to execute the game is executed.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a demo waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo effect.

In FIG. 87, the demo waiting time determination table is associated with the game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time. Four types of demo waiting times of 30 seconds to 70 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the normal game state, and four types of demo waiting times of 35 seconds to 75 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the specific game state. Is set.

The first feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 87 is the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the effect symbol on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demo waiting time after the display is static, the demo waiting time after the variable display of the production symbol is finished (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is still displayed, and the production symbol after the customer waiting demo production is finished. There is a difference from the demo waiting time after is displayed statically. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the current state, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game machine.

The second feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 87 is that the variation display of the effect symbol ends (variates) rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the production symbol is statically displayed after (time has passed) is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game machine.

The third feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 87 is that the power is restored rather than the demo standby time after the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (the variation time has elapsed) and the effect symbol is statically displayed. Immediately after that, the demonstration waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game machine.

The fourth feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 87 is that the effect is displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored, rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the symbol is displayed still is longer. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game machine.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 87 is that the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo effect is completed is the shortest. Therefore, the appealing power to the game to the player can be effectively enhanced, and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 87 is that each demo waiting time in a specific gaming state (low probability short game state, high probability time short game state) is more than each demo waiting time in the normal gaming state. Has a longer point. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game machine.

(Look-ahead production processing of the production control unit)
A look-ahead effect processing of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead system effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step EZ510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect, the effect mode of the icon change effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

In step EZ520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon). Performs execution processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 92.

In step EZ530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 97.

In step EZ540, the sub CPU 130a performs the continuous advance notice effect execution process for executing the continuous advance notice effect determined to be executed in the continuous advance notice effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

In step EZ550, the sub CPU 130a performs the lamp change effect execution process for executing the lamp change effect (turning on the winning port lamp NR so that the light emitting mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed), and this time. The look-ahead production process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step EZ510-1 whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is moved to step EZ510-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the icon change effect determination process this time is ended.

In step EZ510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the pre-reading designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step EZ510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step EZ510-4, and if it is not the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step EZ510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received look-ahead designation command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, it is in the normal gaming state, and the received look-ahead designation command is based on the winning of the second starting port 47. In some cases, it may be provided that the player is in a specific game state (low probability time / short game state, high probability time / short game state).

In step EZ510-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step EZ510-5. , Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 90) for determining the icon final display mode. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step EZ510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 90, and is a plurality of sub CPUs 130a based on the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. One icon final display mode is determined from the icon final display modes of.

In step EZ510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (CD icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

In step EZ510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the display mode is such that the icon change effect is executed, the process is transferred to step EZ510-9, and if the display mode is not such that the icon change effect is executed, the process is transferred to step EZ510-12.

In step EZ510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 91) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In step EZ510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 91, a plurality of icons are based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. One change scenario is determined from the change scenarios of.

In step EZ510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is an icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the icon change effect determination process this time is completed. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed with a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed with a special icon) is output.

In step EZ510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the read-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step EZ510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / sound control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It will be displayed or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode.

The final display mode of the icon includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit (a big hit game is executed), a red character icon, and a rainbow character. The icon is set.

The jackpot winning expectation for the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is confirmed to be a jackpot. ..

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 90, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is changed according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the planned fluctuation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the planned fluctuation pattern is normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach where the scheduled fluctuation pattern is not reach. It is supposed to be done.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 90, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a big hit, but it may be selected. ..

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, for reference. Preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and how to update the icon in the fluctuations are described.

The "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and an icon display mode that changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the variation (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table using whether or not the reach effect suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed as a judgment factor. You may decide the scenario. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is higher than that during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Icon change effect execution process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step EZ520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step EZ520-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step EZ520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step EZ520-3, holds to change (update) the display mode in the current variation effect. Determine if there is an icon. If there is a hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step EZ520-4, and if there is no hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step EZ520-7.

In step EZ520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 93) for the hold icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in step EZ520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 93, among the plurality of hold icon change patterns, based on the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). Determines one hold icon change pattern from.

In step EZ520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command according to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed in is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (changing sound) is output.

In step EZ520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process is moved to step EZ520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. Power recovery or winning. The process is moved to step EZ520-11 assuming that a command error has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area because the hour command (special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) cannot be received normally.

In step EZ520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon for changing the display mode, the process is moved to step EZ520-9, and if there is no icon for changing the display mode, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step EZ520-9, the sub CPU 130a is selected from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation effect. A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 94) for the icon according to the change stage in which the icon changes is selected. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step EZ520-10. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

At the time of abnormality, the sub CPU 130a determines in step EZ520-11 whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not be executed due to power recovery or the occurrence of a command abnormality. Select the icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 95) for. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step EZ520-12. Specifically, referring to the icon change pattern determination table for the selected abnormal time, based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command this time and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One of the icon change patterns is determined from the plurality of icon change patterns, and the final icon display mode is also determined.

In step EZ520-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the icon change pattern is a change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon. If it is a change pattern, the process is transferred to step EZ520-14, and if it is not a change pattern (it is a non-change pattern), the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step EZ520-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 corresponds to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed in is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (changing sound) is output.

As described above, according to the icon change effect execution process shown in FIG. 92, when a power restoration or a command abnormality (such as missing a look-ahead designation command) occurs, the icon change effect (the icon) is newly started in the variation effect. The change effect) may be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction caused by the icon change effect not being executed due to the power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the icon change effect execution process shown in FIG. 92, the icon change effect is executed again in the variable effect newly started after the power is restored (although it was a special icon due to the hold icon change effect, it is normal due to the power restoration. Even when the icon change effect is executed for the icon that has returned to the icon), the change scenario before the power restoration is performed by newly determining the effect mode of the icon change effect based on the current fluctuation pattern. It is not executed from the continuation of the stage (the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped). Therefore, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If a power recovery or command error occurs during the execution of the icon change effect, the hold memory (special figure) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect in the variable effect newly started after the power recovery or command error occurs. The icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect corresponding to the hold memory (special figure judgment information) before the judgment information), and the icon change effect is performed by the variable effect corresponding to the hold memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect. It may be feasible.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the hold icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern for the hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of change of the hold icon in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the selected hold icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect (at the start of fluctuation) when the hold icon is shifted and displayed according to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during fluctuation with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character as the character appears is performed to display the icon. The character action change pattern 01 whose mode changes and the change notification symbol indicating that the icon display mode changes as a result of the variation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the action effect that acts on the hold icon starting from the change notification symbol. Is performed to change the display mode of the hold icon, and the symbol action change pattern 01 is set.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the hold icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode that is two levels higher.

The timing for generating the change effect of the hold icon is the above three timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 94 (a) shows a case where the display mode of the icon is changed by one step. It is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 94 (b) is a table to be referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the selected icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the fluctuation with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change in the display mode of the hold icon during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon by performing an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character as the character appears are set.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the start of the change) and when the change effect is being executed (during the change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the icon, 1 UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be possible to select it. For example, in the variation effect in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the pseudo variation is performed.

"Pseudo-continuous production" is a variable display of the production symbol multiple times for a jackpot judgment based on winning (ball winning) to one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47). In order to make it appear as if was executed, all within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (ball winning) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47). This is a special aspect of the effect symbol variation display in which the re-variation display that starts the variation again after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is the above-mentioned two timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(The icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the icon change pattern determination table for an abnormal time, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

In the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the icon change pattern to be selected, and the icon to be selected are displayed. The final display mode of the icon is associated with the above, and for reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The icon change pattern includes a non-change pattern in which the icon change effect is not executed. However, the other icon change patterns, the change effect occurrence timing of the icon, and the change stage of the icon are described above. Since it is the same as that described in the change pattern determination table for icons, the description here is omitted.

(Relationship between hold icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 96A is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the hold icon and the occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command. It's getting higher.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the change effect occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. The frequency is low.

That is, the case where the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is better than the case where the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command. It can be said that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change to the blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the change effect occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. The frequency is high.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command causes a change effect rather than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure variation pattern specification command. The frequency is low.

That is, the case where the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure variation pattern specification command is better than the case where the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change to the red character icon. The predetermined command is a look-ahead designation command or a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins a prize at the start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) and a hold icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing of the change, and the normal change pattern 01.
Further, the change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure variation pattern designation command are the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is more predetermined. Since the frequency of change effects that change to the red character icon, which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the frame update timing according to the reception of the command of, is high, the player can be made to pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing, and the interest of the game is Can be improved.

In addition, since the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command occurs more frequently than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the change effect that changes to the blue character icon occurs. Although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a big hit at an early stage, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent fluctuation production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 1)
FIG. 96B is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to pull the expectation of the jackpot game of the person for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The predetermined command is a look-ahead designation command or a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 2)
FIG. 96 (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing and the change effect occurrence frequency 2.

When a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the icon is likely to change at a later time of the change effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by pulling the expectation of the jackpot game of the person until the late period of the variable production.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 96D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generation notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when the hold icon and the blue character icon are generated as the icon (when changed to), When the second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (change), and the hold icon and the red character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the icon is generated (when it changes to). When the third generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of change) and the icon changes to the rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. Is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the generated notification sound when the CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, the red character icon, and the like. There may be two types, a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, and the notification sound is not output when the CD icon is generated, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to any mode. You may try to do it. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided to make three types.

(Continuous notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
A continuous notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step EZ530-1 whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is moved to step EZ530-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step EZ530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the pre-reading designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step EZ530-3, it is determined whether or not the present is the executable period of the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the executable period of the look-ahead zone effect, the process is moved to step EZ530-4, and if it is not the executable period of the look-ahead zone effect, the read-ahead zone effect based on the read-ahead specification command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step EZ530-6.

"Look-ahead zone effect" means that during one or more variable effects, the effect in the zone (display of look-ahead zone background image, display of blue zone image or red thermal zone image, output of zone BGM or thermal zone BGM) is performed. It is a production that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by performing it with background images, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of continuous advance notice production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead zone effect" means that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead zone effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first start port 45 is received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a look-ahead designation command based on winning a prize in the second starting port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step EZ530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 98) for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario. The details of the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone effect scenario in step EZ530-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 98, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each effect scenario. Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step EZ530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as an effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

The sub CPU 130a sets the pre-reading zone effect scenario determined in step EZ530-7 in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the continuous advance notice effect execution process of step EZ540 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step EZ530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the look-ahead effect effect. If it is the executable period of the look-ahead effect effect, the process is moved to step EZ530-9, and if it is not the executable period of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead effect effect based on the read-ahead specification command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step EZ530-11.

"Look-ahead effect effect" is a special game executed by additionally displaying an effect image (either blue, red, or rainbow color) of a predetermined color around the effect symbol 70a at the start of fluctuation in one or more variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation to be performed by color information (expected value information), and is a kind of continuous advance notice production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead effect effect" means that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead effect effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first start port 45 is received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a look-ahead designation command based on winning a prize in the second starting port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step EZ530-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 99) for determining a look-ahead effect effect scenario. The details of the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the look-ahead effect effect scenario in step EZ530-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead effect effect effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 99, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each effect scenario. Based on (%), one look-ahead effect effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead effect effect scenarios.

In step EZ530-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead effect effect as an effect scenario in which the look-ahead effect effect is not executed.

The sub CPU 130a sets the pre-reading effect effect scenario determined in step EZ530-12 in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead effect effect scenario is referred to in the continuous advance notice effect execution process of step EZ540 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead effect effect is performed. When this process is completed, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is completed.

(Look-ahead zone production scenario determination table)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario.

In the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the advance notice scenario of each look-ahead zone effect, and the selected look-ahead The advance notice scenario of the zone effect is associated with it, and as a reference, the advance variation in each advance notice scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect in the change are described.

The "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

"Zone" means that normal zone effect (display of look-ahead zone background image, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is executed, and "heat zone" is more than normal zone effect. The heat zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the red heat zone image, output of the heat zone BGM) with high expectation of big hit is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed (for example, scenario 00), and a scenario in which the in-zone effect is not executed during the pre-variation and the in-zone effect is executed during the change (for example). For example, a scenario 01) or a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which the effect in the zone is executed during the pre-variation and the variation is set.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario determination table)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead effect effect effect scenario.

In the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the advance notice scenario for each look-ahead effect effect, and the selected look-ahead The advance notice scenarios of the effect effect are associated with each other, and for reference, the advance variation in each advance notice scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead effect effect in the variation are described.

The "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

The "blue effect" means that a blue effect image is additionally displayed on the effect symbol 70a, and the "red effect" means that a red effect image is additionally displayed on the effect symbol 70a. The jackpot expectation for the effect image is higher in the order of blue effect <red effect.

The look-ahead effect effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead effect effect is not executed (for example, scenario 00), or an effect on the effect symbol 70a during the change without adding an effect image to the effect symbol 70a during the pre-variation. A scenario in which an image is additionally displayed (for example, scenario 01) and a scenario in which an effect is additionally displayed in an effect symbol during prior fluctuation and the fluctuation (for example, scenario 02) are set.

(Continuous notice production execution processing of the production control unit)
The continuous advance notice effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step EZ540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is transferred to step EZ540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect execution process of this time is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the notice scenario of the continuous notice effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect) stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c in step EZ540-2, and in step EZ540-3, the continuous notice effect. It is determined whether or not the advance notice scenario of is stored. If the notice scenario is stored, the process is moved to step EZ540-4, and if the notice scenario is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. Power recovery or winning command (special) The scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area because the hold number designation command and the look-ahead designation command) cannot be received normally. Assuming that a command error has occurred, the process is performed in step EZ540-6.

In step EZ540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the advance notice scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect is stored, the process is moved to step EZ540-5, and if the effect scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect is not stored, the look-ahead zone is stored in this variable effect. The process is moved to step EZ540-7 as if the effect is not executed.

In step EZ540-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead zone effect pattern (zone, thermal zone) according to the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead zone effect, and in step EZ540-6, a look-ahead zone according to the determined look-ahead zone effect pattern. Set the production command in the transmission buffer. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

In step EZ540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice scenario for executing the look-ahead effect effect is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the advance notice scenario for executing the look-ahead effect effect is stored, the process is moved to step EZ540-8, and if the effect scenario for executing the look-ahead effect effect is not stored, the look-ahead effect is used in this variable effect. Assuming that the effect is not executed, the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated.

In step EZ540-8, the sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead effect effect pattern (blue effect, red effect) according to the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead effect effect, and in step EZ540-9, the sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead effect pattern according to the determined look-ahead effect effect pattern. Set the effect production command in the transmission buffer. As a result, the look-ahead effect effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step EZ540-10 whether or not to execute an alternative advance notice effect as compensation for the continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to power recovery or the occurrence of a command abnormality. The determination table (see FIG. 101) is selected to determine the notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the selected alternative notice pattern determination table, one substitute notice pattern is selected from a plurality of substitute notice patterns based on the current variation effect pattern and the selection rate (%) of each substitute notice pattern. decide. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

The "alternative notice effect" is an effect for compensating for a continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and is any of a plurality of mini characters having different jackpot expectations on the image display device. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by displaying.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step EZ540-11 whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern executes the substitute notice effect. If the alternative advance notice effect is to be executed, the process is moved to step EZ540-12, and if the alternative advance notice effect is not to be executed, the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated.

In step EZ540-12, the sub CPU 130a sets an alternative advance notice effect command corresponding to the alternative advance notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the alternative advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the alternative advance notice effect is executed.

According to the continuous advance notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 100, if the effect scenario of the continuous advance notice effect is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to power restoration or a command abnormality (such as missing a look-ahead designation command), the operation starts from now on. It is possible to execute an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect without executing the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction caused by the continuous advance notice effect not being executed due to the power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous advance notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 100, when the power supply is restored (power cutoff) during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is not restarted in the variable effect started after the power is restored. In addition, it is possible to execute an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction caused by the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power off), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an alternative notice pattern.

The alternative notice pattern determination table is associated with the type of fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the alternative notice pattern to be selected. The production mode in the alternative notice pattern is described.

The alternative notice pattern includes pattern 00 in which the substitute notice effect is not executed, pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and mini character C on the image display device. Pattern 03 is set, and pattern 04 in which the mini character D is displayed on the image display device is set.

The expectation of winning a big hit for a mini character is higher in the order of mini character A <mini character B <mini character C <mini character D, and mini character D is a mini character that is confirmed to be a big hit.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 is that the alternative notice effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern with a high jackpot winning expectation than in the fluctuation pattern with a low jackpot winning expectation. The point is that the pattern can be easily determined. Therefore, if there is a high possibility that the continuous advance notice effect has been executed before the power is restored or the command abnormality occurs, the alternative advance notice effect will be executed, and the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous advance notice effect will be reduced. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

As the second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the trigger for executing the continuous notice effect. It is easier to determine the alternative notice pattern in which the alternative notice effect is executed than in the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that has not triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect prior to the hold is executed. Therefore, after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it becomes easy to grasp which fluctuation effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, in the variable effect executed after the power is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it is decided whether or not to execute the jackpot notice effect (line notice effect, step-up notice effect) described later. The alternative advance notice effect may not be executed by increasing the execution probability of the jackpot advance notice effect higher than usual.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the trigger for executing the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable that the jackpot notice effect is easier to be executed than when the variable effect corresponding to the hold that has not been set is executed. In this way, after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it becomes easier to grasp which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

(Lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step EZ550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process is moved to step EZ550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is executed, and if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub RAM 130c. In step EZ550-6, it is assumed that a command error has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area because the power recovery or winning command (special figure hold number specification command, look-ahead specification command) that is cleared cannot be received normally. Move the process.

In step EZ550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the icon change timing. If it is the icon change timing, the process is moved to step EZ550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step EZ550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon. Will be done.

In step EZ550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp change effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated. If the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp change effect is produced. End the execution process.

In step EZ550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process is moved to step EZ550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step EZ550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, sets the lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step EZ550-8, and performs the lamp change effect execution process this time. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect that has been executed ends.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 102, the lamp change by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform production. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the effect of changing the icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 102, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to do or perform an alternative notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control load, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the power supply is restored as in the icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the variation effect started after the power supply is restored. In this case, it is advisable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final light emission mode of the winning opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the prior fluctuation to the change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You may do so.

(Big hit notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
The jackpot notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m, and this process is a variation effect pattern determination process in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect process (variation effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command). Is executed after the process of determining.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect in step EZ650-1, and makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed in step EZ650-2. Select the jackpot notice determination table (see FIG. 104) for determining the advance notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 104, a plurality of notice patterns (non-notice patterns) are based on the jackpot determination result, the type of variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern. (Including), one notice pattern is determined. The details of the jackpot notice decision table will be described later.

In step EZ650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a warning pattern for executing the dialogue warning effect. If it is a notice pattern for executing the dialogue notice effect, the process is moved to step EZ650-4, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the line notice effect, the process is moved to step EZ650-6.

The "line notice effect" is a voice output device in which a line image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed on the image display device in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the variable effect. It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which the voice corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, the dialogue with a relatively high expectation is displayed when the jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation is high) than when the jackpot game is not executed. When a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the effect button 17 vibrates for, for example, only one second.

In step EZ650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a serif pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a serif pattern in the serif notice effect, and determines the serif pattern. Specifically, referring to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from a plurality of dialogue patterns based on the jackpot judgment result, the type of variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step EZ650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets the dialogue advance notice effect command corresponding to the dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the dialogue advance notice effect according to the dialogue pattern is executed, and the dialogue image is displayed on the first image display device 70. Is displayed, or the voice corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the voice output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step EZ650-6 whether or not it is a warning pattern for executing the step-up notice effect. If it is a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is moved to step EZ650-7, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated.

"Step-up notice effect" is a jackpot advance notice effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until any of a plurality of steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is a kind. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the jackpot game is executed (higher expectation of the jackpot) than when the jackpot game is not executed.

In step EZ650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, one of a plurality of step-up patterns is selected based on the jackpot determination result, the type of variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern by referring to the step-up pattern determination table. Determine the step-up pattern.

In step EZ650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up advance notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current jackpot advance notice effect determination process. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect according to the step-up pattern is executed, and the first image display device 70 A step image is displayed on the screen, or a sound effect corresponding to the step image is output from the voice output device 9.

(Big hit notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a jackpot notice effect determination process referred to when determining a notice pattern for the jackpot notice effect.

The jackpot notice determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a type of variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and a notice pattern to be selected.

The notice pattern includes a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and a notice pattern in which the step-up notice effect is executed. The expectation of winning a big hit is higher when the up notice effect is executed.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the control CPU 142Z, and the control CPU 142Z performs the following main processing.

First, the integrated CPU 142Z sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt in step TZ1, and performs initialization processing in step TZ2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the centralized ROM 143Z, the flags and the like stored in the centralized RAM 144Z are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step TZ3, the centralized CPU 142Z sets interrupt permission for permitting timer interrupts, and in step TZ4, determines whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130 m with reference to the receive buffer of the integrated RAM 144Z. If it is determined and not received, the process is moved to step TZ7, and if it is received, the animation pattern is determined and set from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command in step TZ5. Performs animation pattern setting processing.

Examples of the effect instruction command include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, and an ending effect pattern command.

The animation group is the type of object that constitutes the production image, the scene (timing) and weight frame (display time) at which the production image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that specifies (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the production image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by being done.

The types of animation groups include, for example, an effect symbol group for displaying the animation of the effect symbol 70a, an icon group for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the icon, and a variable effect animation such as a background and a character. Examples include a variable production group, a notice production group for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a special game production group for displaying an animation of a special game production.

In step TZ6, the general CPU 142Z performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step TZ7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing (drawing a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is moved to step TZ4 and the frame switching flag is set. If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step TZ8.

In step TZ9, the control CPU 142Z performs display list generation / output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control command groups and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and is one unit. Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control process described later, a drawing control command is set for each set animation pattern according to the contents of the animation scene information. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group having the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group having the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set to the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step TZ10, the control CPU 142Z performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and draws the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer into the first image display device. A process of displaying on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

In step TZ11, the general CPU 142Z generates a sound list composed of sound control command groups, and performs sound list generation / output processing for outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when outputting a new sound. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step TZ12, the general CPU 142Z performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound output based on the sound list output to the voice control unit 148. By performing this sound output command processing, the voice control unit 148 outputs a sound based on the sound list from the voice output device 9.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, but the audio output device 9 outputs various sounds so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. May be stopped and vice versa.

In step TZ13, the general CPU 142Z performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step TZ4. After that, the processes from step TZ4 to step TZ13 are repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, and this process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m.

In step TZ20, the control CPU 142Z performs a command reception process for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Specifically, the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m is stored in the reception buffer of the control RAM 144Z, and the command reception interrupt process this time is completed.

(V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the V-blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141, and the V-blank interrupt processing ends the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (second = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

In step TZ30, the general CPU 142Z performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, weight frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding “1”), and in step TZ31, the image control unit 145 ( A frame buffer switching command process for instructing the VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 is performed.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer". It will switch alternately to and.

In step TZ32, the general CPU 142Z sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step TZ7, the processes of steps TZ8 to TZ13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change effect at the time of winning)
FIGS. 108 and 109 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, a look-ahead designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to display the display mode of the first hold icon with the blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 gives the second generation notification sound. Output is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, the drawing of the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronically), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production change at the time of winning)
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

As shown in FIG. 110A, the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state in which the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. Normally, a variable effect is executed.

Here, a look-ahead designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130 m based on the winning of the game ball in the first start port 45, the icon change effect determination process is executed, and the “scenario” as the change scenario. It is assumed that "02" (the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed by the blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the first hold icon (blue character) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 45. Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second generation notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, “234”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (f), when the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the fluctuation effect. The same applies to the following FIGS. 113, 116, 117, 120, and 121.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
11 and 112 show timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon change effect execution process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 that changes the first hold icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation occurs from the sound output device 9. The output of the notification sound is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variation effect (the timing at which the variation effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images (images, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character) is displayed on the image display device. (Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronically), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an effect example when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (shift).

As shown in FIG. 113A, when the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 is started. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon. In addition, the CD icon is changed to the blue character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, “164”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (f), when the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
114 and 115 show timings in which the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon change effect execution process, and various timings are shown when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has determined to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon TH to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the character or the like, and the sound is heard. The output of the third generation notification sound from the output device 9 is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the image display device normally displays the variable effect display screen d (character display), but the sound output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound. Not started.

The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the image display device normally displays the variable effect display screen e (character display), but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of an image, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the image display device is displayed on the normal variable effect display screen j (red character). (Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of production of character action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 116 and 117 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character action change pattern 01) during the variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. The normal fluctuation effect to be made is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), after the character C1 is displayed, the character C1 performs a throwing kiss operation as shown in FIG. 116 (c) to move the heart H to the icon (CD icon) TH. The production of flying towards is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the voice output device 9 sets the third generation notification sound. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of symbol action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 118 and 119 show various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon change effect execution process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the change symbol or the like, and the voice output device 9 The output of the third generation notification sound is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is performed in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed is started on the image display device, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. The output does not start.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 notifies the third occurrence. Sound output is started. The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol image, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen i (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is displayed. Output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen k (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 120 and 121 are diagrams showing an effect example when the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the red character icon (design action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in a state where the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the effect symbol 70a is varied and displayed. The production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left fluctuation display area, "3" in the right fluctuation display area, and "change" in the center fluctuation display area is stopped and displayed (provisional). An effect like a lightning bolt appears toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 from the change symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the variable display area in the center (stop display). Upon hitting, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the sound output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c), by defeating the enemy character C3 by the ally character C2, it is suggested that the ally character C2 is a big hit, and the variable display effect symbol 70a is a combination indicating that the big hit Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command (pre-reading designation command or special figure variation pattern designation command), and the effect. Since the control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure variation pattern specification command, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by increasing the variation of the change effect. It becomes.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect is limited to such a determination method, although the final display mode and the scenario are determined when the effect control unit 130m receives the look-ahead designation command. For example, it may be decided whether or not to change the display mode each time the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the look-ahead designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes is the timing at which the display mode of the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) can be changed. , You may decide each time.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are four types of display modes of the icons (corresponding icon, hold icon): a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon. However, the number is not limited to four, and may be large or small.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided, which has a lower expectation of winning a jackpot than the blue character icon and may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (special figure change pattern designation command reception) It is desirable not to change to a special icon in the change effect) that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing later. By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (a predetermined frame after receiving the special figure change pattern designation command) that easily change to a display mode with a high expectation of winning a big hit Since it will not change to a special icon due to the change effect that occurs at the update timing), it is possible to increase the variation of the icon display mode while preventing the player from being discouraged, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the above special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon in this order. You just have to make it higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the character C1 or the changed symbol is displayed in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. , A case may be provided in which the character C1 or the change symbol is displayed but not changed (so-called ghost effect). When such a ghost effect is provided, the ghost effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure change pattern designation command) is provided. The production has a higher execution ratio than the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02, the character. It is desirable that only the action change pattern 01 and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure variation pattern designation command) can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one variation effect, but may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) are changed normally because the timing is only once during the change effect. The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure change pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may change a plurality of times in one variation effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (look-ahead designation command or special feature). The frame update timing was set to be two frames after the number of frames received (figure variation pattern specification command), but it is not limited to two frames, and if it is not extremely late after receiving the predetermined command, several frames even after one frame. It may be later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, but the change effect is not limited to this timing, for example. The change effect may be executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the special figure hold number designation command or the special symbol designation command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 02", the "character action change pattern 01", and the "design action change pattern 01" are executed, a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure change pattern designation command However, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect of notifying that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, the present invention is not limited to such an effect, and in addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, the hold icon) is used by using the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10. ) May be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode. In this case, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is the same as the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound. At the same time (synchronically), the lamps of the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10 may be started to emit light, and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamps is set to end after a lapse of a predetermined time. Alternatively, the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) may be terminated at the frame update timing (synchronized) to be deleted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure change pattern designation command) may be infeasible. By doing so, since the fluctuation time is set short in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the character action change pattern 01 executed during the fluctuation are set. , The game in the first specific game state and the second specific game state by restricting the execution of the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the special figure change pattern designation command). It is possible to improve the interest of the game without impairing the character.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon and the icon itself, but is not limited to such a change, and the display mode of the hold icon and the icon itself is not limited to such a change. May be displayed around the hold icon or the icon in a color indicating the expectation of winning a jackpot without changing (the CD icon remains), or around the hold icon or the icon (near). A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit may be displayed, or a character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ren") suggesting an effect to be executed may be displayed around (near) the hold icon or the icon. It may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, it is determined regardless of the winning of the jackpot, but it may be determined by referring to the winning of the jackpot. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). ..

In this way, when deciding the change scenario by referring to the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and it changes to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2" rather than "1" or "2". In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to the red character icon, the red character at the time of winning is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) makes it difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
Also, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if it is lost and changes to the red character icon, the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning than when the jackpot is won and changes to the red character icon. Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

Further, in the present embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, but it is decided by referring to the current number of holdings and the winning of the jackpot. May be good. Specifically, one hold icon from a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). The change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the hold icon change pattern by referring to the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon, the current number of holds is "1" or " The selection rate (%) may be set so that "normal change pattern 01" is more easily selected as the hold icon change pattern in the case of "3" or "4" than in the case of "2".
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is more when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) is difficult to select "normal change pattern 01".
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the jackpot is lost and the icon changes to the red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is "normal change pattern 01" rather than if the jackpot is won and the icon changes to the red character icon. ] Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

As described above, when the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) change to the red character icon, the current number of holds is "1". "3" and "4" have a higher expectation of winning a big hit than "2" and "2", so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
Hereinafter, a modified example of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), a special pattern is variablely displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying the symbol TZ is provided.

Further, at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a first special figure reservation display area for displaying the first special figure reservation number indicating the current first special figure reservation number (U1), and a first special figure reservation display area. It is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the current second special figure reserved number (U2) is provided.

The first special figure hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E and the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F correspond to the first hold information, and the first The first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to the second hold information, and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon corresponds to the execution information.

(Specific example when variable production is started from waiting for customers)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. FIG. 122 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 123 (a) to (f) and 124 (g) to (k) are FIGS. 122 (a) to (k). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demo production is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation, which is a notification sound when the icon is generated, is generated. The output of the notification sound is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is changed from "0" to "1". , And the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 in a normal size. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure hold number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of the customer waiting state). 5th frame from). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated reduction display of the first special symbol hold number, and the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon by animation to the icon are displayed. To be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is changed from "1" to "0". The first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the output of the first generation notification sound is started (14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C is continued, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon (25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH is set, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variation effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variation effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area on the center and the right side.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “5” is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area in the center.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variation effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. Stop display is performed with the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the number of special figures held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, one frame that minimizes the increase display by non-animation of the hold numbers and hold icons. Since it ends in a minute period (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and change display of the hold icon) so that it will not be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is after the timing when the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends (frame update) (frame). Since it continues until the timing (update), it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special figures held has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figures on hold decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the decrease display of the hold number by non-animation and the change display of the hold icon by animation to the icon are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed (frame update), the special figure is held. While producing a change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special figures held has decreased due to the reserved number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next production symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production is started after the hold memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

When the number of special figures held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed non-animated, but rather than the increase display of the hold number. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special figures, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decrease display of the hold number and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same (frame update) timing, the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update). If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed than usual), the change display of the hold icon is displayed. The scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started shortly before the completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holds increases during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 125-126. FIG. 125 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation effect, and FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 125 (a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number and the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started. To.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is changed from "0" to "1". , And the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in an extremely small size, and the enlarged display is started. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (70th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures increases, the number of reserved figures is increased by non-animation and the increased display by animation of the hold icon is executed. Therefore, the player can tell that the number of reserved special figures has increased. It is possible to surely recognize the game and improve the interest of the game.

Also, since the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the number of special figure reservations changes. While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special figures held has increased due to the reserved numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figures held increases during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the increase display of the hold icon is executed for a longer period of time than when the number of special figures held increases while waiting for customers. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the hold number and the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold icon end in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), the special figure is held. It is possible to effectively produce the increase in the number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increase display of the hold icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, the variation effect is started. It can be emphasized and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the increase display of the hold number and the increase display of the hold icon are not started at the same timing (frame update), but the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier, whichever May start first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has increased while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be longer than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be made the same length as the period related to the display of the change of the hold icon to the icon, instead of being shorter.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 128. FIG. 127 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of “4”, “6”, and “8” indicating loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) based on the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the number on hold of the first special figure is reduced by non-animation, the change of the first hold icon is displayed by animation on the icon, and the first hold icon is displayed. The reduced display by the animation of is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is changed from "2" to "1". It changes to. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number is started, but since the change display and decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, the increase display and icon of the first hold icon are being executed. The output of the generation notification sound, which is the notification sound at the time of generation, is on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from “1” to “2”. , And the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon (40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increased display of the waiting first hold icon by animation is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TH, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in an extremely small size to start the enlarged display, and the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 is started. To.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2 to continue the enlarged display. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 continues. In addition, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed. In addition, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special figures held increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Since the increase display of the hold number is started even before the (frame update) timing, the player indicates that the special figure hold number has increased even while the hold icon change display and the decrease display are being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special figures held increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for ( (Limited), and when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the transition of the number of special figure hold It is possible to prevent the icon from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. May be good.

Also, when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are not started (start is delayed from usual). The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at the timing (frame update) shortly before the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special figures, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special figures held increases during the increase display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for in the same manner as during the change display or decrease display of the hold icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 130. FIG. 129 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 129 (a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect by the SP reach fluctuation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "7" are temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area are displayed on the screen. Move to the upper left and start reduced display.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the development production for developing into the SP reach production continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), in the first image display device 70, in the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and in the central variable display area. The scrolling effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, while the development production ends, the SP reach production starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen, and in the center of the screen. The confrontation production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Further, the hold icon (here, the hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D) displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) is left with the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C. The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the icon generation at this timing The generation notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2". , And the final production of the confrontation production (decision production to notify whether it is a big hit or not) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final production (decision production) of the confrontation production is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is displayed. Temporarily stops (becomes a swaying state) with a combination (“777”) indicating that is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a, which has been reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (swaying state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in a normal size.

Finally, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a, "777". In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, if the number of special figures held increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the hold number will be changed even before the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the number of special figures held increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). Since the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special figure pending, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the timing when the number of special figure hold increases. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing of executing the increase display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the number of special figure reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that it has been done, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of special figures held increases more than once during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the increase display of the hold number is executed while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). It is preferable to execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) in one frame.

In addition, when the number of special figure hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound. May be good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is illustrated as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included in the specific effect.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. 131 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 132 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 133 (g) to (i) are shown in FIG. 131 (a). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132A, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. .. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B has been erased, and the second hold icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display units 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. The icon TH is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the number of fluctuation effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining times") is displayed, and at the upper right of the screen, a game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU that prompts the player to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special figures (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure hold number is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification sound when the icon is generated are started. The generation notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2". , And the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the start of the variation effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, a result display indicating the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, the “special time end” indicating the end of the specific gaming state, and the predetermined advantageous period. The number of jackpot games executed in the game "Big hit x 1" is displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters “TOTAL 1200pt” indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen to stop and display, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is performed with the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second hold number is reduced by non-animation, the second hold icon is changed by animation to the icon, and the second hold icon is reduced by animation. The display, the non-animated return display of the first hold icon, and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed in the above start moving (shifting) toward the adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is returned and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. It is displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a left-handed image HU that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the left area of the game area 5a is displayed.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TH, the second hold icons H22 to H24 that have moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (520th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the number of 1st special figure hold numbers (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the 1st special figure hold icon is waited for (restricted), while the increase display of the 1st special figure hold number is displayed. Since it starts, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of reserved special figures has increased even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of 1st special figure hold (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the 1st hold icon is displayed at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the increase display of the 1st special figure hold number that was executed before that, you can recognize that the 1st special figure hold number has increased, and you can enjoy the game. It is possible to improve.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the special figure is held. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing when the number increases and the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generation notification sound is not output. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of holdings has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next production symbol) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the production during the variable production, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of 1st special figure pending increases by a plurality during the specific game state, the increase display of the hold number is executed, while the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). It suffices to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update) in one frame.

Further, when the number of reserved first special figures increases during the specific game state, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ) May be set (displayed) only in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F are set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but are set in the second image display device 71. (Display) may be used, or a dedicated display (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device may be set (displayed). Then, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of reserved special figures according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Initial processing of lamp / drive control unit accessories)
The initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150, and this processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing executed every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the lamp / drive control unit 150. Will be executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. When the power ON command is received, the process is transferred to step R102, and when the power ON command is not received, the process is transferred to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is transferred to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is performed in step R104. This is done, and the initial processing of the character this time is completed. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Perform processing such as setting to "2". The details of the origin return processing will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is “2”. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the accessory is not executed, and the initial operation processing of the accessory is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed. , Finish the initial processing of the character this time. Specifically, processing such as performing initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting the initial processing number to "0" is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 134, the origin return process for performing the return operation to the origin position of the various accessories, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories are performed. The operation process is not executed at the same time. Therefore, the return operation of the various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories do not coexist, and the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission can be confirmed separately. ..

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 134, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various accessories will initially operate from the origin position, and it will be possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Lamp / drive control unit home return processing)
The origin return process of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp / drive control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is “0”. To do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-2. 1 Set to the movable member 73, and move the process to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-4. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the movable member moves for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and if the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9. , Step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 can be driven, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the processing is transferred to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the processing is transferred to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives an effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 17 is within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-17 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, and if the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, this time. Ends the origin return processing of.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step R105-21, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process this time is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R105-21, and executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R105-22. Set "2" and finish the home return processing this time.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 135, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (at the same time), but in a predetermined order (first movable). The member 73 → the second movable member 74) returns to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separating, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying a load to each other so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress various inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 135, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are obtained. It is possible to execute the return operation to the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 135, an upper limit is set for the time of the return operation to the origin position of each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories is not completed forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various accessories are returning and not performing the effect even during the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 135, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are obtained. When both of the return operations to are completed, the process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the return operation of the various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of the various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separately check the return operation and the initial operation of the various accessories. ..

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73 → the second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position. The operation of returning to may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next. It becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp / drive control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing of the lamp / drive control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is “0”. If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In, "2" is set in the board accessory processing number assuming that the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 137) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board accessory. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets the lamp RAM 150c in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 137, one initial operation pattern is selected from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power ON command and the presence / absence of return abnormality information. Determine the operation pattern.

In step R107-6, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not completed all the steps, the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the steps, the board accessory is in step R107-10. Update the process number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the processing is transferred to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-14 to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is set in step R107-13. Assuming that the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, "2" is set in the frame accessory processing number, and the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 138) for determining the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of the power ON command.

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is “1”. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the frame accessory is not completed in all steps, the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the initial operation of the frame accessory is completed in all steps, the frame accessory is in step R107-20. Update the process number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step R107-22, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the initial operation process of this time is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. ..

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are set. It can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to prevent the production operation of the various accessories from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 constituting the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely breaking down or being damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the effect button 17 completely breaking down or being damaged by forcibly initializing the effect button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed and the return abnormality is executed. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory in which is generated is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have a return abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. If this happens, the initial operation processing will end. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory is performing the initial operation, it may be unclear whether it is the initial operation or the effect operation, such as the other performing the effect operation. It disappears.

(Table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board)
FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence / absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern is determined when patterns 01 to 03, which are determined when the power-on designation command is received, or when the first power recovery designation command, which indicates that the customer is waiting, is received. Patterns 04 to 06, a pattern determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that a special symbol variation is being displayed, or a third power recovery designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received. 07 to 09 are set.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 is in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin. The second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin without the first movable member 73 operating. During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

The "initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
The "initial operation pattern 05" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the first movable member 73 is determined when there is a return abnormality and the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light in blue, and as a result, it is the same as the initial operation pattern 03.

The "initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 or the initial operation pattern 04.
The "initial operation pattern 08" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
The "initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described, but this point is the first movable due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 73. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is the second movable due to the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 137 is that when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the board accessory The point that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is the same. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the panel accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, and the operation time in each process is the same. It may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and / or the second movable member 74 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation that is not in the initial operation at the time may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power restoration, or an operation that is not in the initial operation at the time of power restoration may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power-on. In this way, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It will be possible.

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 137 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second) is when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. A point is that the light emitting mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 137 is that the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. While they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is the same, but the initial light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. On the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different, while that of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 137 is that the board accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. The light emitting mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 137 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. It can be mentioned that the mode of initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by the power restoration that restores the customer waiting state, the fluctuation display of the special symbol, or the initial operation by the power restoration that restores during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but the first movable member LED is turned off. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be turned on in the same light emitting mode as when the power supply is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 137 is that the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored. When there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member When the 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a return abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on and the initial operation pattern to be selected. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of initial operation are described. ing.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the power-on designation command is received, and the effect button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → origin return → intermittent vibration, and the effect button LED is activated during that period. Lights (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → origin return. During that period, the effect button lights up (lights up) in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress is received. The effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the effect button LED turns off during that period.

The continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the effect button 17 are executed by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period generated during the execution of the variable effect. Time for the effect button 17 to vibrate during the operation effect (1 second vibration if it is a valid period for a big hit notice that expects a big hit, 5 if it is a valid period for a determined effect that notifies whether it is a big hit or not The time is different from the second vibration).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138 is that when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the frame accessory The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (effect button 17) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that it is designed to let you. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138 is that the frame accessory (effect button 17) is in the initial operation during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) at the time of power-on and at the time of power restoration to restore the customer waiting state. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission in. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138 is that when the power is turned on, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, or when the power is restored during the jackpot game, the board accessory is restored. The light emitting mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138 is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138 is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

It should be noted that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is produced during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. There is a point different from the time when the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is in the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138 is whether or not the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. It can be mentioned that the effect button 17 is overlaid on the initial operation of the effect button 17 on which the detection is performed. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 17 and the operation of the button vibration motor can be confirmed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power is turned on)
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, a case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T9, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the initial stage The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first hold The first hold icon is displayed in the icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first hold The first hold icon is displayed in the icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality ( The abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed. Then, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and the lights are turned on while waiting for customers (white lights), and at the timing of T7, the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) is set. After that, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change processing has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting change specification command is received by the effect control board 130 after the initial screen is displayed, so that the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power on control command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the set value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the initial stage The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality ( The abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed. Then, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are turned on while waiting for customers (white lights).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) of the special symbol and has the hold storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". , The audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) is received as a command when the power is turned on, the image display device displays the returning screen, so that the second is 1 The state in which the reserved numbers are not displayed in the special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the sub second hold indicator 84Z has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T7, the first operation 2 When the initial operation of the movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed on the image display device ( The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the static display state is displayed, and the stop sound "Don ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "2". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "2" is displayed.

When the state after the power is restored is the fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) of the special symbol and there is no hold storage, "0" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The basic operation flow from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 described above is the same except that the variation effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state, the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is broken, the command A third case or the like in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without supplying power to the main control board 110. At this time, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses thereafter, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which the effect can be executed.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the effect is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command. , And the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

The first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the first standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply only) is not supplied due to (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is broken, the command communication line A third case or the like in which the connector of the above is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without supplying power to the main control board 110. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses thereafter, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect.

At the timing of T2, when the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return process is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

The second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the second standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the second standby screen.

Further, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command is received, a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power is turned on is output. You may do so. In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or may be a different alarm.

(Specific example when the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally, the effect control is performed from the first case, the main control board 110, in which the power is supplied to the effect control board 130 but the power is not supplied to the main control board 110. The second case in which the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and the like can be mentioned. Case 3 will be described.

When the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold) is performed without the effect control board 130 receiving the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110. When the number and the second hold number = 0) are received, the initial screen is maintained in the image display device, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off. maintain.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. The sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, after the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, the variation effect (effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or the icon concerned). Change to, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 151 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is displayed. Is displayed, the standby screen in which the lost effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84Z, sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure The hold display 86Z) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped, the customer waiting state specification command is issued regardless of whether the standby screen is being displayed (whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished). When the demo waiting time elapses after the reception or after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the control state of the game is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82Z, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is supplied with a power source instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen. The effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of input, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 displays an alarm and "RAM". An initialization notification sound consisting of the voice "Clear" is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

In addition, during the execution of the return operation, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, and the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during execution, the timing of T4 The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) and the big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). ), It is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button). The return operation and the initial operation of 17) are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 140, 141, or 142. Will be done.

(Specific example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 152 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is continued and the main power supply is restarted will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the image display device is in a waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80Z (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84Z, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86Z ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82Z, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is replaced with the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen when the power is restored. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol of the above, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

When there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, light emission (blinking in red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 144, 145, or 146. Will be done.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 153 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, the fluctuation display is performed on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the hold number "1" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation). Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82Z, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, The sub second hold display 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84Z, The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 and the sub-normal map hold display 86Z) maintain the displayed contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is movable. The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and the light is turned off.

When the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, a definite display is performed with a loss of the variation effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed). Is displayed, and the stop sound "Don ♪" is output from the audio output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 has a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that the display is a loss.

When the result of the variation effect this time is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the final display of the variation effect is performed. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and the confirmation screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still display), and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it becomes a big hit display mode which shows that it is a big hit.

When the fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. When it becomes "0", the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission is different from the initial light emission mode when the power is turned off or the power is restored. Depending on the mode, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 144, 145, or 146. Will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable effect recognized by the effect control board 130 elapses before the special figure stop designation command is received, the temporary stop display or stop display of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. , The fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display and the sub second fluctuation display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 154 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the jackpot effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and right-handed is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The suggested right-handed display image MG is displayed, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is stopped and displayed (still displayed) at the lower right of the screen. Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first special figure hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F.

At this time, the jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variation display 81.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variation). Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82Z, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, The sub second hold display 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the jackpot medium transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started to start the origin return process and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17. The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is a big hit including the characters "Please restart the game (big hit)". The intermediate return screen is displayed and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, The sub second hold indicator 84Z, the sub-normal figure variation indicator 85, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86Z) maintain the displayed contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply only) is stopped during the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 153 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is movable. The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and the light is turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first special figure hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F. Further, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device is replaced with a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while displaying the special jackpot effect screen, but when the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command, the normal ending effect is performed. The screen will be displayed.

Also, when a special jackpot effect screen is displayed and a round number designation command is received, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen, a special jackpot effect is produced until the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command or the fluctuation start command after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set to the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but are set to a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 144, 145, or 146. Will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 151 to 154, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the image display device when the state is restored to the customer waiting state, and the restoration to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) to be displayed later on the image display device is different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display). It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84Z), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute hold display when the image display device is performing a specific display (displaying the returning screen) that suggests restarting power supply, but the sub hold display executes hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted is reduced. It becomes possible to do.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is restarted for the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed), the change display (the change display of the special symbol is displayed). Blinking display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) 82Z) may be used for variable display (blinking display). In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the returning screen is displayed on the image display device for the sub-hold display (sub first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z). The display mode shows the number of holds from the time when the sub-variation display is displayed (before the change display is performed on the sub-variation display and when the special figure hold number designation command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z) performs fluctuation display (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. May have a display mode in which the sub-hold display (sub first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z) indicates the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as in the case, that is, from the timing when the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various accessories is performed. Therefore, the control for the return operation of the various accessories does not become complicated, and the processing load for the return operation of the various accessories can be reduced.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting parts (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various accessories are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory that has a return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is to be continued. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory that has a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) from the subsequent timing (when the return operation is completed immediately, the effect symbol 70a is displayed). However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during restoration). From the middle), the initial operation of various accessories is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial operation of various accessories at an appropriate timing according to the state when the power supply is generated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, with respect to the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on and the main RAM 110c is initialized with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. In the case of power restoration without the above, when the restoring screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-hold indicator (sub-first hold indicator 83). , Sub-second hold display 84Z) is set to perform the initial operation after the display mode indicates the number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the board after having the player grasp the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. , When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-hold display (sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84Z). ) Is displayed to indicate the number of pending items, and then the initial operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory after having the player grasp the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device, that is, the timing after the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing when the effect symbol 70a is displayed) is the initial stage of various accessories. It is designed to operate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the initial operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the initial operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, when the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored simply by displaying the initial screen. The operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on has occurred.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the effect is produced. When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command and receives a special figure hold number designation command based on the winning of a game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port, a winning sound is emitted. It is designed to output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command, the fluctuation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the variable effect is executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command, the variation effect is performed without executing the return operation or the initial operation of various accessories. Is supposed to be executed. Therefore, during the execution of the variable effect, it is possible to execute the effect using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation or the initial operation.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state for customers after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation is specified from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as a return operation of various accessories and a variation effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even during the control state in which the effect can be executed, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 are restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the main control board 110 is in the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) have already been completed. When the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the power supply is stopped, the recovery operation and the initial operation (return operation) of various accessories and the initial operation ( (Including initial emission) is to be executed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to a command, such as in a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed. Even during the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is finished. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It has become like. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed responds to the command. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted even in the control state in which the effect can be executed. Is designed to output the initialization notification sound again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the voice output device 9 does not execute the return operation and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) of various accessories, but the initialization notification sound. May just output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state for customers after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even in the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. In that case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It has become like. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

It should be noted that the main control board is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to a command, such as during a fluctuation effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. ing. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as a return operation of various accessories and a variation effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the recovery screen for the jackpot is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control board 130 executes an effect according to a command, such as during a fluctuation effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initial screen is displayed even in the control state where When the first standby screen is displayed without being displayed and the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

(Modification example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 155 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A case where the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the stop is described will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. Is lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is displayed. Means that the standby screen in which the loss effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80Z (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84Z, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display The device 86Z) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time elapses (after the end of the customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off. To do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84Z, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The normal figure hold display 86Z) is hidden.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device is replaced with the initial screen of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. The first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 provides an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed or the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) is being executed or the jackpot is being hit. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the production (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device is displayed at the timing of T3. Example shown in FIG. 151 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (loss fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). Is basically the same.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 156 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, while the effect control board 130 is in the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states capable of executing the effect according to the command, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped to supply the backup power source. A case where the main power supply is restarted while the supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the image display device is in a waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80Z (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84Z, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86Z ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time elapses (after the end of the customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84Z, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The normal figure hold display 86Z) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device is replaced with the initial screen by "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed or the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) is being executed or the jackpot is being hit. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the production (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device is displayed at the timing of T3. Figures 152 to 154 show, except for the customer waiting demo production screen, the fluctuation production screen (loss fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and the jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the above example.

In addition, in FIGS. 155 to 156, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 155 to 156, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the effect symbol 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there was an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 155 to 156, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed from the initial screen. , And the effect button LED is turned off. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (the main control board 110 has an abnormality).

In addition, instead of starting the initial operation of various accessories from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, the various accessories are not started from the timing of switching to the initial screen or the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation of may be started.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen is displayed from the standby screen when the power ON command (power on specification command, power recovery specification command) is received. You may switch to the screen. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or the timing between the initial screen and the standby screen, or the initial screen is changed to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing of switching from the hidden state to the initial screen or the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching to.

(Modification example when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and the initial of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. The initial operation process ends without the operation being executed.

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first hold The first hold icon is displayed in the icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

Even when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode). , The initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Further, even when the power is restored, if the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, it blinks in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 157, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member having the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed even for a movable member that does not exist. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable members (particularly, the movable members on which the return abnormality has not occurred) from stopping during the execution of the game (variable effect, jackpot game), and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 157, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED Flashes red to notify the recovery error. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that there is an abnormality in the movable member as compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 157, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are movable. The initial operation is executed for the effect button 17 that does not collide with the member 74. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and the abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 157, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED provided on the effect button 17 returns. The initial light emission is performed without blinking red to notify the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has no return abnormality.

When the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process may be completed without executing the initial operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may be made to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17, the initial operation process may be completed for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 without executing the initial operation. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may be made to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Example of production when the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
158 and 159 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine 1 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 158 (a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, "728". It is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display are started. The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted to the icon display area 70C is changed to a red character icon to start the icon change effect, and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off and blinks red. The lamp change effect is started by changing to the changed state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second The hold icon display area 70D is erased together with the hold icon.

After that, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 158 (e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C on which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning opening lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect on the winning opening lamp NR remains continuous.

When the power supply to the game machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 158 (f).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 159 (g), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is turned off. Maintain the state.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the characters "Please restart the game" are displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 159 (h). The returning screen including is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the promotion effect of whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol is promoted to the jackpot effect symbol that is more valuable to the player). However, the winning port lamp NR remains off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 159 (i), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a ( The effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen (second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) are displayed without performing shaking fluctuation). , The variation effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply was stopped is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but is rectangular. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 159 (j), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. The first hold icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 159 (k), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a ( The jackpot production symbol 70a (reach state before the power was cut off) of "777" suggesting the type of the jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing the swing fluctuation / swing display). 3 ↓ 3 ”is a combination of production symbols that is different from the reach combination by the production symbols), and the stop screen with the special symbol TZ stopped display (still display) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is displayed with the winning opening lamp NR. The fluctuation production ends without restarting.

In addition to the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, other variable effects (variable effect in which normal variation is executed, variable effect in which shortened variation is executed, variable effect in which normal reach effect is executed, SP reach effect) When the power supply stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation / swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed, and the "variation effect" is executed. 753 ”lost effect symbol 70a, or the jackpot effect symbol that is the same combination of effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbol that formed the reach state before the power was turned off, or a combination of different effect symbols is stopped display (still display). Will be done.

Further, regarding the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and whether the subsequent state is the normal game state or the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state). Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) with a number having the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 159 (l), the image display device is provided with information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that the jackpot game is the first jackpot game). The including opening effect is started, and the first hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the jackpot winning expectation). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, the power supply stopped during the execution of the variation effect in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then displayed as a stop is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, if the special symbol stop designation command elapses after the special symbol change time elapses and the special figure stop designation command is missed and the state shifts to the customer waiting state after that, the customer waiting When the state designation command) is received, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) without temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a (sway fluctuation / swing display). Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. When this is done, the combination of the effect symbols, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is stopped and displayed (still display) instead of the normal loss effect symbol. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as determining the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (still displayed) by lottery, the power is restored to restore the control state of the game, and it is executed when the power supply is stopped. It becomes possible to grasp that the variable effect that has been performed has been completed.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In that case, the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the power restoration is such that the control state of the game is restored, and that the variation effect that was executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variation effect.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, a reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot production symbols that is different from the reach combination of the production symbols that were used. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbol that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, when the variable effect executed at the time when the power supply is stopped includes the execution period of the promotion effect described above, the power supply is restarted and controlled. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no useless effect is performed until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display), the player is immediately informed that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible to grasp.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the game is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the restart of power supply is the same as in the case where the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being aware of whether the loss fluctuation effect is being executed or the jackpot variation effect is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted. Can be reduced.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, the stop display (still display) is performed with a number having the same combination as the effect symbol 70a. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, when the power supply stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next Until the variation effect (scrolling of the effect symbol 70a) is started, the icon display area 70C displays a quadrangular area image, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, when the power supply stopped during the display of the hold icon is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step. By displaying a square area image in the hold icon display area until the variable effect of is started, the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed. It is secured and the hold icon is displayed. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the reserved fluctuation effect has not disappeared, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with a high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR. , Rainbow) If the power supply stopped during the memory of the special figure judgment information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lights off or lights up in white) does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as the lamp change effect being restarted even though the variation effect is not executed.

After the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect is completed, the stop screen in the state where the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but as in the case of loss, when the power is restored. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed) may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed are displayed, but the jackpot effect symbol 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. May be started for the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, the jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or the special symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. TZ may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, which are the initial symbols at the time of power restoration, are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the jackpot is displayed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when it is possible to execute a specific effect that encourages whether or not the jackpot game is executed without displaying the effect symbol 70a in the reach state in the variable effect (expecting that the jackpot game is executed), the specific effect is specified. After the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the production is resumed and the control state is restored, if there is a loss, the production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still display), and if it is a big hit. The jackpot effect symbol 70a may be stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, one of a plurality of combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game executed thereafter. May be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and "222". It is assumed that there are "444", "666", and "888", and the combinations of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game are "111", "555", and "999".

Then, when the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1 ↓ 1" which constitutes a part of the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game executed after that is the first. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols different from the reach combination by the effect symbols forming the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, either "111", "555", or "999" (a combination of jackpot production symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination by the production symbols that formed the reach state). It is advisable to stop and display.

Further, the special symbol TZ does not stop and display (still display) with a number that is the same combination as the effect symbol 70a after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, but the combination is different from the effect symbol 70a. It may be set to stop display (still display) by a number.

Further, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), while the power supply is turned on. If the specific game state (low-accuracy time-short game state, high-accuracy time-short game state) and the customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a is not stopped and displayed (still display). The special symbol TZ may be stopped and displayed (still display).

(Example of production when power supply to the game machine is stopped and then restarted during continuous notice production, hold icon change production, and lamp change production)
FIGS. 160 and 161 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 160A, the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B. At that time, it is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variation effect that becomes the advance variation is started, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the third display unit 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the first hold icon (shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2) ( By changing the display mode of the icon final display mode (red character icon) to the blue character icon, the hold icon change effect is started, and the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to the blue flashing state accordingly. The lamp change effect is started at.

After that, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ..

After that, when the variation effect that becomes the advance variation is started, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 are displayed. The displayed first hold icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the continuous notice effect is started, and the hold icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the game machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 160 (g).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 160 (h), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is a lamp. Keep the lights off without restarting the change effect.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the characters "Please restart the game" are displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 161 (i). The returning screen including the above is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-variation ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 161 (j), the temporary stop display (sway variation) of the effect symbol 70a is displayed. The effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped display (still display) are displayed without performing, and the lamp change effect is not restarted in advance. The fluctuation ends.

At this time, a CD icon that is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, when the square area image is displayed, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 161 (k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 displays the variable display. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if the lottery related to the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue character icon according to the result, so that the icon is displayed. The change production is started. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the winning opening lamp NR remains off and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

In addition, if the lottery for the alternative notice effect performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini character MCB is moved so as to be framed out. The notice production is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (l), the dialogue issued by the ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and the voice "Chance has arrived!" Is displayed to execute the dialogue notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (m), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 161 (n), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second. The hold icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 161 (o), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 161 (p), this big hit game (here, the first). The jackpot effect symbol 70a of "333" suggesting the type of (1 jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed to end the variation effect.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the jackpot winning expectation). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition, if the special symbol stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation effect (temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a), the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation) does not stop and display. , The temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) will be continued.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 160 to 161 when the power supply stopped during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration is stored. In the variable effect corresponding to the determination information, it is possible to execute an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect without restarting the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the suspension of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 160 to 161, the icon is displayed as a special icon (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed). When the power supply stopped while the icon is displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 160 to 161 when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is restored. In the variation effect corresponding to, the hold icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the icon change effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 160 to 161 even when the icon change effect is executed again during the execution of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration. It is no longer executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 160 to 161 of the effect, the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with a high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the memory of the special figure judgment information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (lights off or lights up in white) that does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. Therefore, while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as the lamp change effect being restarted even though the variation effect is not executed.

(Specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a is integrated into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. And.

First, FIG. 162 (a) will be described.
FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first start port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a is not connected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the characters "connection error detection" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 displays an alarm and "connection error". A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice of is output.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, it is detected that the connection error is canceled by the main control board 110. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 162 (b) will be described.
FIG. 162 (b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a changes during the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-inserted state and the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are not connected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the effect control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device has the characters "magnetic error detection" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "radio error detection" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the "connection error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the characters "detection" is displayed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound composed of an alarm and a sound "magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board Although it is detected by the 110 that the magnetic error, the radio wave error, and the connection error are canceled, various error notifications are continued until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

When the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the main control board 110 does not detect the occurrence of a connection error and causes an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 162, a specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) connected to the main control board 110. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (half-insertion of the connector, disconnection, fraudulent activity), and it is possible to take a prompt response.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 162, the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is not provided. Even when the connection state is restored to the connection state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error is continued until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts on the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 162, the error notification is not performed even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state. Therefore, the game can be continued as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , Various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. 162) from the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (when the display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen starts). Radio error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first start port detection switch 45a is used. The connection error notification may be canceled when the connection state is changed from the unconnected state. In this way, the game can be continued as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

In addition, the radio error notification sound related to a radio error with a lower priority (importance) than the magnetic error and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than the radio error are referred to as magnetic errors. If they occur at the same time, they are not output, but the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Further, in the magnetic error notification, the radio wave error notification, and the connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. May not be output.

(8th Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Initial processing of lamp / drive control unit accessories)
The initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150.
In addition, here, the same processing as the accessory initial processing of the first embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof will be omitted, and different processing will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the start of power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process shifts to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

When the lamp CPU 150a receives the power ON command that determines in step R102A whether or not the power ON command (power ON designation command, power recovery designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. Moves the process to step R102B, and if the power ON time command has not been received, moves the process to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds after the previous power-on and the initial operation should have been completed) has elapsed, the process is transferred to step R103, and the predetermined time has not elapsed. If so, the process is transferred to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

As described above, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 163, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started. It has become. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. Can be reduced.

Further, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 163, a power ON command (power on designation) occurs after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of power supply to the game machine 1. When a command (command, power recovery designation command) is received, the recovery operation and the initial operation of various accessories are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 is not started normally, and the command when the power is turned on is transmitted later than usual (an abnormality related to the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 has occurred). It becomes possible to grasp.

When a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received, the recovery operation of various accessories and the recovery operation of various accessories are performed regardless of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the game machine 1. , The initial operation may be performed. In this way, it is not necessary to be aware of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the game machine 1, and it is possible to simplify the process when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power is turned on)
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, a case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. Then, the light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. .. In addition, the second movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights alternately in red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights red and white alternately. , The light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73. finish.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. To do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 167, the case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change processing has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting change specification command is received by the effect control board 130 after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, so that the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power on specification command is output and controlled. Upon reception by the board 130, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. .. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the set value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). Become.

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. .. At this time, the second movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, and the effect is produced. The light emitting mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. When finished, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lit).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.
Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. ..

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73. When finished, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lit).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. The displayed hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and audio output is performed. The winning sound "Pon ♪" is output from the device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) of the special symbol and has the hold storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84Z, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. The light emitting mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) is received as a command when the power is turned on, the image display device displays the returning screen, so that the second is 1 The state in which the reserved numbers are not displayed in the special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub second hold indicator 84Z and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode showing "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

When a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed on the image display device ( The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the static display state is displayed, and the stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is "2". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "2" is displayed.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state, the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is broken, the command A third case or the like in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, when the power supply is started without supplying power to the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Then, the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation indicator 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82Z, the sub 1st hold indicator 83, the sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86Z is in a hidden state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the T4 When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and the second movable member ends at the timing of T6. When the initial operation of the member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command.

When the power line to the main control board 110 is connected at the timing of T7, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the effect is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command. , And the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T9 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T10, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. When the light is turned on (lit in white) and the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after that, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

The first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the first standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply only) is not supplied due to (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is broken, the command communication line A third case or the like in which the connector of the above is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

Since the timings from T1 to T7 are the same as the timings from T1 to T7 in FIG. 173, the description here will be omitted, and the timings after T7 will be described.

When the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected at the timing of T7, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the effect is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command. , And the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T9 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T10, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. It lights up (lights up in white).

The second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the second standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Further, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command is received, a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power is turned on (makes it possible to grasp) is emitted for a predetermined period. The output may be made over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or may be a different alarm.

In addition, in FIGS. 173 to 174, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

(Specific example when the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the command communication line. There is a case where the connector of is in the non-connected state (including the half-inserted state).

Since the timings from T1 to T5 are the same as the timings from T1 to T5 in FIG. 173, the description here will be omitted, and the timings after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, the special figure hold number designation command (the first special figure hold number and the special figure hold number) without the effect control board 130 receiving the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110. , Second hold number = 0) is received, the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changed and turned off. It becomes.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, after the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, the variation effect (effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or the icon concerned). Change to, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 176 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation is completed are already in the customer waiting state, and the image display device has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub-th). 1 Fluctuation display 81, Sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, Sub 1st hold display 83, Sub 2nd hold display 84Z, Sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, Sub normal figure hold display 86Z) maintain.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82Z, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as the initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as the initial light emission, and the image display device is powered by a power source. The effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of input, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the sound output device 9 displays an alarm and "RAM". An initialization notification sound consisting of the voice "Clear" is output.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

In addition, during the execution of the return operation, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, and the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during execution, the timing of T4 The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) and the big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). ), It is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button). The return operation and the initial operation of 17) are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

Further, when there is an abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking in red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is emitted as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 165, 166, or 167. It will be done.

(Specific example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 177 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is continued and the main power supply is restarted will be described.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the image display device is in a waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84Z, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86Z have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80Z (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82Z, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84Z, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86Z ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82Z, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. Instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) on the image display device. The second standby screen of the state is displayed.

Further, when the special figure hold number designation command (first special figure hold number and second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the first special figure hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the first special figure hold number display area 70E and , "0" is displayed as a hold number in each of the second hold number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82Z, and the sub-general figure variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84Z have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. When it is finished, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and waiting for customers. It lights up (lights up in white).

When there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories are performed in the same manner as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 169, 170, or 171.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 178 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, the fluctuation display is performed on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the hold number "1" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation). Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82Z, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, The sub second hold display 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. The image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variable display 81, sub). The second variation indicator 82Z, the sub first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84Z, the sub-normal map variation indicator 85, and the sub-normal map hold indicator 86Z) maintain the displayed contents.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. It becomes.

When the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, a definite display is performed with a loss of the variation effect. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the audio output device 9 is displayed. A stop sound is output from. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 has a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that the display is a loss.

When the result of the variation effect this time is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the final display of the variation effect is performed. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still display), and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot, and a stop sound is output from the voice output device 9.

When the fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the hold number displayed in the first special figure hold number display area 70E is displayed. When it becomes "0", the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set to the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but are set to a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is turned off or the power is restored. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking in red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is emitted as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 169, 170, or 171. It will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable effect recognized by the effect control board 130 elapses before the special figure stop designation command is received, the temporary stop display or stop display of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. , The fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display and the sub second fluctuation display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 179 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the jackpot effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) Is in a stopped display (static display) state. Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first special figure hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F.

At this time, the jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variation display 81.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first variation). Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82Z, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, The sub second hold display 84Z, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86Z) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the jackpot medium transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started to start the origin return process and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17. The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. The image display device displays the returning screen for the jackpot, which includes the characters "Please restart the game (during the jackpot)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. Further, the sub information display device 80Z (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84Z, sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, sub-general The holding display 86Z) maintains the displayed contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply only) is stopped during the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 178 is displayed. You may do so.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. It becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first special figure hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F. Further, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device is replaced with a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while displaying the special jackpot effect screen, but when the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command, the normal ending effect is performed. The screen will be displayed.

Also, when a special jackpot effect screen is displayed and a round number designation command is received, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen, a special jackpot effect is produced until the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command or the fluctuation start command after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set to the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but are set to a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking in red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is emitted as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 169, 170, or 171. It will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 176 to 179, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the image display device when the state is restored to the customer waiting state, and the restoration to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) to be displayed later on the image display device is different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display). It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84Z), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute hold display when the image display device is performing a specific display (displaying the returning screen) that suggests restarting power supply, but the sub hold display executes hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted is reduced. It becomes possible to do.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is restarted for the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed), the change display (the change display of the special symbol is displayed). Blinking display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) 82Z) may be used for variable display (blinking display). In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the image display device displays the returning screen for the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z). The display mode is set to indicate the number of holds from the time when the sub-variation display is displayed (before the change display is performed on the sub-variation display and when the special figure hold number designation command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82Z) performs fluctuation display (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. May have a display mode in which the sub-hold display (sub first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z) indicates the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, the control for the return operation of the various accessories does not become complicated, and the processing load for the return operation of the various accessories can be reduced.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting parts (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various accessories are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory that has a return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is to be continued. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory that has a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the initial operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the initial operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on and the main RAM 110c is initialized with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. In the case of power recovery without the above, the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84Z) is displayed in a display mode indicating the number of holds (the image display device displays the returning screen. The initial operation is performed before. Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), in the case of power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , The sub-hold display (sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84Z) performs the initial operation before the display mode indicates the number of holds (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device). It has become like. Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the frame accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, even when the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, and the initial operation of various accessories are performed. In addition, the initial light emission is executed and the display of the initial screen is continued. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on has occurred.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, even when the display of the initial screen is continued because the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received. , When the effect control board 130 is in the control state capable of executing the effect according to the command and receives the special figure hold number designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port, a prize is won. It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the effect is produced. When the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in the control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, the variation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the variable effect is executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state for customers after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation is specified from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as a return operation of various accessories and a variation effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even during the control state in which the effect can be executed, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 are restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control board 130 such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even during the control state in which the effect can be executed, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 are restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. Will be possible

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even during the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variation effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It has become like. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission of various accessories. You may just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state for customers after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even in the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. In that case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It has become like. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

It should be noted that the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various accessories and during the variable effect or the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even in the state, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as a return operation of various accessories and a variation effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the recovery screen for the jackpot is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control board 130 executes an effect according to a command, such as during a fluctuation effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initial screen is displayed even in the control state where When the first standby screen is displayed without being displayed and the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation can be eliminated. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 164 to 179, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

It should be noted that the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect, but from the main control board 110 after activation. The state of waiting for a command (for example, displaying the initial screen) may also be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

In the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a is composed of only the numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but it may be composed of the numbers (identification characters) + the character (decorative part). It is preferable that the characters are different for each number, such as "1" and character A, and "2" and character B. In addition, the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a number + character in the normal game state, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a number only or a character smaller than the number + normal game state in the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state). It may be displayed with.

Further, three types of effect modes A to C may be provided in the normal game state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode. Further, two types of effect modes D to E may be provided in the high-accuracy time-short game state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode. Further, two types of effect modes F to G may be provided in the low-accuracy time-short game state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes A to C in the normal game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode A is always set. At the same time, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-short game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode D is always set. At the same time as being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode D is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Further, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes F to G in the low accuracy short game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode F is always set. At the same time as being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode F is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the normal game state, the effect symbol 70a is changed to only a number, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is completed, and the effect symbol 70a is provisionally set. When the stop display (swing display) is displayed, the effect symbol 70a may be returned to the number + character.

In this case, during SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the effect symbol 70a is changed to only numbers, the power supply is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted to restore the control state of the game. When this is done, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen is completed.

Further, the power supply is stopped during the SP reach or the SPSP reach in the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state), that is, when the effect symbol 70a is only a number, and then the power supply is supplied. When the control state of the game is restored by restarting, the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers will be statically displayed without swinging after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen is completed.

(Specific example 1 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. FIG. 180 is a timing chart 1 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. 180. This is an example of production.

The effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal gaming state includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG composed of a predetermined character, a tactile image SG that is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration part consisting of a design effect image ZE to be decorated, and an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). Further, it is assumed that the effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed of only the identification unit including the number unit (identification character).

Further, in the normal game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes A to C are scrolled left and right (reciprocating operation). Further, in the specific game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating operation).

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E while the changing BGM is output is "2" in the non-animation for one frame. To "1", the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. Is displayed as. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

The fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub first fluctuation display 81, but since the blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, it is expressed by the double circle that the fluctuation display is performed. It shall be. Further, the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 is also represented by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" when the game ball wins the first starting port 45. .. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 181 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 181 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 181 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 181 (d)). ..

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 181 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 181 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of BGM is extended, and the output of BGM is maintained during fluctuation (see FIG. 181 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 181 (g)).

Then, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (FIG. 181 (FIG. 181). g) See).

Then, at the timing of T9, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 181 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“962”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the icon TI continues the rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 181 (i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation of the icon TI are continued, the period of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the variation display of the first lamp symbol LZ is extended. (See FIG. 181 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m is "0", so that the customer waiting state (game waiting state). Move to. When the effect control unit 130 m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variation effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a non-animation for one frame. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and a special symbol is displayed. The TZ actually stops in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ stops in a loss mode (lights off) (see FIG. 181 (j)).

At the timing of T7, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when it cannot be done will be performed.

Here, a specific example 1 in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal game state has been described, but it is basic even if the game state is a specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

When the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communicating between the board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

(Specific example 2 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 2 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183. FIG. 182 is a timing chart 2 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 183 (a) to 183 correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 182. This is a production example 1 to be performed.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". To. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" when the game ball wins the first starting port 45. .. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 183 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 183 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 183 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 183 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 183 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 183 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 183 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 183 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 183 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed third in the hold icon display area 70B is erased by non-animation for one frame, and all the effect symbols 70a (past fluctuations) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 183 (h)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is used as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 183 (h)).

When the surplus hold icon is deleted and the required hold icon is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon may be left as it is and the required hold icon may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 183 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of reserved first special figures becomes "0". In (the target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is executed according to the notice scenario, and the effect symbol 70a is a book. The look-ahead zone production ends when it stops.

At the timings of T7 to T9, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of 1st special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of T10 has been described, but the number of 1st special figure reservations is "1". When it changes from "4" to "2", and when the number of first special figure reservations changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m grasp. If the deviation from the number of pending reservations is "2", the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Further, although the specific example 2 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

(Specific example 3 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 184. FIG. 182 is a timing chart 2 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 182. This is a production example 2 to be performed.

Note that FIG. 183 and FIG. 184 are different from each other in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 184 (FIG. 184). d) See).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed in the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 184 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 184 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 184 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 184 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 184 (g) is maintained without executing the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 184 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second remaining hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the third display hold icon HI is erased by one frame of non-animation. It is displayed second. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) ( (See FIG. 184 (h)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is used as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed in the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a according to the advance notice scenario, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 184 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is high-speed. It will be in the scrolled state with. Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 184 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of the first special symbol hold becomes "0". The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) are also executed in the effect (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the look-ahead effect effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of T7 to T9, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of 1st special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of T10 has been described, but the number of 1st special figure reservations is "1". When it changes from "4" to "2", and when the number of first special figure reservations changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m grasp. If the deviation from the number of pending reservations is "2", the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Further, although the specific example 3 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 182 to 184, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), is held. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure holdings is a predetermined number while displaying information), the holding icon (for example, the third) of the surplus of the specified number of holding icons is displayed. The required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 182 to 184, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold information) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figure holdings becomes a predetermined number during the display of, the predetermined number of holding icons are displayed after displaying one less than the specific number of holding icons. The icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 182 to 184, in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is specified. For example, when the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure reservations is a predetermined number while displaying the number of reservations of 3), the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without doing so. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 4 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 4 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. FIG. 185 is a timing chart 3 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 186 (a) to 186 correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. 185. This is a production example 1 to be performed.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". To. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" when the game ball wins the first starting port 45. .. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 186 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 186 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 186 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 186 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 186 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 186 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 186 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 186 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 186 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 186 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 186 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position ( The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 186 (h)).

Then, one required hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 186 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 186 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the look-ahead zone effect ends when the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped.

At the timings of T7 to T11, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of T12 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is ". When changing from "4" to "1", that is, when the difference between the number of holds held by the main control unit 110 m and the number of holds held by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the basic flow. Is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 4 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

(Specific example 5 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 5 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 187. FIG. 185 is a timing chart 3 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 187 (a) to 187 (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. 185. This is a production example 2 to be performed.

Note that FIG. 186 and FIG. 187 are different from each other in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed in the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 187 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 187 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 187 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 187 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 187 (g) is maintained without executing the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 187 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 187 (g) is maintained without executing the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. Period is extended (see FIG. 187 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of 1st special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed in the first and second display areas 70B of the hold icon display area 70B is erased by non-animation for one frame, and the hold icon HI displayed third is for one frame. It is displayed first in non-animation. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed).

Then, one required hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the red effect image EF is displayed in the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 187 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, the icon change effect is executed at the same time as the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect ends, and the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 187 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of T7 to T11, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of T12 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is ". When changing from "4" to "1", that is, when the difference between the number of holds held by the main control unit 110 m and the number of holds held by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the basic flow. Is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 5 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 185 to 187, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold), which is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure holdings is a predetermined number during the display of information), the predetermined number is not displayed without displaying the number of holding icons one less than the specific number. Hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 185 to 187, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold information), which is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures held is a predetermined number during the display of, the number of held icons, which is one less than the specified number, is not displayed and the number is smaller than the specified number. Two less hold icons are displayed, followed by a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 185 to 187, in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is specified. For example, when the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of special figure reservations is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holdings of 4), the number of holdings is one or two less than the specific number. A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed without displaying the number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 6 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 is a timing chart 4 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 189 (a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. 188. This is an example of production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". To. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" when the game ball wins the first starting port 45. .. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 189 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 189 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 189 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 189 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 189 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“531”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 189 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (Fig. 189). See (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 189 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 189 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 189 (g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 189 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 189 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 189 (g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the customer waiting state (game waiting state) is set. When the effect control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "0". , And the process of setting the standby timer until the customer waiting demo production is started is performed.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed in the 1st to 3rd positions of the hold icon display area 70B and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased by non-animation for one frame to produce an icon change effect. The look-ahead zone production ends. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed). , The special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a loss mode (turned off) (see FIG. 189 (h)).

At the timings of T7 to T13, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the case where the customer waiting state designation command is received in the state where the number of 1st special figure pending stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3" has been described, but the 1st special figure has been described. Figure The basic flow is the same as the above description even when the customer waiting state designation command is received in any of the states of "4", "2", and "1".

Further, although the specific example 6 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, it is determined in advance. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stopped position are now displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable effect has been completed (shifted to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 7 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 7 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191. FIG. 190 is a timing chart 5 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of FIG. 190. This is an example of production.

Note that FIG. 188 and FIG. 190 differ only in that the command received at the timing of T14 is a customer waiting designation command or an opening designation command. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted here and is different. Only the part will be described.

At the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the jackpot game (special game) is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m remains "3" and is a big hit. Processing is performed to start the opening effect of the game.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E is maintained as "3" and displayed in the effect symbol 70a and the icon display area. The held icon HI and the icon concerned are deleted, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed. Further, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in the loss mode (lights out), and the opening effect image is displayed (FIG. 191 (FIG. 191). h) See).

After that, if the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure hold number designation command from the main control unit 110m during the big hit game or after the end of the big hit game (time saving game state, probability variation game state). , The number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command without animation for one frame.

At the timings of T7 to T13, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the case where the opening designation command is received in the state where the first special figure hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m is "3" has been described, but the first special figure hold has been described. Even when the opening designation command is received in any of the states of "4", "2", and "1", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 7 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, it is determined in advance. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the current stop position are not displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the jackpot game The opening effect image is displayed. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 8 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 8 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 194. FIG. 192 is a timing chart 6 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 194 (a) to 194 correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 192. This is an example of production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 194 (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 194 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 194 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (Fig. 194). (D)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by 130 m is from "1" to "1", that is, a process is performed to start the variation effect without changing the number of first special figure reservations.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The hold icon HI (CD icon) is additionally displayed (displayed in the normal size from the beginning) for one frame in the second hold icon display area 70B without animation. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) ( (See FIG. 194 (e)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is used as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (FIG. 194 (FIG. 194). e) See).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 194 (FIG. 194). f) See).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect (the SP reach effect ends), the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right temporarily stops in the reach loss mode (“878”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 194 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 194 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 194 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first hold memory in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. , The changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 194 (j). )reference).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of T2 to T4, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the effect control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" at the timing of T5 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is "1". When the number of reserved first special figures changes from "0" to "0", the number of reserved first special figures changes from "2" to "2", and the number of reserved first special figures changes from "3" to "3", that is, the main control If the number of holdings stored (grasped) by the unit 110m and the number of holdings stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 8 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, the number of reserved special figures is predetermined while the predetermined number (for example, one) of hold icons (first hold information) is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, which is a number, the hold icons are displayed one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed. Is designed to display a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the reserved number in the sub first reserved indicator 83 or the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, the special figure is displayed. Figure When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holdings is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of holdings is held without displaying the number of holdings one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to display numbers. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area, but the number of special figure holds is "0" while the icon is being displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the number of hold icons (for example, one) that is one more than "0" is displayed, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, while the number of reserved figures of "0" is displayed in the sub first reserved indicator 83 and the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, the number of reserved special figures is displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display that becomes "0", the number of holdings of "0" is not displayed without displaying the number of holdings one more than "0" (for example, one). Is displayed (maintained). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 9 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 9 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 and 195. FIG. 194 is a timing chart 7 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 195 (a) to 195 (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. This is an example of production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 195 (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 195 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 195 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". .. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 195 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 195 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variablely displayed. The period of is extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (Fig. 195). (D)).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The hold icon HI (CD icon) is additionally displayed (displayed in the normal size from the beginning) for one frame in the second to fourth hold icon display areas 70B without animation. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) ( (See FIG. 195 (e)).

Then, the required four hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (FIG. 195 (FIG. 195). e) See).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 195 (FIG. 195). f) See).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of T2 to T6, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m (winning command, stop command). , Start command) will be processed in the same way as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command).

Here, the case where the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" at the timing of T7 has been described, but the number of first special figure reservations is ". When the number of reserved first special figures changes from "1" to "2", when the number of reserved first special figures changes from "0" to "2", when the number of reserved first special figures changes from "0" to "1", that is, the main control If the number of holdings stored (grasped) by the unit 110m is larger than the number of holdings stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as the above description. ..

Further, although the specific example 9 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 194 to 195, the number of special figure reservations is predetermined while the predetermined number (for example, one) of hold icons (first hold information) is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the number, after displaying a hold icon that is one more than the specific number (for example, three). , A specific number of hold icons are displayed by shifting the hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 194 to 195, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the reserved number in the sub first reserved indicator 83 or the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, the special figure is displayed. Figure When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holdings is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the predetermined number, the number of holdings is one more than the specific number (for example, three). It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 194 to 195, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area, but the number of special figure holds is a predetermined number (while the icon is being displayed). For example, when the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, which is one), the number of hold icons (for example, two) that is one more than the predetermined number is displayed, and then those hold icons are shifted. By displaying it, a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 194 to 195, the number of reserved special figures is displayed while the number of reserved figures of "0" is displayed in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variation display which is a predetermined number (for example, one), the predetermined number without displaying a number (for example, two) which is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). The number of holds is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Summary of specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195)
As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The period, the fluctuation period of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and the output period of the changing BGM are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no production is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, the scrolling of the background image, the hold icon, and the rotation operation of the icon continue while the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a is extended (continued). ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring production with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, the look-ahead notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. It has become like. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command, the look-ahead advance notice effect will not end, and the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied will be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, when the look-ahead notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. Even if there is, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the look-ahead notice effect does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied without causing an abnormality in the progress of the pre-reading notice effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, a predetermined stop is performed. The variable display is started after all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was planned to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display). It is designed to do. Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable effect can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved as compared with the case where the variable display is started with the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol The LZ is designed to continue the variable display without being stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ. Further, even if the effect symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), it is possible to inform the player that the variable effect is being produced by the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ. Can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the icon indicates the normal time. It is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the newly executed variable effect to be hindered by erasing the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, the effect control unit 130 m during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). When the start command is normally received, the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command, the look-ahead advance notice effect will not end, and the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied will be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 195, the effect control unit 130 m during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). When the start command is normally received, in the newly executed variable effect, it is possible to execute the effect of the content according to the scenario of the look-ahead notice effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the progress of the look-ahead advance notice effect will not be abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player will be dissatisfied will be avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 10 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 is a timing chart 8 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 197 (a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 196. This is an example of production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed, and the number remains "1".

At this time, since the winning command in which the first special figure hold number is "2" has not been received, the first special figure displayed in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. The figure hold number remains "1", and the hold icon HI is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first special figure hold number "2" in the first hold icon display area 70B (FIG. 197 (a)). reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first In the hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI is not displayed in the second corresponding to the first special figure hold number "2" for which the winning command could not be received, and the first special figure hold number "3". The third hold icon HI corresponding to "" is additionally displayed as an animation for 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 197 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 197 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 197 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "2", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first In the hold icon display area 70B, the command at the time of winning was not received. The second hold icon HI corresponding to the first special figure hold number "2" is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (in normal size from the beginning). (Displayed), the three displayed hold icon HIs are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 197 (e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 197 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“225”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 197 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 197 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 197 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first hold memory in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. , The changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 197 (j). )reference).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of T2, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command. The case where the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is the same as the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive. Will be processed.

Here, at the timing of T3, when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", the winning command that the number of first special figure reservations is "3" is received. However, when the number of 1st special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received in which the number of 1st special figure reservations is "4". In this case, when the number of 1st special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "0", the number of 1st special figure reservations is "2", "3", or "4". Even when the hour command is received, the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Further, although the specific example 10 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described here, even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state). The basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure hold number, the first special figure hold number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub first hold indicator 83, the first special figure hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area. 70B, 1st lamp symbol LZ, 1st start port 45, 2nd special figure hold number, 2nd special figure hold number designation command, 2nd special symbol, sub 2nd hold indicator 84Z, 2nd special figure It may be read as the hold number display area 70F, the second hold icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol LZ, and the second start port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 196 to 197, the hold icon (first hold information) is set in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of special figures held is a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number when is not displayed, a predetermined number in the hold icon display area is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed in the area corresponding to the number (for example, the second), but the hold icon is displayed in the area corresponding to the specific number (for example, the third) in the hold icon display area. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 196 to 197, the number (for example, 1) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, 2) in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending numbers is displayed while the number of reserved numbers is displayed. A specific number of holds is displayed without displaying. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 196 to 197, the hold icon (first hold information) is set in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 4) in which the number of special figures held is more than a predetermined number when is not displayed, a predetermined number in the hold icon display area. The area corresponding to a specific number of the hold icon display areas without displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to the number one less than the specific number (for example, the third) from the area corresponding to (for example, the second). For example, the hold icon is displayed in the 4th). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 196 to 197, the number (for example, 1) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of special figure reservations is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number while displaying the number of holdings of one), the number of special figures is more than the specified number. A specific number of holds is displayed without displaying one less hold. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 196 to 197, the hold icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas, and the number is increased from the predetermined number. When the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a predetermined number while the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to the specific number (for example, 3) which is one more. By additionally displaying hold icons in the area corresponding to a predetermined number of hold icon display areas (for example, the second) to display a specific number of hold icons, and then shifting and displaying those hold icons, a predetermined number of hold icons can be displayed. The hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 196 to 197, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas and a number one more than the predetermined number (for example). While the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, 4th) corresponding to a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number without displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to 3), the number of special figure hold is When the effect control unit 130m receives a start command that is one less than the specific number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number in the hold icon display area (for example, the second) and the number one more than the predetermined number. By additionally displaying hold icons in the area corresponding to (for example, 3) to display a specific number of hold icons, and then shifting the hold icons, a number of hold icons one less than the specific number can be displayed. It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of pending numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 196 to 197, the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as the hold icon. Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed because the command at the time of winning is not normally received, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example 1 when the effect control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 2 described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183 (a modification 1 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 198. FIGS. 198 (a) to 198. (I) is an production example corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 182.

Since FIGS. 183 and 198 are the same up to the timings of T0 to T9, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency (original deviation of 1) due to a command abnormality between the number of 1st special figure hold notified from the unit 110m and the number of 1st special figure hold stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m. However, since an abnormality) that is a deviation of 2 or more has occurred, the look-ahead zone production ends.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are completed, and the changing BGM is output (see FIG. 198 (h)).

In addition, the surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by non-animation for one frame, and the hold icon HI displayed third is for one frame. It is displayed second in the non-animation of. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 198). (H)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is used as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 198 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 198 (i)).

(Modification example 2 when the effect control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 3 described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 184 (a modification 2 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 199. 199 (a) to (i) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 182.

Since FIGS. 184 and 199 are the same up to the timings of T0 to T9, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency (original deviation of 1) due to a command abnormality between the number of 1st special figure hold notified from the unit 110m and the number of 1st special figure hold stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m. However, since an abnormality) that is a deviation of 2 or more has occurred, the icon change effect and the look-ahead effect effect are completed.

Specifically, the surplus hold icon HI (blue character icon) displayed third in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) ( (See FIG. 199 (h)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is used as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 199 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 199 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110 m can be normally received, the variation effect executed for the variation display of the special symbol in which the first special figure hold number becomes "0". Even in (the target of the expectation suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect), the look-ahead effect effect and the icon change effect are not executed.

As described above, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 198 to 199, the number of the first special figure hold notified from the main control unit 110 m and the number of the first special figure hold stored by the effect control unit 130 m In the meantime, if an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality that is originally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction but a deviation of 2 or more in the decreasing direction) occurs, a look-ahead advance notice effect (a look-ahead zone effect) occurs. , Icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) is finished. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the look-ahead notice effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect that is not normally the execution target of the look-ahead notice effect, and the interest of the game is lowered. It becomes possible to suppress.

(Modification example 3 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A modification of the specific example 8 described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 194 (modification example 3 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 200. 200 (a) to (j) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 192.

Since FIGS. 194 and 200 are the same up to the timings T0 to T4, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by 130 m is from "1" to "1", that is, a process is performed to start the variation effect without changing the number of first special figure reservations.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency between the number of 1st special figure reservations notified from the unit 110m and the number of 1st special figure reservations stored in the effect control unit 130m due to a command abnormality (normally 1 in the decreasing direction) Since the same number of abnormalities occurred where there is a divergence, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the zone image display and the zone BGM output are completed, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue character icon in the first hold icon display area 70B returns to the CD icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second hold icon HI (CD icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation. (Displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 200 (e)).

Then, the required two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is used as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (FIG. 200 (FIG. 200) e) See).

After that, at the timing of T6, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 200 (FIG. 200). f) See).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right temporarily stops in the reach loss mode (“878”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon HI, and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TI continue (see FIG. 200 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 200 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 200 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 200 (j). )reference).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 200, a command is issued between the number of first special figure reservations notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of first special figure reservations stored in the effect control unit 130m. When inconsistency due to anomalies (anomalies that normally have the same number where there is a deviation of 1) occurs, the look-ahead advance notice effect (look-ahead zone effect, icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) should be terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the look-ahead notice effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect that is not normally the execution target of the look-ahead notice effect, and the interest of the game is lowered. It becomes possible to suppress.

(Modification example 4 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A modification of the specific example 9 described with reference to FIGS. 194 and 195 (a modification 4 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 and 201. 201 (a) to (f) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 194.

Since FIGS. 195 and 201 are the same up to the timings T0 to T6, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the number of the first special symbol reserved by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is stored. The variable display of the symbol is started. When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency between the number of 1st special figure reservations notified from the unit 110m and the number of 1st special figure reservations stored (understood) by the effect control unit 130m due to a command abnormality (normally in the decreasing direction) Since an abnormality) that is a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction has occurred, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the zone image display and the zone BGM output are completed, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue character icon in the first hold icon display area 70B returns to the CD icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth hold icon HI (CD icon) returns to the CD icon with one frame of non-animation. Is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 201 (e)).

Then, the required four hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparatory operation) (FIG. 201 (Fig. 201). e) See).

After that, at the timing of T8, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 201 (Fig. 201) f) See).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 201, a command is issued between the number of first special figure reservations notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of first special figure reservations stored in the effect control unit 130m. If an inconsistency due to an abnormality (an abnormality that is originally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction but a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction) occurs, a look-ahead advance notice effect (look-ahead zone effect, icon change) occurs. The production and look-ahead effect production) are finished. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the look-ahead notice effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect that is not normally the execution target of the look-ahead notice effect, and the interest of the game is lowered. It becomes possible to suppress.

(Modification example 5 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A modification of the specific example 10 described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197 (a modification 5 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 202. 202 (a) to (j) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 182.

Since the timings of T6 to T11 are the same in FIGS. 197 and 202, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". To. When the effect control unit 130m receives the start command (first special figure hold number specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The number of the first special figure pending that is stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variation effect.

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two hold icon HIs displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the scaling operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of the icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasps) it. The process for updating the number of reserved first special figures is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 202 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure hold number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first. 1 The number of reserved special figures changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of 1st special figure hold displayed in the sub 1st hold indicator 83 and the 1st special figure hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second hold icon HI in the hold icon display area 70B is displayed as one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI is additionally displayed as an animation for 10 frames (gradually increasing from the minimum size). (See FIG. 202 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 202 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 202 (d)).

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 202, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) in which the number of special figure reservations is one more than the predetermined number, it corresponds to the predetermined number in the hold icon display area. The hold icon is additionally displayed in the area to be used (for example, the second) and the area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the third). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 202, the number (for example, one) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending numbers is displayed while the number of reserved figures is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 202, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, four) in which the number of special figures held is more than a predetermined number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number of the hold icon display areas (for example, four) For example, the hold icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the fourth) from the second). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 202, the number (for example, one) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first special figure hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 4) in which the number of special figure reservations is more than a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds, the predetermined number is one less than the specific number. A specific number of holds is displayed without displaying the number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 202, the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130 m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as an icon change effect during display as the hold icon. Is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed because the command at the time of winning is not normally received, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, all three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (swaying operation), but the left and right effect symbols 70a are stopped and the central effect is produced. Only the symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped (swaying operation). At this time, all three effect symbols 70a may perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), or the left and right effect symbols 70a do not perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), and only the central effect symbol 70a fluctuates (effect operation). ) May be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the decorative portion fluctuate (effect operation) when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. However, the tactile image SG and the symbol effect image ZE Only one of the above may be made to perform a fluctuating operation (directing operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the identification unit composed of the hexagonal base image and the number part (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (effect operation) when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation), or a light emitting effect may be added to the identification portion to perform a fluctuation operation (effect operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, but the effect symbol 70a may be expanded or contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the effect symbol 70a is displaced in the direction of contraction (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expansion (more than the normal size). If it is large), it is better to make it a normal size and display it at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, but the effect symbol 70a does not swing and the decorative part and the number part protrude from the base image. It may be made to fluctuate like this. In this case, if a start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decoration part or the number part is displaced in the direction that protrudes from the base image, it will fit in the base image and be displayed at the stop position. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect symbol 70a is composed of only the number part (identification character) in the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state), the decoration portion fluctuates when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the operation (effect operation) is not performed, the effect symbol 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part composed of a symbol effect image, and the symbol effect image is displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The fluctuation operation (directing operation) may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a are not mentioned, but the frame lighting device during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode in which the brightness is lower than during fluctuation, light emission mode in which there is less change or movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the panel lighting device 76 has the same light emitting mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emitting mode in which the brightness is lower than during fluctuation, and light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation. (Aspect, extinguishing) may be used. In this case, when the start command is received next time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 change (switch) to the light emitting mode according to the fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbol 70a in the loss mode is finally stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), but the number is the same as that of the effect symbol 70a. The main stop may be made in such a lost manner. Further, when the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot mode is finally stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined jackpot mode (“333”), but the book is in the jackpot mode which is the same number as the effect symbol 70a. You may want to stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit outputs a start command (special symbol hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. When the 130m is received, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ is still continued, but even if the variable display is started after the derivation display is instantaneously performed as in the production symbol 70a. Good. In this case, for the special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position may be displayed at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a start command or a customer waiting state specification command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI is deleted without animation for one frame, but when stopped. It may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI based on the reception of a command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example, it is erased by animation for 5 frames. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a start command is received while displaying a number of hold icons larger than the number of special figure hold icons, the surplus hold icon HI is deleted by one frame of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI based on the reception of the stop command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example. It may be erased by the animation for 5 frames.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of special figure reservations and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormal number that is the same number, abnormality that has a deviation in the increasing direction) due to a command abnormality with the number of special figures held (understood), one more than the specified number After displaying a large number of hold icons, a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed, but the predetermined number of hold icons are displayed as they are without displaying one more hold icon than the predetermined number. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a predetermined number, the special figure reservation number and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (anomalies with the same number, anomalies with a deviation in the increasing direction) due to a command error with the number of special figures held (understood), this start command is received. Although the icon is displayed during the variation effect executed according to the above, the icon may not be displayed during the variation effect executed in response to the reception of the start command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a CD icon regardless of the type of the production mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be different depending on the type of the production mode and the game state. Good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of effect mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be different depending on the type of effect mode and game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the normal icon. May be good. Further, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the special icon. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the special icon is displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but the special icon or the specific icon (displayed in the process of changing to the special icon) suggesting the change to the special icon is specified. A specific icon suggesting that the reach effect of (for example, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon or the specific icon or the mode of the effect operation may be different from the form of the normal icon or the special icon or the mode of the effect operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the look-ahead specification command of the special figure hold number specification command as the winning command is normally received, but the special figure hold number specification command is received. If the look-ahead specification command is not received normally, the hold icon is displayed, while if the look-ahead specification command is received normally without receiving the special figure hold number specification command normally, the hold icon is displayed. It may not be done or vice versa. When only one of the special figure hold number designation command and the look-ahead designation command is received and the hold icon is displayed, the icon change effect for this hold icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by the operation of the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by the operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command. During the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a based on the command abnormality, the operation for changing the effect mode is not accepted, that is, the effect button 17 It is advisable to regulate the change of the effect mode based on the operation of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 is displayed. Depending on the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon for which is enabled is displayed, an operation change effect that changes the button icon to one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. .. In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protruding state in the effect position) at a predetermined ratio. You may do so. In this case, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue notice effect or decision effect. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation unit for performing the operation effect (speech notice effect, decision effect) is only the effect button 17, but an operation unit such as an effect lever is provided separately from the effect button 17, for example. An operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever is executed during the valid period generated during the SP reach effect, and an operation effect (decision effect, etc.) is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever. You may. In this case, the determined effect in the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the specific game state (short-time game state, probabilistic game state) is better than the case where the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the normal game state is executed. The operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed (difficult to be executed) at a low rate.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution period of the reach effect, the operation notice effect suggesting the expectation that the jackpot game is executed in response to the operation of the effective effect button 17 is not executed. The operation notice effect may be executed in the first half period (for example, during normal reach) and the second half period (for example, during SP reach effect) of the reach effect. In this case, the effect button 17 moves to the second operation mode (vibration, movement to the effect position) in the operation advance notice effect executed in the latter half period of the reach effect than in the operation advance notice effect executed in the first half period of the reach effect. ) Should be high.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expectation of the notice in the jackpot notice effect and the operation of the movable member are not linked, but the expectation of the notice in the jackpot notice effect and the operation of the movable member may be linked. In this case, during the execution of the variable effect, the movable member operates more when the advance notice effect of the content having a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the advance notice effect of the content having a low jackpot expectation is executed. It is recommended that the ratio be high (easy to operate).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when various accessories such as the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the effect button 17 execute the effect operation according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member). When the member 73 or the like is operating at an advanced position near the center of the first image display device 70, the effect button 17 is emitting light in a predetermined mode, or the like), the effect control board 130 is the main control board 110. When a predetermined signal (for example, a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from, the effect operation may be interrupted and the initial operation may be executed. Further, the various accessories may be controlled so as not to execute the effect operation interrupted at this time from the middle (the operation following the effect operation at the time of interruption) after the execution of the initial operation. Further, when various accessories perform initial operations, the first image display device 70 or the like is controlled to display an initialized image (an image in a mode suggesting that the power is turned on, etc.), or is used for a board. The lighting device 76 or the like may be controlled to execute initialization light emission (light emission in a mode suggesting that the power has been turned on).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the voice output device 9 outputs a production sound according to the progress of the game (for example, when a predetermined production sound or the like at the time of a big hit is output). When the effect control board 130 receives a predetermined signal (for example, a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control board 110, a predetermined notification sound (for example, a predetermined notification sound suggesting that the power has been turned on) Etc.) may be controlled to output. Further, when the voice output device 9 outputs a predetermined notification sound, the first image display device 70 or the like is controlled to display an initialized image (an image or the like suggesting that the power is turned on). , The panel lighting device 76 or the like may be controlled to execute initialization light emission (light emission in a mode suggesting that the power has been turned on, etc.).

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1>
In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting condition is satisfied, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, a special game is executed. Some of such game machines display a reserved image corresponding to the undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal reserved image into a reserved image in a display mode suggesting that the variation effect may have a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the above-mentioned game machine in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆ The gaming machine having the first configuration for solving the above problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, and the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. 17), the effect control means can control the display of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variable display of the symbol, and the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows. A recognizable display mode in which it is possible to recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variable end suggestion effect, FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation). The stop effect can be executed by one hour and the second time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. There are a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C), a second display mode (reach loss of fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C), and a third display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C). The execution time of the first time is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the effect control means is the first effect of the predetermined mode in the first time, which is the second display mode. (Fluctuation end suggestion effect, vibration of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and second effect (fluctuation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) in a mode different from the first effect. ), And the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) by the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) can be executed, and the third display mode can be executed. In the case of, the effect operation by the movable effect means can be executed, and during the effect according to the signal according to the third display mode, and during the execution of the effect operation by the movable effect means. It is a gist that the initial operation can be executed when the effect control means receives a power command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.). With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the game is stopped and displayed with a specified specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, and the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. 17), the first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) for displaying the hold storage stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode, and the hold. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) for displaying the memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode is provided. The effect control means can control the display of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variable display of the symbol, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the effect symbol can be recognized. The first time in which the recognizable display mode (temporary stop before the end of the fluctuation, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the fluctuation) can be executed, and a plurality of columns In all cases, the stop effect can be executed by the second time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed can be executed, and during the variable display of the symbol, 2 out of a plurality of columns It is possible to execute a common display effect (first display mode) displayed by the effect symbol common to the two columns, and the common display effect includes the first variation effect (normal reach loss of variation patterns 2A to 2C) and the above. There is a second variation effect (SP reach loss of variation patterns 3A to 3C) different from the first variation effect, and the first variation effect and the second variation effect are executed. The execution time of one hour is different, and the effect control means has a first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, effect of FIG. 51-1) in the first time when the second variation effect is executed. (Vibration of the symbol 70a, etc.) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect can be executed, and the movable effect can be executed. Initial operation by means (initial operation, initial light emission) , The effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) can be executed, and the customer waiting effect can be executed in the standby state in which the game is not progressing, and the customer waiting effect can be executed during the execution of the customer waiting effect. When the effect control means receives a power command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed, and when the hold memory increases during the execution of the second variation effect, The first hold display means performs an increase display from the first storage number to the second storage number (update to the hold number added by 1), but the second hold display means is from the first storage number. The gist is that the increase display to the second storage number is not performed until the predetermined condition in the first time is satisfied (the second variable effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged). And. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the third configuration for solving the above problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, and the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. 17), the first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) for displaying the hold storage stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode, and the hold. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) for displaying the memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode is provided. The effect control means can control the display of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variation display of the symbol, and the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows by starting the variation of the symbol. In addition, the start effect is set as the first time in which the recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of change) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner can be executed. Recognizable display that is feasible, is a period different from the first time, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of columns, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. A second time in which the mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and a stop display mode in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of rows ( The stop effect can be executed by the third time in which the second display mode) can be executed, and there are cases where the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed and cases where the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. The execution time of the second time is different from that of the case where the second time is not performed, and in the second time when the predetermined effect is executed, the first effect of the predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, effect symbol of FIG. 51-1) is used. (Vibration of 70a, etc.) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect can be executed, and the movable effect means. Initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) and production operation (production operation, performance) It is possible to execute the effect operation by the movable effect means during the variable display of the symbol, and the movable effect means during the variable display of the symbol. When the command received by the effect control means is a power command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) during the execution of the effect operation according to the above, the initial operation can be executed, and the initial operation can be executed by the start of fluctuation of the symbol. The first hold display means starts a decrease display (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) from the first stored number to the second stored number, and the second hold display means changes from the first stored number to the second stored number. A mode different from the first effect and the second effect in the first time before the reduction display to the number of stored items (the hold icon in the hold icon display area moves to the center of the adjacent display unit) is completed. The gist is that the third effect (enlargement / reduction of the effect symbols 70a in FIGS. 44 (b) to (d)) can be performed. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, and the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. 17), the first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) for displaying the hold storage stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode, and the hold. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) for displaying the memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode is provided. The effect control means performs the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) in a plurality of rows on the display means during the variation display of the symbol, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the effect control means said. It is possible to control the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows by the start of fluctuation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed as the first time in which the recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) that can be recognized is the first time that can be executed. Is a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of columns and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-). 1. The second time in which the temporary stop before the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 51-2 can be executed, and the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. The stop effect can be executed for 3 hours, and there are cases where the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed and cases where the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. In the second time, in which the execution time is lengthened, the stop display is likely to be displayed in the specific effect symbol in the stop display mode, and the last recognizable display mode in the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined mode is used. 1st production (variation end suggestion production, figure 51-1 effect symbol 70a vibration, etc.) and a second effect different from the first effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-2, etc.) can be executed. Yes, it is possible to execute the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) by the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission), and the special game effect (big hit) during the execution of the special game. It is possible to execute an effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect), and a command received by the effect control means during the execution of the special game effect is a power command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.). ), The initial operation can be executed, and the first reserved display means is reduced from the first stored number to the second stored number by the start of fluctuation of the symbol (update to the reserved number subtracted by 1). In the first time before the change display (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) to the execution information of the second hold display means for which the variation effect is started is completed. Is capable of executing a third effect (enlargement / reduction of the effect symbols 70a in FIGS. 44 (b) to (d)) different from the first effect and the second effect. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, the sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting the effect sound of the game, and the starting conditions. The first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the above is the first mode, and the hold memory is the first mode. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) that is displayed by a different second aspect is provided, and the effect control means is a variation of the symbol. During display, it is possible to control the display of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows by starting the variation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed with the recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) recognizable as the first time that can be executed, and the first time and the above-mentioned first time. Is a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of columns and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-). 1. The second time in which the temporary stop before the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 51-2 can be executed, and the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. The stop effect can be executed for 3 hours, and the stop display modes include a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second display mode (reach loss of fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C). There is a third display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C), and the effect control means said that when the stop display mode is the second display mode, the stop display mode is compared with the case of the first display mode. In the second time, which is the second display mode, the execution time of the second time is lengthened, and a predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) that improves the degree of expectation before the execution of the recognizable display mode is easily executed. Is the first effect of a predetermined mode (indication of end of fluctuation) Incitement effect, vibration of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1), second effect different from the first effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.). Is possible, and in the case of the third display mode, a predetermined effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) by the sound output means can be output, and a predetermined notification sound (power on) is output from the sound output means. It is possible to output a notification sound (notification sound, power restoration notification sound), and during the production according to the signal according to the third display mode, the sound output means outputs the predetermined production sound. When the command received by the effect control means is a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.), the predetermined notification sound can be output, and the hold memory is reduced by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol. As a result, when the first time is started, the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means is reduced from the first memory number to the second memory number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area is adjacent to the display unit. The hold memory displayed by the first hold display means is reduced from the first memory number to the second memory number (1 subtracted hold) from the timing when the (moving to the center of) is completed. The gist is that the timing to complete the update to the numbers) is earlier. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, the sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting the effect sound of the game, and the starting conditions. The first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the above is the first mode, and the hold memory is the first mode. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) that is displayed by a different second aspect is provided, and the effect control means is a variation of the symbol. During the display, it is possible to control the display of the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows by the start of the variation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is displayed. The start effect can be executed as the first time in which the recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) in which it is possible to recognize that the fluctuation is being displayed can be executed. A recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner for a period different from one hour (variation end suggestion effect, The second time in which (Temporary stop before the end of fluctuation) of FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2 can be executed, and the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows are executed. The stop effect can be executed by the possible third time, and the stop display mode is the first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and the second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C). ), And when the stop display mode is the second display mode, the effect control means prolongs the execution time of the second time as compared with the case of the first display mode, and the above-mentioned A predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) for improving the degree of expectation is easily executed before the execution of the recognizable display mode, and in the second time, which is the second display mode, the first effect (variation end) of the predetermined mode is performed. Suggestion effect, vibration of effect symbol 70a in Fig. 51-1, etc.) , A second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect can be executed, and a predetermined notification sound (a predetermined notification sound (from the sound output means). It is possible to output a power-on notification sound and a power recovery notification sound), and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state in which the game is not in progress. When the command received by the control means is a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.), the predetermined notification sound can be output, and the hold memory is reduced by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol. When the first time is started in, the second hold display means completes the change display (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) to the execution information. The gist is that the timing at which the hold memory displayed by the first hold display means completes the reduction display (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) from the first memory number to the second memory number is earlier. And. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the seventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, the sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting the effect sound of the game, and the starting conditions. The first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the above is the first mode, and the hold memory is the first mode. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) that is displayed by a different second aspect is provided, and the effect control means is a variation of the symbol. During display, it is possible to control the display of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows by starting the variation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed as the first time in which the recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) that can be recognized is the first time that can be executed. Is a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of columns and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-). 1. The second time in which the temporary stop before the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 51-2 can be executed, and the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. The stop effect can be executed for 3 hours, and the stop display modes include a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second display mode (reach loss of fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C). There is a third display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C), and the effect control means said that when the stop display mode is the second display mode, the stop display mode is compared with the case of the first display mode. During the execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, the first effect of the predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and an aspect different from the first effect. Second production (variation end suggestion production, production design in Fig. 51-2) The sparkle of 70a, etc.) is easily executed, and a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound) can be output from the sound output means, and the stop display mode is the third. It is possible to execute a variation effect for notifying whether or not the display mode is to be displayed, and a command received by the effect control means during the execution of the variation effect is a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation). In the case of a command or the like), the predetermined notification sound can be output, and the first time is started by reducing the hold memory by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol, and then the second hold display means is displayed. When the hold memory is increased during the decrease display from the first memory number to the second memory number, the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means is changed from the first memory number to the second memory. The hold memory displayed by the first hold display means even before the timing when the reduction display to the number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area moves to the center of the adjacent display unit) is completed. Is to start the increase display (update to the reserved number added by 1) from the second memory number to the first memory number. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the eighth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, the sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting the effect sound of the game, and the starting conditions. The first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the above is the first mode, and the hold memory is the first mode. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) that is displayed by a different second aspect is provided, and the effect control means is a variation of the symbol. During the display, it is possible to control the display of the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows by the start of the variation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is displayed. The start effect can be executed as the first time in which the recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) in which it is possible to recognize that the fluctuation is being displayed can be executed. A recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner for a period different from one hour (variation end suggestion effect, The second time in which (Temporary stop before the end of fluctuation) of FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2 can be executed, and the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows are executed. The stop effect can be executed by the possible third time, and the stop display mode is the first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and the second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C). ), And the effect control means is executing the recognizable display mode in the second time when the stop display mode is the second display mode, as compared with the case of the first display mode. In addition, the first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and the second effect of a mode different from the first effect (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-). 2), such as the glitter of the effect symbol 70a), is easy to execute, and the sound output It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound from the means, and after the stop display mode is changed to the second display mode, the special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round) is performed during the execution of the special game. (Effect, ending effect) can be executed, and when the command received by the effect control means during the execution of the special game effect is a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.), the above-mentioned A predetermined notification sound can be output, and the first time is started by reducing the hold storage by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol, and then the second hold display means displays a change to the execution information (hold icon). When the hold memory increases during the movement from the display area to the center of the icon display area), the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means is reduced from the first memory number to the second memory number (hold). Even before the timing when the hold icon in the icon display area is moved to the center of the adjacent display unit), the hold memory displayed by the first hold display means is the second storage number. The gist is to start the increase display (update to the reserved number added by 1) from the first stored number. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the ninth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). The display means includes an icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D), and the effect control means can display and control the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variable display of the symbol. It is possible to control the display means to display the game standby screen (still display screen of the effect symbol) in the standby state in which is not progressing, and the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows by starting the fluctuation of the symbol. In addition, a recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is started as a feasible first time. Recognition that the effect can be executed, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner for a period different from the first time. The second time in which the possible display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and the stop display in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of columns The stop effect can be executed by the third time in which the mode (second display mode) can be executed, and the stop display mode includes the first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and the second display. There are modes (big hits of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C), and when the stop display mode is the first display mode, the effect control means has the second time as compared with the case of the second display mode. During the execution of the recognizable display mode in the above, the first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-1, etc.) and the second effect of an aspect different from the first effect (Fluctuation end suggestion effect, effect symbol 7 in FIG. 51-2 0a glitter, etc.) is difficult to execute, and when the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the game standby screen is being displayed, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. When the first time is started by decreasing the hold memory by one due to the change of the symbol, and then the hold memory is increased during the execution of the change of the symbol, the hold displayed by the second hold display means is displayed. The first hold display means is more than the timing at which the memory increases from the first memory number to the second memory number (enlargement of the hold icon additionally displayed in the hold icon display area to the normal size). It is a gist that the timing at which the hold memory to be displayed completes the increase display (update to the hold number added by 1) from the first memory number to the second memory number is earlier. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the tenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. When the stop display is performed with the specified specific symbol, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and the first state (normal game state, low probability game state) and the first state that is more advantageous to the player than the first state. In a gaming machine that can be controlled into two states (specific gaming state, high-accuracy gaming state), detection means (starting port detection switches 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event, etc. ), The control means (main control board 110, effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control based on the input signal from the detection means, and the hold storage stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first display mode. The first hold display means to be displayed (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means for displaying the hold memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode. (The first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the second hold icon display area 70D) and the first start condition are satisfied when the start condition is satisfied (the game ball is inserted into the first start port 45). The hold memory based on the ball) can be stored as the first hold memory, and the hold memory based on the establishment of the second start condition (entry of the game ball into the second start port 47) can be stored as the second hold memory. The control means can display and control the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variable display of the symbol, and can recognize the effect symbol in all of the plurality of rows. In addition, the first time for executing the recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in the variation. The stop effect can be executed by the second time for executing the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns, and the first state and the second state can be executed. When the control means and the detection means are not connected to each other when the power supply to the game machine is started, the control means can be controlled so that the effect mode is different during the first time. Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and when the first hold storage increases in the second state, the first hold display means starts from the first storage number. Increased display to the second memory number (to the reserved number added by 1) (Update) is performed, but the second hold display means satisfies a predetermined condition (additional display in the hold icon display area regarding the first hold storage) from the first storage number to the second storage number (update). The gist is that it is possible not to perform until the final variation effect in the second state, which is the specific gaming state, is completed and the first state, which is the normal gaming state, is restored. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The game machine having the eleventh configuration for solving the above problem displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. Detection means (starting port detection switches 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave) for detecting a predetermined event in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a specified specific symbol. The detection sensor 54a and the like) and control means (main control board 110, effect control board 130) that perform predetermined control based on the input signal from the detection means are provided, and the control means is displaying fluctuations of the symbol. In addition, it is possible to control the display of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means, recognize that the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of columns, and recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The first time in which the possible display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and the stop display in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns. The stop effect can be executed by the second time in which the mode (second display mode) can be executed, and the stop display mode includes the first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and the second display. There are modes (reach loss of fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C), and the execution time of the first time is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the control means is different from the second display mode. In the first time, the first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and the second effect of a mode different from the first effect (variation end). The suggestion effect, the glitter of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-2, etc.) can be executed, and the control means and the detection means are disconnected when the power supply to the game machine is started. In some cases, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the control means and the detection means are connected to each other during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification. The gist is to continue the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification for a predetermined period. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the twelfth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. Detection means (starting port detection switches 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave) for detecting a predetermined event in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a specified specific symbol. The detection sensor 54a and the like), the control means (main control board 110, effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control based on the input signal from the detection means, and the hold storage that is stored based on the establishment of the start condition. The first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) to be displayed according to the first display mode, and the second display mode different from the first display mode for displaying the hold storage. 2 Hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, said icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D), and the control means provides an effect symbol on the display means during variable display of the symbol. The display control of (effect symbol 70a) is possible, the effect symbol is recognizable in all of a plurality of columns, and the recognizable display mode (indication of variation end) is recognizable that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. A stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the first time and the plurality of rows in which the effect (FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of fluctuation) can be executed. The stop effect can be executed by the second time in which the above can be executed, and the common display effect (first display) displayed by the effect symbol common to two of the plurality of columns during the variable display of the symbol. The mode) can be executed, and the common display effect includes a first variation effect (normal reach loss of variation patterns 2A to 2C) and a second variation effect (SP of variation patterns 3A to 3C) different from the first variation effect. There is a reach loss), and the execution time of the first time is different between the case of executing the first variation effect and the case of executing the second variation effect, and the control means performs the second variation effect. In the first time when the execution is performed, the first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-1, etc.) and the second effect of an aspect different from the first effect are performed. (Fluctuation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) can be executed, and the control means and the detection means are disconnected while power is being supplied to the game machine. If so, the prescribed When the abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed and the hold storage increases during the execution of the second fluctuation effect, the first hold display means is the first storage number. Displays an increase from the first stored number to the second stored number (updates to the reserved number added by 1), and the second reserved display means displays the increased display from the first stored number to the second stored number. The gist is that the process is not performed until the predetermined condition for one hour is satisfied (the second variable effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed). With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the thirteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. Detection means (starting port detection switches 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave) for detecting a predetermined event in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a specified specific symbol. The detection sensor 54a and the like), the control means (main control board 110, effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control based on the input signal from the detection means, and the hold storage that is stored based on the establishment of the start condition. The first hold display means (first hold number display area 70E, second hold number display area 70F) to be displayed according to the first display mode, and the second display mode different from the first display mode for displaying the hold memory. 2 Hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, said icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D), and the control means provides an effect symbol on the display means during variable display of the symbol. The display of (effect symbol 70a) can be controlled, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows by starting the fluctuation of the symbol, and it can be recognized that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed with the display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) as the executable first time, and the period is different from the first time, and there are a plurality of columns. The recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, variation end) in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the above and the effect symbol can be recognized as being displayed in a variable manner. The stop effect is executed by the second time in which the previous temporary stop) can be executed and the third time in which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. It is possible, and there are cases where the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed and cases where the predetermined effect is not executed. The execution time of the second time differs depending on whether the effect is executed or not, and the predetermined effect is performed. In the second time when the execution is performed, the first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-1, etc.) and the second effect of an aspect different from the first effect are performed. (Fluctuation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) can be executed, and the control means and the detection means are disconnected while power is being supplied to the game machine. In that case, the specified abnormality notification (disconnection notification, (Magnetic anomaly notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and when the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined abnormality notification is executed for a predetermined period. The first hold display means starts the reduction display (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) from the first memory number to the second memory number by the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, and the second hold display means. In the first time before the display means completes the reduction display from the first storage number to the second storage number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area moves to the center of the adjacent display unit), the said It is a gist that the first effect and the third effect (enlargement / reduction of the effect symbols 70a in FIGS. 44 (b) to (d)) different from the second effect can be executed. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the fourteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from, and the first hold display means for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode. (1st hold number display area 70E, 2 hold number display area 70F) and the hold memory are displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and the second hold memory is increased in accordance with the increase in the hold memory. A second hold display means (a second hold display means capable of increasing the display of the display mode (hold icon) and shifting and displaying each of the displays of the second display mode according to the decrease of the hold memory. The first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, and the second hold icon display area 70D) are provided, and the effect control means displays the effect symbols (in a plurality of columns) on the display means during the variable display of the symbol. When the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a) is executed and the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the effect symbol can be controlled to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol. A recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of columns and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable display) due to the start of the variation of The start effect can be executed as the first time in which the temporary stop at the start) can be executed, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the effect symbol can be recognized in a period different from the first time. A second time in which a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of fluctuation) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in variation can be executed, and The stop effect can be executed by the third time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns can be executed, and the stop effect can be recognized during one change of the symbol. There are cases where a predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) in which the display mode is executed a plurality of times is executed and cases where the display mode is not executed. When the display mode is executed, the execution time of the second time is lengthened as compared with the case where the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed. At the same time, the specific performance in the stop display mode In the second time, when the last recognizable display mode in the predetermined effect is executed, the first effect of the predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1) is easily stopped and displayed. (Vibration of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect can be executed, and the variation When the effect symbol is recognizable in the effect, it is possible to cause the display of the second display mode of the second hold display means to perform an effect operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.), and when the symbol starts to fluctuate, the display is described. The first hold display means starts the reduction display (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) from the first memory number to the second memory number, and goes to the execution information of the second hold display means from which the variation effect is started. In the first time before the change display (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed, a third effect (FIG.) different from the first effect and the second effect. 44 (b) to (d) can be performed (enlargement / reduction of the effect symbols 70a), and the effect operation is performed by the second hold display means, and a predetermined number of the effect symbols can be recognized. While displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold display means, which is two more than (for example, one), a signal for starting fluctuation of the symbol (hold number designation command) in which the hold memory becomes the predetermined number. , Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), the variation effect is started, and the second hold display means is the identification of the specific number of the second hold display means. The display of the second display mode corresponding to the predetermined number (at least the icon display) without shifting the display of the second display mode corresponding to the number (the third hold icon from the icon display area side). The gist is that it is possible to shift display (the first hold icon) from the area side. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the fifteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from the above, and the first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). An icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D) are provided, and the effect control means can display and control a variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variation display of the symbol. Yes, there is a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows by the start of variation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (FIGS. 44 (b) to (b) The start effect can be executed as the first time in which d) and the temporary stop at the start of the fluctuation) can be executed, and the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows in a period different from the first time. A recognizable display mode in which it is possible to recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variable end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation). The stop effect can be executed by 2 hours and the 3rd time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. The first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) that is stopped and displayed with the different effect symbols in each of the plurality of columns, and the second display that is stopped and displayed with the effect symbol that two of the plurality of columns are common to. There are display modes (reach loss of fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C), and the effect control means has the second display mode as compared with the case of the first display mode when the stop display mode is the second display mode. In the second time, which is the second display mode, it is easy to execute a predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) for increasing the execution time of the time and improving the expectation level before executing the recognizable display mode. First performance of a predetermined aspect Output (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and second effect (fluctuation end suggestion effect, effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2) different from the first effect. Etc.), and when the effect symbol is recognizable in the variation effect, the background image of the effect symbol can be produced (scrolling, changing, etc.), and a predetermined frame. When the display image can be updated every time the update timing is reached and the first time is started by reducing the hold storage by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol, the second hold display means displays the display. The first is more than the frame update timing at which the hold memory is reduced from the first memory number to the second memory number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area moves to the center of the adjacent display unit). The timing at which the hold storage displayed by the hold display means completes the reduction display (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) from the first storage number to the second storage number is earlier, and the effect control The means is the second hold of a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) when the background image is performing the effect operation and the effect symbol is recognizable. When a signal for starting fluctuation of the symbol (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received while the display means is displaying, the fluctuation effect is performed. It is a gist that the second reserved display means can display with a number (for example, two) one less than the specific number and then display with the predetermined number. .. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the sixteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from the above, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). The effect control means includes an icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D), and the effect control means executes a variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) in a plurality of rows on the display means during the variation display of the symbol. In addition, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, it is possible to control the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, and when the symbol starts to fluctuate, all of the plurality of rows are displayed. It is possible to execute a recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) in which the effect symbol is recognizable and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed as the first time, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows in a period different from the first time, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In the second time in which the recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and in all of the plurality of rows, the effect symbol The stop effect can be executed by the third time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) of the stop display can be executed, and the stop display mode is the stop display with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of columns. There are a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When the stop display mode is the second display mode, the execution time of the second time is longer than that of the first display mode, and the degree of expectation is set before the execution of the recognizable display mode. Predetermined production to improve ( In the second time, which is the second display mode, the first effect of the predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and It is possible to execute a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect, and the effect symbol can be recognized in the variation effect. At a certain time, it is possible to produce a predetermined element (tactile image of a character, a symbol effect image) constituting the effect symbol, and the display image can be updated every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. When the first time is started by reducing the hold storage by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol, the second hold display means displays a change to the execution information (from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area). The hold memory displayed by the first hold display means is reduced from the first memory number to the second memory number (to the hold number subtracted by 1) from the frame update timing at which the movement to is completed. The timing at which the update) is completed is earlier, and the effect control means is used when the predetermined element is performing the effect operation and the effect symbol is recognizable, and is more than a predetermined number (for example, one). During the display of the second hold display means having a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than the other, the signal of the start of fluctuation of the symbol in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, When the special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first hold display means does not display in a number (for example, two) one less than the specific number. On the other hand, the second hold display means can display a number (for example, two) one less than the specific number and then display the predetermined number. The gist is that. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 17th configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). An icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D) are provided, and the effect control means can display and control the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variation display of the symbol. Yes, there is a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows by the start of variation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (FIGS. 44 (b) to (b) to (Fig. 44). The start effect can be executed as the first time in which d) and the temporary stop at the start of the fluctuation) can be executed, and the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows in a period different from the first time. A recognizable display mode in which it is possible to recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variable end suggestion effect, FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation). The stop effect can be executed by 2 hours and the 3rd time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. There are a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second display mode (reach loss of fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C), and the effect control means has the stop display mode as the second display mode. In the case of, as compared with the case of the first display mode, during the execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, the first effect of the predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, effect symbol of FIG. 51-1). (Vibration of 70a, etc.) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect can be easily executed. When the effect symbol is recognizable, the second hold table The display of the second aspect of the display means can be produced (fluctuation, rotation, etc.), the display image can be updated every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and the display is held due to the fluctuation of the symbol. The first time is started by reducing one memory, and then the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means is reduced from the first memory number to the second memory number, and the hold memory is increased during the display. In this case, the hold storage displayed by the second hold display means is reduced from the first storage number to the second storage number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area moves to the center of the adjacent display unit). Even before the frame update timing to be completed, the hold storage displayed by the first hold display means is increased from the second storage number to the first storage number (1 added hold number). When the effect control means is performing the effect operation by the second hold display means and the effect symbols are recognizable, the effect control means is 3 than a predetermined number (for example, 1). While displaying a large number of specific numbers (for example, four) of the second hold display means, a signal for starting fluctuation of the symbol (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure) in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the second hold display means does not display in a number (for example, three) one less than the specific number. The gist is that it is possible to display numbers. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◇ The gaming machine having the eighteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). The effect control means includes an icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D), and the effect control means executes a variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) in a plurality of rows on the display means during the variation display of the symbol. In addition, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, it is possible to control the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, and when the symbol starts to fluctuate, all of the plurality of rows are displayed. It is possible to execute a recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) in which the effect symbol is recognizable and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed as the first time, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows in a period different from the first time, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In the second time in which the recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and in all of the plurality of rows, the effect symbol is displayed. The stop effect can be executed by the third time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) of the stop display can be executed, and the stop display mode is the stop display with the effect symbol different from the specific effect symbol. There are a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When the stop display mode is the second display mode, the first effect (variation) of the predetermined mode is performed during the execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, as compared with the case of the first display mode. End suggestion production, production diagram of Fig. 51-1 (Vibration of the pattern 70a, etc.) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect are easily executed, and in the variation effect, When the effect symbol is recognizable, the background image of the effect symbol can be produced (scrolled, changed, etc.), and the display image can be updated every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. The first time is started by reducing the hold memory by one due to the change of the symbol, and then the second hold display means displays the change to the execution information (from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area). When the hold storage increases during (movement to), the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means is reduced from the first storage number to the second storage number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area is next to it). Even before the frame update timing at which (moving to the center of the display unit) is completed, the hold storage displayed by the first hold display means changes from the second storage number to the first storage number. The increase display (update to the reserved number added by 1) is started, and the effect control means is a predetermined number (for example, 1) when the background image is performing the effect operation and the effect symbol can be recognized. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the second hold display means, which is three more than one), a signal for starting fluctuation of the symbol (hold number designation command, special symbol) in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the designated command (designated command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the second hold display means displays with a number (for example, three) one less than the specific number. The gist is that it is possible to display with a number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number, and then display with the predetermined number. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the nineteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). The effect control means includes an icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D), and the effect control means executes a variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) in a plurality of rows on the display means during the variation display of the symbol. In addition, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, it is possible to control the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, and when the symbol starts to fluctuate, all of the plurality of rows are displayed. It is possible to execute a recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) in which the effect symbol is recognizable and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed as the first time, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows in a period different from the first time, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In the second time in which the recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and in all of the plurality of rows, the effect symbol is displayed. The stop effect can be executed by the third time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) of the stop display can be executed, and the stop display mode is the stop display with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of columns. There are a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When the stop display mode is the first display mode, the first effect (variation) of the predetermined mode is performed during the execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, as compared with the case of the second display mode. End suggestion production, Fig. 51-1 (Vibration of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-2, etc.) and the second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-2, etc.) having a mode different from that of the first effect are difficult to execute, and the variation When the effect symbol is recognizable in the effect, it is possible to produce a predetermined element (tactile image of the character, a symbol effect image) constituting the effect symbol, and each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. When the display image can be updated and the first time is started by reducing the hold memory by one due to the change of the symbol, and then the hold memory increases during the execution of the change of the symbol, the said. A frame in which the hold storage displayed by the second hold display means completes the increase display (enlargement of the hold icon additionally displayed in the hold icon display area to the normal size) from the first storage number to the second storage number. The timing at which the hold storage displayed by the first hold display means completes the increase display (update to the hold number added by 1) from the first storage number to the second storage number rather than the update timing. Is faster, and the effect control means is a specific number (for example, 4) that is three more than the predetermined number (for example, one) when the predetermined element is performing the effect operation and the effect symbol is recognizable. During the display of the second hold display means, the signal of the start of fluctuation of the symbol (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number is received. If so, the variation effect is started, and the first hold display means displays the predetermined number without displaying the number two less than the specific number (for example, two). The second hold display means displays with a number two less than the specific number (for example, two) without displaying with a number one less than the specific number (for example, three). After that, the gist is that it is possible to display the predetermined number. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the twentieth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. When the stop display is performed with the specified specific symbol, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and the first state (normal game state, low probability game state) and the first state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the first state. In a gaming machine that can be controlled into two states (specific gaming state, high-accuracy gaming state), the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the signal from the main control means An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the corresponding effect, and a first hold display means (first hold) for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode. The number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon) for displaying the hold memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the establishment of the display area 70C, the second hold icon display area 70D) and the start condition, the hold memory based on the establishment of the first start condition (entry of the game ball into the first start port 45) is first reserved. The effect control means is provided with a storage means that can be stored as a memory and can store the reserved memory as a second reserved memory based on the establishment of the second starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second starting port 47). Can control the display of the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variation display of the symbol, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the effect symbol is In the first time when the recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the fluctuation) that can recognize that the fluctuation is being displayed is executed, and in all of the plurality of columns. The stop effect can be executed by the second time for executing the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first time in the first state and the second state. When the effect pattern can be controlled to be different in the effect mode and the effect symbol can be recognized in the variable effect, a predetermined element (character's tactile image, symbol effect image) constituting the effect symbol is produced. This is possible, and when the predetermined element is in the effect operation and the recognizable effect symbol is deviated from the predetermined position in the variation effect, the signal for starting the variation of the symbol (holding number designation command, special symbol) Designated command, special figure fluctuation putter When the command) is received, it is possible to display the effect symbol at the predetermined position and then display the variation with the start of the variation effect, and the first hold memory is increased in the second state. If so, the first hold display means performs an increase display from the first stored number to the second stored number (update to the hold number added by 1), but the second hold display means is the first. A predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display from the number of memories to the second number of memories (additional display in the hold icon display area related to the first hold memory) (the final variation effect in the second state, which is the specific game state, is completed, normal The gist is that it is possible not to perform until the player returns to the first state, which is the gaming state. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 21st configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the game is stopped and displayed with a specified specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first reserved number display area 70E, the second reserved number display area 70F) and the reserved memory are displayed in a second aspect different from the first aspect, and the display of the second aspect is displayed according to the increase in the reserved memory. A second hold display means (second hold display means) capable of displaying each of the displays of the second aspect in a shift display in accordance with the decrease of the hold memory, displaying the decrease, and displaying one as execution information. 1 Hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, and a second hold icon display area 70D), and the effect control means provides an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to the display means during the variable display of the symbol. Is display controllable, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of columns, and a recognizable display mode in which it can be recognized that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-). 1. The first time in which (1), FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of fluctuation) can be executed, and the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of rows can be executed. The stop effect can be executed for 2 hours, and the stop display mode is the first display mode (non-reach loss of variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the stop display is stopped and displayed with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of rows. There is a second display mode (reach loss of the fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C) in which two of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the effect symbol common to the first display mode and the second display mode. In the first time, in which the execution time of the first time is different and the effect control means is in the second state, the first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-1) (Vibration, etc.) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect can be executed, and a predetermined number (for example, one) can be executed. ) Before a specific number (for example, 3) that is 2 more When the signal of the start of fluctuation of the symbol (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number is received during the display of the second hold display means. Is erased from the execution information and starts a variation effect, and the second hold display means displays the second aspect corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the second hold display means. Shift of the display of the second mode (1st and 2nd hold icons from the icon display area side) corresponding to the predetermined number without performing the shift display of (the third hold icon from the icon display area side). The gist is that it is possible to display and display one of the shift displays as the execution information. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 22nd configuration for solving the above problems displays the symbols (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the game is stopped and displayed with a specified specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from the user, and a first hold display means for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode. (1st hold number display area 70E, 2 hold number display area 70F) and the hold memory are displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and the variable display of the symbol is started. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) capable of displaying the display of the second display mode as execution information is provided. The effect control means can display and control the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variation display of the symbol, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the effect symbol can be recognized. A first time and a plurality of recognizable display modes (variable end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of fluctuation) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The stop effect can be executed by the second time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the columns can be executed, and during the variable display of the symbol, a plurality of columns can be executed. It is possible to execute the common display effect (first display mode) displayed by the effect symbol common to the two columns, and the common display effect is the first variation effect (normal reach loss of variation patterns 2A to 2C). , There is a second variation effect (SP reach loss of variation patterns 3A to 3C) in which the expectation of the special game is higher than that of the first variation effect, and there are a case where the first variation effect is executed and a case where the second variation effect is performed. The execution time of the first time is different from that of the case of execution, and the effect control means has a first effect of a predetermined mode (suggestion of end of variation) in the first time when the second variation effect is executed. The effect, the vibration of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-1, etc.) and the second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-2, etc.) having a mode different from that of the first effect. It is feasible and of the second variation effect When the hold memory increases during execution, the first hold display means performs an increase display from the first memory number to the second memory number (update to the hold number added by 1), but the second The hold display means satisfies a predetermined condition in the first time for displaying the increase from the first storage number to the second storage number (the second variation effect is completed, the reduced display of the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect). It is possible not to perform until the symbol is enlarged), and the effect control means is displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold display means, which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When a signal for starting fluctuation of the symbol (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted and the execution information is deleted. The variation effect is started, and the second hold display means displays a number (for example, two) one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number of the second display modes and the execution information. The gist is that it is possible to display. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 23rd configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the game is stopped and displayed with a specified specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from the user, and a first hold display means for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode. (1st hold number display area 70E, 2 hold number display area 70F) and the hold memory are displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and the variable display of the symbol is started. A second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) capable of displaying the display of the second display mode as execution information is provided. The effect control means can control the display of the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variation display of the symbol, and the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows by starting the variation of the symbol. In addition, a recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is started as a feasible first time. Recognition that the effect can be executed, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner for a period different from the first time. A second time in which the possible display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and a stop display in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of columns. A case where a stop effect can be executed by a third time in which the aspect (second display mode) can be executed, and a predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) that gradually improves the degree of expectation is executed, and the above-mentioned predetermined There are cases where the effect is not executed and the display is stopped and displayed with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of columns (variation patterns 1A and 1B), and there are cases where the predetermined effect is executed and cases where the predetermined effect is not executed. In the second time when the predetermined effect is executed, the execution time of the second time is different from that of the first effect (variation end suggestion effect, effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-1) of the predetermined mode. Vibration, etc.) and the first effect It is possible to execute a second effect (such as a variation end suggestion effect, a glitter of the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-2) in a mode different from that of the above, and the first hold display means becomes the first by the start of the change of the symbol. The decrease display (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) is started from the memory number to the second memory number, and the second hold display means reduces the number from the first memory number to the second memory number (hold icon display). In the first time before the completion of the hold icon in the area (moving to the center of the adjacent display unit), the third effect (FIG. 44 (b)) in a mode different from the first effect and the second effect. )-(D) can be performed (enlargement / reduction of the effect symbol 70a), and during the display of the specific number (for example, three) of the second hold display means, which is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When the signal of the start of fluctuation of the symbol (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted and the fluctuation is performed. The production is started, and the second hold display means displays a number (for example, two) one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number of the second display modes and the execution information. The gist is that it is possible to display. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 24th configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from the above, and a first hold display means for displaying the hold storage stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode. (1st hold number display area 70E, 2 hold number display area 70F) and the hold memory are displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and the variable display of the symbol is started. The effect is provided with a second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) capable of displaying the display of the two display modes as execution information. The control means executes the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) in a plurality of rows on the display means during the variation display of the symbol, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the effect symbol is displayed. Can be controlled to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows by starting the variation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed as the recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) that can be recognized as the first time that can be executed, which is different from the first time. A recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of columns and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner during the period (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, a second time in which the temporary stop before the end of the fluctuation can be executed, and a third time in which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. There are cases where the stop effect can be executed and the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) in which the recognizable display mode is executed a plurality of times during one change of the symbol is executed or not executed. When the execution is performed, the execution time of the second time is lengthened as compared with the case where the execution is not performed, and the stop display is likely to be performed by the specific effect symbol in the stop display mode, and the last recognizable display in the predetermined effect. The first aspect in which the embodiment is performed In 2 hours, the first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and the second effect of a mode different from the first effect (variation end suggestion effect, It is possible to execute the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 51-2, etc.), and the first hold display means is reduced from the first storage number to the second storage number (1 is subtracted) by the start of fluctuation of the symbol. (Update to the hold number) is started, and the change display (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) to the execution information of the second hold display means from which the variation effect is started is completed. In the previous first time, a third effect (enlargement / reduction of the effect symbols 70a in FIGS. 44 (b) to (d)) different from the first effect and the second effect can be executed. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the second hold display means, which is three more than the predetermined number (for example, one), the signal for starting the fluctuation of the symbol (holding number) in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the designation command, the special symbol designation command, the special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted and the variation effect is started, and the second hold display means is 1 more than the specific number. The gist is that it is possible to display the predetermined number of the second display modes and the execution information without displaying a small number (for example, three). With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 25th configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal from the above, and the first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first reserved number display area 70E, the second reserved number display area 70F) and the reserved storage are displayed in a second aspect different from the first aspect, and the variation display of the symbol is started in the second aspect. The effect control means includes a second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) capable of displaying the display of the above as execution information. , The variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) can be displayed and controlled on the display means during the variation display of the symbol, and the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows by starting the variation of the symbol. , The start effect can be executed as the first time in which the recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of the change) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner can be executed. This is a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner for a period different from the first time. A second time in which the variation end suggestion effect (FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) can be executed, and a stop display mode (second) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of rows. The stop effect can be executed by the third time during which the display mode) can be executed, and the stop display mode is the first display mode (variation pattern 1A) in which the stop display is stopped and displayed with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of columns. ~ 1C non-reach loss) and a second display mode (reach loss of variation patterns 2A to 3C) in which two of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed with the common effect symbol, and the effect control means is described above. When the stop display mode is the second display mode, the execution time of the second time is lengthened and the expectation level is improved before the execution of the recognizable display mode as compared with the case of the first display mode. Predetermined production ( In the second time, which is the second display mode, the first effect of the predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and It is possible to execute a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect, and a display image is displayed every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. When the first time is started by reducing the reserved memory by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol, the reserved memory displayed by the second reserved display means starts from the first stored number. The hold displayed by the first hold display means rather than the frame update timing at which the reduction display to the second storage number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area moves to the center of the adjacent display unit) is completed. The timing at which the memory completes the reduction display (update to the reserved number subtracted by 1) from the first stored number to the second stored number is earlier, and the effect control means is a predetermined number (for example, 1). While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the second hold display means, which is three more than one), a signal for starting fluctuation of the symbol (hold number designation command, special symbol) in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the designated command (designated command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted and the fluctuation effect is started, and the second hold display means is one less than the specific number (for example,). The display is performed with a number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number without displaying the number (3), and then the predetermined number of the display of the second aspect and the execution information are displayed. The gist is that it can be done. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 26th configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first reserved number display area 70E, the second reserved number display area 70F) and the reserved memory are displayed in a second aspect different from the first aspect, and the variable display of the symbol is started in the second aspect. The effect control means includes a second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, second hold icon display area 70D) capable of displaying the display of the above as execution information. , The effect symbol is predetermined when the display means executes the variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) in a plurality of rows during the variation display of the symbol and the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol. It is possible to control so as to stop and display the specific effect symbol, and it is recognized that the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows by starting the fluctuation of the symbol, and that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The start effect can be executed with the possible recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), temporary stop at the start of fluctuation) as the feasible first time, which is a period different from the first time. Therefore, a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of columns and that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-). 2. The second time in which the temporary stop before the end of the fluctuation) can be executed, and the third time in which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. The stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is the first display mode (non-reach loss of variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the stop display is stopped and displayed with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of rows, and the specific effect symbol. There is a second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the stop display mode is displayed, and the effect control means is in the case of the first display mode when the stop display mode is the second display mode. In comparison, the second time In the second time, which is the second display mode, it is easy to execute a predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) that increases the degree of expectation before the execution of the recognizable display mode while lengthening the execution time between them. A first effect of a predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of the effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and a second effect different from the first effect (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-2). (Glittering of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) and) can be executed, and the display image can be updated every time the predetermined frame update timing is reached. When the first time is started, the second hold display means is more than the frame update timing at which the change display to the execution information (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The timing at which the hold memory displayed by the first hold display means completes the reduction display (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) from the first memory number to the second memory number is earlier, and the effect While the control means is displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the second hold display means, which is three more than the predetermined number (for example, one), the control means starts the fluctuation of the symbol in which the hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted and the fluctuation effect is started, and the first hold display means is the identification. While displaying the predetermined number without displaying the number two less than the number (for example, two), the second hold display means is one less than the specific number (for example, two). The display is performed with a number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number without displaying the number (3), and then the predetermined number of the display of the second aspect and the execution information are displayed. The gist is that it can be done. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 27th configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). An icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D) are provided, and the effect control means can display and control a variation effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) on the display means during the variation display of the symbol. Yes, there is a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows by the start of variation of the symbol, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (FIGS. 44 (b) to (b) to (Fig. 44 (b)). The start effect can be executed as the first time in which d) and the temporary stop at the start of the fluctuation) can be executed, and the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows in a period different from the first time. A recognizable display mode in which it is possible to recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (variable end suggestion effect, FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation). The stop effect can be executed by 2 hours and the 3rd time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows can be executed. There are a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second display mode (reach loss of fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C), and the effect control means has the stop display mode as the second display mode. In the case of, as compared with the case of the first display mode, during the execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, the first effect of the predetermined mode (variation end suggestion effect, effect symbol of FIG. 51-1). (Vibration of 70a, etc.) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) different from the first effect are easily executed and recognized in the variation effect. When the possible effect pattern is deviated from the predetermined position When a signal for starting fluctuation of the symbol (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the effect symbol is displayed at the predetermined position with the start of the variation effect. It is possible to change the display from the above, and the display image can be updated every time the predetermined frame update timing is reached, and the first time is started by reducing the reserved memory by one due to the change of the symbol. After that, when the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means decreases from the first memory number to the second memory number and the hold memory increases during the display, the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means is displayed. Even before the frame update timing at which the reduction display from the first storage number to the second storage number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area moves to the center of the adjacent display unit) is completed, The gist is that the hold memory displayed by the first hold display means starts an increase display (update to the hold number added by 1) from the second memory number to the first memory number. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 28th configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). The effect control means includes an icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D), and the effect control means executes variable display of a special symbol (special symbol TZ) in a predetermined display area of the display means, and also performs the special symbol (special symbol TZ) variation display. It is possible to execute a confirmation display mode in which the symbols can be confirmed, and during the variable display of the special symbol, the effect symbols (effect symbol 70a) are arranged in a plurality of rows in an area different from the predetermined display area of the display means. ) Is executed, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, it is possible to control so that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, and the variation of the symbol is started. A recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of columns and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the start of the variation). The start effect can be executed as the first time in which the temporary stop of time) can be executed, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the effect symbol can be recognized in a period different from the first time. A second time and a plurality of recognizable display modes (variable end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of fluctuation) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The stop effect can be executed by the third time during which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the columns can be executed, and the stop display mode is the specific effect symbol. Is a first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) that is stopped and displayed in the different effect symbols, and a second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C) that is stopped and displayed in the specific effect symbol. There is the above-mentioned production control hand When the stop display mode is the second display mode, the step shows the first effect of the predetermined mode during the execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, as compared with the case of the first display mode. (Fluctuation end suggestion effect, vibration of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1, etc.) and second effect (fluctuation end suggestion effect, glitter of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2, etc.) in a mode different from the first effect. ), And when the stop display mode is the first display mode and is displayed by the first storage number in the first hold display means, as compared with the first storage number. The execution time of the confirmation display mode of the special symbol is the same as when it is displayed with a small second memory number, and the first time is reduced by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol. When the second hold display means is started and then the hold memory increases during the change display (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) to the execution information, the second hold display means Before the timing at which the hold memory to be displayed completes the reduction display from the third memory number to the fourth memory number (the hold icon in the hold icon display area moves to the center of the adjacent display unit). Also, the gist is that the hold memory displayed by the first hold display means starts an increase display (update to the hold number added by 1) from the fourth memory number to the third memory number. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the 29th configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. A main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and the main control means in a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display is performed with a predetermined specific symbol. An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from, and a first hold display means (first hold display means) for displaying a hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect. The first hold number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, which displays the hold memory in a second mode different from the first mode). The effect control means includes an icon display area 70C and a second hold icon display area 70D), and the effect control means executes variable display of a special symbol (special symbol TZ) in a predetermined display area of the display means, and also performs the special symbol (special symbol TZ) variation display. It is possible to execute a confirmation display mode in which the symbols can be confirmed, and during the variable display of the special symbol, the effect symbols (effect symbol 70a) are arranged in a plurality of rows in an area different from the predetermined display area of the display means. ) Is executed, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, it is possible to control the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, and the variation start of the symbol. A recognizable display mode (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d), in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of columns and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the start of the variation). The start effect can be executed as the first time in which the temporary stop of time) can be executed, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the effect symbol can be recognized in a period different from the first time. A second time and a plurality of recognizable display modes (variable end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of fluctuation) that can recognize that the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The stop effect can be executed by the third time in which the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all the columns can be executed, and the stop display mode is each of the plurality of columns. The first display mode (non-reach loss of fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) that is stopped and displayed with the different effect symbols, and the second display mode (big hit of fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C) that is stopped and displayed with the specific effect symbol. There is the above performance When the stop display mode is the first display mode, the output control means has a predetermined mode during execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, as compared with the case of the second display mode. One effect (variation end suggestion effect, vibration of effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-1) and a second effect (variation end suggestion effect, effect symbol 70a in FIG. 51-2) different from the first effect. Etc.), and when the stop display mode is the first display mode and is displayed in the first storage number in the first hold display means, and in the first storage number. The execution time of the confirmation display mode of the special symbol is the same as when it is displayed with a larger number of second storages, and the reserved memory is reduced by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol, so that the first When the time is started and the hold memory is increased during the execution of the change of the symbol, the hold memory displayed by the second hold display means is increased from the third memory number to the fourth memory number (hold icon). The holding memory displayed by the first holding display means is from the third storage number to the fourth storage number, rather than the timing at which the expansion of the hold icon additionally displayed in the display area to the normal size) is completed. The gist is that the timing at which the increase display (update to the reserved number added by 1) is completed is earlier. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ The gaming machine having the thirtieth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems displays the symbols (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols are displayed in advance. When the stop display is performed with the specified specific symbol, it is possible to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and the first state (normal game state, low probability game state) and the first state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the first state. In a gaming machine that can be controlled into two states (specific gaming state, high-accuracy gaming state), the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the signal from the main control means An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the corresponding effect, and a first hold display means (first hold) for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition in the first display mode. The number display area 70E, the second hold number display area 70F) and the second hold display means (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon) for displaying the hold memory in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the establishment of the display area 70C, the second hold icon display area 70D) and the start condition, the hold memory based on the establishment of the first start condition (entry of the game ball into the first start port 45) is first reserved. The effect control means is provided with a storage means that can be stored as a memory and can store the reserved memory as a second reserved memory based on the establishment of the second starting condition (entry of a game ball into the second starting port 47). Can execute the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol TZ) in the predetermined display area of the display means, and can execute the confirmation display mode in which the special symbol can be confirmed, and the variation of the special symbol. When a variable effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) is executed in a plurality of rows in an area different from the predetermined display area of the display means during display, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol. , The effect symbol can be controlled to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of columns, and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the first time when the recognizable recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 51-1, FIG. 51-2, temporary stop before the end of the variation) is executed, and in all of the plurality of rows. The stop effect can be executed by the second time for executing the stop display mode (second display mode), and the effect mode during the first time is different between the first state and the second state. In the first state, the effect symbol is the specific effect. When the symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol, it is displayed with the first storage number in the first hold display means and the second storage number which is larger than the first storage number. When the execution time of the confirmation display mode of the special symbol is the same and the first hold storage is increased in the second state, the first hold display means is the third from the third storage number. 4 The increase display to the storage number (update to the hold number added by 1) is performed, and the second hold display means increases the increase display from the third storage number to the fourth storage number (first hold storage). (Additional display in the hold icon display area) is not performed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the last variation effect in the second state, which is the specific gaming state, is completed, and the game returns to the first state, which is the normal gaming state). The gist is that it is possible. With such a game machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting condition is satisfied, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, a special game is executed. Some of such game machines display a reserved image corresponding to the undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal reserved image into a reserved image in a display mode suggesting that the variation effect may have a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the above-mentioned game machine in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on the above, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A determination means (main CPU 110a) for performing the determination and a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the determination right, and the slave control means has a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the reserved right. Is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), and a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change)) is sent to the effect means (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. ) An effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing a notification sound), and the image display means is configured to update an image to be displayed on the display means at a predetermined frame update timing. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is performed from the main control means. The first change effect (change effect at the time of winning) executed at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the transmitted command indicating that the right has occurred (starting port winning designation command), and the transmission from the main control means. With the second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the command (variation pattern specification command) indicating the result of the determination. The effect executing means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and the notification effect is performed at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. I am trying to finish. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on the above, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A determination means (main CPU 110a) for performing the determination, a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and a variation control means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol based on the result of the determination. The subordinate control means has an image display means (display / voice control unit 140) that displays a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the held right on the display means (first image display device 70). ), And an effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for causing the effect means (voice output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the progress of the game. The image display means is configured to update the image to be displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing, and changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to cause the change effect, and the change effect is to receive a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating that the variation display of the symbol transmitted from the main control means is started. A predetermined frame update timing after receiving a first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at a corresponding frame update timing and a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The effect executing means includes the second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) to be executed in, at the frame update timing when the first change effect is started. The notification effect is started, and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on the above, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A determination means (main CPU 110a) for performing the determination, a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and a variation control means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol based on the result of the determination. (Main CPU 110a), and the slave control means has a pre-judgment pending image (hold icon) corresponding to the reserved right and the right after the determination is made for the right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) for displaying the corresponding post-determination hold image (corresponding icon) on the display means (first image display device 70), and an effect means (voice output device 9) in the progress of the game. ) Is provided with an effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means is described every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. The image to be displayed on the display means is updated, and the pre-judgment hold image or the post-judgment hold image is converted into a pre-judgment special hold image or a post-judgment special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to be changed, and the change effect responds to a command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the variation display of the symbol starts. A predetermined frame after receiving the first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing and the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The effect executing means includes a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the update timing, and the effect execution means updates the frame at which the first change effect is started. The notification effect is started at the timing, and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. The second case is when changing to a reserved image. The rate at which change effects are executed is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on the above, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The subordinate control means includes a determination means (main CPU 110a) for performing the determination and a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding a predetermined number of the determination rights, and the slave control means holds a hold image (hold) corresponding to the reserved right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) that displays an icon) on the display means (first image display device 70) and a predetermined notification effect (icon generation) on the effect means (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. An effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing (change) notification sound) is provided, and the image display means updates an image to be displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is suspended. The first change effect executed at the frame update timing according to the command (start opening prize designation command, variation pattern designation command, special symbol memory designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the rights is changed. (Change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) and a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means are executed at a predetermined frame update timing. The display mode of the special hold image includes the second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01), and the display mode of the special hold image is the first display mode (blue character icon) and the first display mode. It has a second display mode (red character icon) that is more likely to perform the special game than the first display mode, and the effect executing means has the notification effect at the frame update timing when the first change effect is started. Is started, the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the second change effect is executed more than when the first change effect is executed. The time is more likely to change to the second display mode, and the first change effect is present. When the number of the reserved rights is changed to the second display mode, the special game is played when the number of the reserved rights is a second number larger than the first number than when the number is the first number. I try to be more likely to do it. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "special hold image" and "special hold image before judgment" are those in which the shape is changed from the normal hold icon, the color is changed, and the color indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot around the hold icon. One that displays an effect, one that displays a character showing the expectation of winning a jackpot around (nearby) the hold icon, and a character image (for example, "SP") that suggests an effect to be executed around (near) the hold icon. , "Pseudo-ren", etc.) are included.

In addition, the "special hold image after judgment" is an image in which the shape is changed from the normal icon, a color is changed, and an effect of a color indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed around the icon. A character image indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed around (nearby) the icon, and a character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ream") suggesting an effect to be executed around the icon. ) Is included.

Further, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Further, the "second display mode" includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

Further, the "post-judgment hold image" and the "post-judgment special hold image" are displayed from the start to the end of the variation effect, displayed only for a predetermined period after the start of the variation effect, and the variation. The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the production includes those whose display is erased.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3>
In the conventional game machine, the determination information acquired by the satisfaction of the acquisition condition is stored as a hold memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute a variable effect based on this. In such a game machine, an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories is performed, or an execution image corresponding to the hold memory in which the variation effect is executed is displayed. There was something that made the player grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (main control means 110) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the start port). A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage are provided. The slave control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of the hold storages, and the like. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms). The display image is updated every time, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means can execute the reduced display of the first reserved information and the reduced display of the second reserved information, and the first 2 Decrease display of the first hold information (to the hold number subtracted by 1) rather than the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing when the update) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (main control means 110) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start port). A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage. The slave control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of the hold storages, and the like. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms). The display image is updated every time, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means executes the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variation effect is started (the relevant). A frame in which a change display that changes to an icon) can be executed, and a change display of the second hold information to the execution information (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first hold information (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (main control means 110) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the start port). A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage are provided. The slave control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of the hold storages, and the like. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms). The display image is updated every time, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means can execute the reduced display of the first reserved information and the reduced display of the second reserved information, and the reserved information can be executed. When the number of memories increases, the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information can be executed, and the number of the hold memories increases during the decrease display of the second hold information. In this case, even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed, the increase display of the first hold information is performed. (Update to the reserved number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (main control means 110) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start port). A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage. The slave control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of the hold storages, and the like. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms). The display image is updated every time, and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means executes the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variable display is started (the relevant). It is possible to execute a change display that changes to an icon), and when the number of reserved memories increases, it is possible to execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information. 2 When the number of hold memories increases during the change display of the hold information, the reduction display of the second hold information (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the timing, the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (main control means 110) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the start port). A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage are provided. The slave control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of the hold storages, and the like. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms). The display image is updated every time, and when the number of the reserved memories increases, the information display means can execute the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information, and the variation If the number of hold memories increases during the execution of the effect, the frame update that increases the second hold information display (enlargement of the hold icon additionally displayed in the hold icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (main control means 110) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage are provided. The slave control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of the hold storages, and the like. The information display means capable of displaying the second hold information (hold icon) indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the hold memories is provided, and the variation effect execution means of the special game during the execution of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) that is expected to be executed, and the information display means increases the display of the first hold information when the number of hold memories increases. , The increase display of the second hold information can be executed, and when the number of the hold memories increases during the execution of the specific effect, the increase display of the first hold information (to the hold number added by 1). Update) is executed, but the increase display of the second hold information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed). ing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (main control means 110) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the start port). , A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold memory, and a normal game state. A game state control means capable of controlling a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the slave control means displays a variation effect according to the result of the determination as an image display means (image). The variable effect execution means that can be executed by the display device), the first hold information (hold number) indicating the number of the hold storage, and the second hold information (hold icon) indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the hold storage. The information display means can execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storages increases. Yes, the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the first start port) as the first hold storage, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied (second start). The determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth) is stored as the second hold memory, and when the number of the first hold memories increases in the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold information (1). (Update to the added hold number) is executed, but the increase display of the second hold information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the last variation effect in the specific game state is completed and the normal game state is restored). It has become like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

<Contents of the invention described in the present embodiment 4>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the variation effect of the effect symbol is displayed as an image based on the determination result. It is common to run it on a device. In such a game machine, there are a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns of the effect symbol, and a variation effect of the effect symbol in the selected variation pattern is imaged by selecting from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result. It was displayed on a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the mode of the variable effect of the effect pattern, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game.

◆ As the first configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means can recognize and swing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows during the variation display of the symbol (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 124-2 (). c), the first time for executing FIG. 126-2 (d)) and the second for executing the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows. The stop effect can be executed depending on the time, and the stop display mode is the first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the stop display is stopped and displayed with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of columns, and the plurality of columns. There are two states (variation patterns 2A to 3C) that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol that is common to at least two, and in the first state and the second state, the execution time of the first time is In addition to being different, it is possible to control so that the mode of a predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) in the effect symbol during the first time is different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) that can control the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means has a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized and can be swung in all of a plurality of rows during the variation display of the symbol (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 124-2 (). c), the first time for executing FIG. 126-2 (d), and the common display mode (the first display mode) in which the effect symbol common to two of the plurality of columns is stopped and displayed during the variable display of the symbol. The stop effect can be executed by the second time for executing the first display mode), and the common display mode is the case where the first variation effect (variation patterns 2A to 2C) is executed and the first variation effect. There are cases where the second variation effect (variation patterns 3A to 3C) with high expectation for the execution of the special game is executed, and there are cases where the first variation effect is executed and the case where the second variation effect is executed. It is possible to control so that the execution time of the first time is different and the mode of the predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) in the effect symbol during the first time is different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of rows by the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) that can control the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. During the variation display of the symbol, the effect symbol is recognizable and swingable in all of the plurality of rows, and the recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIGS. 124-2 (c), (e), The stop effect can be executed by the first time when FIG. 126-1 (d), FIG. 126-2 (d), and FIG. 127 (e) are executed, and a predetermined effect (battle) that gradually improves the degree of expectation. There are cases where the effect (effect, revival effect, pseudo-continuous effect) is executed and cases where the predetermined effect is not executed, and there are cases where the predetermined effect is executed and cases where the predetermined effect is not executed. It is possible to control so that the execution time of one hour is different and the mode of the predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) in the effect symbol during the first hour is different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of rows by the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means can recognize and swing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows during the variation display of the symbol (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 126-1 (). d), the first time for executing FIG. 127 (e)) and the second time for executing the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows, are used for the stop effect. Is possible, and a predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect, revival effect) in which the recognizable display mode is executed a plurality of times during one change of the symbol is executed, and a case where the predetermined effect is not executed. , And when the predetermined effect is executed, the execution time of the first hour is lengthened as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is not executed, and the process is stopped at the specific effect symbol in the stop display mode. It can be controlled so that it is easily displayed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means can recognize and swing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows during the variation display of the symbol (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 124-2 (). c), the first time for executing FIG. 126-2 (d)) and the second time for executing the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows. The stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is common to the first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the stop display is performed with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of columns, and at least two of the plurality of columns are common. There are a second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) that is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol, and the second state prolongs the execution time of the first time and makes the execution time of the first time longer than that of the first state. It is possible to control so that a predetermined effect (battle effect, revival effect, pseudo-continuous effect) for improving the degree of expectation is easily executed before the execution of the recognizable display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means has a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized and can be swung in all of a plurality of rows during the variation display of the symbol (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 124-2 (). The first time for executing e), FIG. 126-1 (d), and FIG. 127 (e), and the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns are executed. The stop effect can be executed by the second time, and the stop display mode includes the first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the stop display is performed with different effect symbols in each of the plurality of rows, and the specific effect. There is a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) that is stopped and displayed by a symbol, and the second state has a longer execution time of the first time and is recognizable as compared with the first state. It is possible to control so that predetermined effects (battle effect, revival effect, pseudo-continuous effect) for improving the degree of expectation are easily executed before the display mode is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means executes a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, etc.) in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of columns and can be swung during the variation display of the symbol. The stop effect can be executed by one hour and the second time for executing the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows, and the stop display mode is the first. There are one state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second state (variation pattern 2A to 3C) different from the first state, and the second state is recognizable as compared with the first state. It is possible to control so that a predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) is easily executed during the execution of the display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the eighth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means executes a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, etc.) in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows and can be swung during the variation display of the symbol. The stop effect can be executed for one hour and the second time for executing the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns. There are a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) that is stopped and displayed with the effect symbol different from the specific effect symbol, and a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) that is stopped and displayed with the specific effect symbol. The second state can be controlled so that a predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) is more easily executed during the execution of the recognizable display mode as compared with the first state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means executes a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, etc.) in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows and can be swung during the variation display of the symbol. The stop effect can be executed by one hour and the second time for executing the stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns. There are a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the effect symbols that are different in each of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed, and a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific effect symbols are stopped and displayed. The first state can be controlled so that a predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) is less likely to be executed during the execution of the recognizable display mode as compared with the second state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the tenth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the above, during the variable display of the symbol, the variable effect of the effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed. Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol is provided. The variation effect control means executes a recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, etc.) in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of a plurality of rows and can be swung during the variation display of the symbol. The stop effect can be executed in one hour, and the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state can be controlled so that the mode of the predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) in the effect symbol during the first time is different. .. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5>
Conventionally, a board case for accommodating a control board of a game machine is configured by combining two case members. The control board was housed in a storage space formed by combining the control board storage portions of these case members (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167124). However, in the conventional game machine, for example, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts against the control board or the board case remain, and there is a problem that the interest of the player may be lowered.

◆ As the first configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted and the control board are housed to improve light transmission. A control means (assembly 2P) having a storage portion (board case 1700), a seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, and the seal portion. The first information display unit (statement area 1570, code unit 1712, information display unit 1713) for displaying information about the control means and the seal unit in the storage unit are provided at different positions. A second information display unit (date mark unit 1720) for displaying information related to the control means is provided, and the first information display unit is a plurality of colored regions (regions in which the light transmission is reduced). A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the printing unit 1711, the plurality of areas 1575) and the first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and the second colored area different from the first colored area. Therefore, it is a gist that the control board housed in the storage portion has a visible visible region (peeping portion 1574) in which the control board can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as described above, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 are displayed. Although the information is different from the date of manufacture, it has a predetermined time-series relationship. Specifically, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 is always a new date as compared with the manufacturing date displayed on the date mark portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector confirms the consistency between the opening date of the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the manufacturing date of the date mark portion 1720 to perform fraudulent acts such as illegal replacement of the control board. It can be easily confirmed.

◆ As a second configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted and the control board are housed to improve light transmission. A control means (assembly 2P) having a storage portion (board case 1700), a first seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, and the above. The first information display unit (code unit 1712, information display unit 1713) and the second information display unit (description area 1570) provided in the first seal unit for displaying information related to the control means, and the storage unit. A second seal portion (opening prohibition seal portion 1730) attached at a position different from that of the first seal portion, and a third information display unit provided on the second seal portion for displaying information on the control means. (Code unit 1732), the first information display unit and the third information display unit include an identification display of a predetermined mode that can be read by a terminal, and the second information display unit is said to be the same. A plurality of colored regions (printed section 1711, a plurality of regions 1575), which are regions in which light transmission is reduced, and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region are used. The third portion has a visible region (peeping portion 1574) in which a predetermined character is not attached to the region and the control board housed in the storage portion can be visually recognized. In the information display unit, the distance from the virtual surface obtained by extending the control board in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the storage unit in the thickness direction of the storage unit is the first information display from the virtual surface. The gist is that it is provided so that it is different from the distance to the part.

According to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the seal portion 1730 as described above, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 and the information display unit 1713 of the seal portion 1720 is prohibited from opening. It is associated with the information displayed on the seal portion 1730. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board by confirming the consistency between the information of the seal unit 1720 and the information of the opening prohibition seal unit 1730. Further, in the cord portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, the distance from the virtual surface obtained by extending the control substrate 1705 in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 is set from the virtual surface. The seal portion 1720 is provided so as to be different from the distance to the cord portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713. Therefore, the inspector can compare the cord portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, the cord portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 to be provided on the same plane at the same height. Information between the code unit 1732 of the opening prohibition seal unit 1730, the code unit 1712 of the seal unit 1720, and the information display unit 1713 can be easily visually recognized, and fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board can be easily confirmed.

◆ As a third configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above problems, a control means (assembly 2P) having a control board (control board 501, 1705) and a storage unit (board case 1551, 1700) for accommodating the control board. ), A first information display (character 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (character 1374 of the identification display 523) provided in the control means, and the storage is provided in the thickness direction of the storage portion. The gist is that the distance from the top surface of the unit to the first information display is different from the distance from the top surface of the storage unit to the second information display.

According to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the character 1371 and the character 1372 in the identification display 523 as described above, the character 1371 and the character 1372 are arranged in different layers in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed so that the distances from the top surface of the substrate case 1700 are different. Since such an identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, for example, the identification display 523 is removed as compared with the case where the entire identification display 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It's difficult. Further, since the identification display 523 is provided at a position where the distance from the top surface of the substrate case 1700 in the thickness direction is different, that is, the identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove than when it is present. With such an identification display 523, if it is removed by fraud, it is polished or scraped to form conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700, so that the inspector finds fraudulent activity. It can be said that this is easy and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Further, since the characters 1371 and the character 1372 in the identification display 523 have no overlapping portion and are separated from each other in the plan view, when the assembly 2P is visually recognized from the back side of the game machine, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are separated from each other. It is possible to take a bird's-eye view of both the characters 1372 and easily confirm the presence or absence of fraudulent acts on the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ As a fourth configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above problems, a control means (assembly 2P) having a control board (control board 501, 1705) and a storage unit (board case 1551, 1700) for accommodating the control board. ), A first information display (character 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (character 1374 of the identification display 523) provided in the control means, and the control is provided in the thickness direction of the control board. The gist is that the distance from the predetermined surface of the substrate to the first information display is different from the distance from the predetermined surface of the control board to the second information display.

According to the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the character 1371 and the character 1372 in the identification display 523 as described above, the character 1371 and the character 1372 are arranged in different layers in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Since the characters 1371 in the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 in the layer 1382 are formed in a predetermined surface of the control board 1705 (for example, a virtual surface obtained by extending the control board 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction). ) Are formed so that the distance from them is different. Since such an identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, for example, the identification display 523 is removed as compared with the case where the entire identification display 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It's difficult. Further, since the identification display 523 is provided at a position where the distance from the predetermined surface of the control board 1705 is different, that is, it is divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. It is harder to remove than that. With such an identification display 523, if it is removed by fraud, it is polished or scraped to form conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700, so that the inspector finds fraudulent activity. It can be said that this is easy and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Further, since the characters 1371 and the character 1372 in the identification display 523 have no overlapping portion and are separated from each other in the plan view, when the assembly 2P is visually recognized from the back side of the game machine, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are separated from each other. It is possible to take a bird's-eye view of both the characters 1372 and easily confirm the presence or absence of fraudulent acts on the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ As a fifth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a control board (control board 501, 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted and the plurality of electronic components can be visually recognized. A storage unit (board cases 1551, 1700) that houses the control board and has light transmission, and a first information display unit (code units 1572, 1712, information) that is attached to the storage unit and for displaying predetermined information. A display unit 1573, 1713) and a second information display unit (description area 1570) are provided, and the first information display unit includes a first aspect including specific information and a second aspect different from the first aspect. The second information display unit is made of a material having light transmission, and is a plurality of colored regions (printed units 1571, 1711, a plurality of regions 1575) which are regions in which the light transmission is reduced. ), The first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and the second colored region different from the first colored region, and the region where the control board can be visually recognized (peeping portion 1574). The gist is to have.

In the case of the game machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as described above, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1712 and the character string of the information display unit 1713 are associated with each other. And information containing the same specific information is displayed in different modes. Therefore, fraudulent activity against the code unit 1712 is difficult, and even if the information in the information display unit 1713 is tampered with, the inspector can easily check the consistency with the code unit 1712 to check for fraudulent activity. It is possible to confirm and deter fraudulent activities. Further, in the seal unit 1720, since the peep unit 1574 is formed between the code unit 1712 and the information display unit 1713 and the description area 1570, the control board 1705 is illegally performed as described above. Since it can be easily confirmed whether or not it has been damaged, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud.

◆ As a sixth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling the game, a first light-transmitting case portion (1803) containing the substrate, and the substrate. A storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used for a game, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, and a case portion provided with light transmission. The seal includes a seal portion (1560) formed of a material having a property, and a plurality of colored regions (1575) printed on the seal portion to reduce light transmission in the seal portion. The unit has a second light transmittance that is lower than the first light transmittance and that allows the electronic component to be visually recognized, and has a first colored region and the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions. It is possible to look into the electronic component contained in the case portion by the second light transmission, which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached to the second colored region different from the region. The gist is to have a peep section (1574).

Since the peep section is provided, the inspector can confirm the electronic component through the peep section. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the electronic component has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the viewing portion is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved. Further, since a plurality of colored regions are provided, for example, the name of the inspector and the date when the substrate case is opened can be described. In addition, the inspector can also describe in the area the date on which it is confirmed whether or not the control board has been tampered with. Further, since the peep portion is provided between the areas, the area is more conspicuous than the case where only the area is provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the inspector to confirm the characters and the like written in the area. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved. Further, since the light transmission of the seal portion is lower than the light transmission of the case portion, it becomes difficult to forge the seal portion, and it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts such as replacing the entire case portion with an illegal substrate. As a result, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As the 7-1th configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling the game, a case portion (1803) having light transmittance containing the substrate, and the substrate A storage means (502) provided for storing data used for a game, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, and a first surface of the case portion. , A seal portion (1560) made of a light-transmitting material, and a position display portion formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the case portion and serving as a mark for a position to attach the seal portion. (541) and a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are printed on the seal portion and have reduced light transmission in the seal portion, and the seal portion is included in the plurality of colored regions. It is possible to look into the electronic component contained in the case portion, which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region of the above and the second colored region different from the first colored region. The gist is to have a possible peep section (1574).

In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification display along the position display unit. Therefore, in the case of mass-producing game machines, the manufacturer can attach an identification display at the same position among a plurality of game machines. Since the identification display is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the position display portion is formed on the inner surface side and the seal portion is attached to the outer surface, the position display portion does not interfere with the seal portion no matter where the seal portion is attached, so that the attachment is not hindered. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is fraudulent and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display unit, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the substrate case. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As the configuration of the 7th-2nd game machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, the board (501) for controlling the game, the case portion (1803) having light transmittance containing the board, and the board. A storage means (502) provided for storing data used for a game, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, and a first surface of the case portion. A seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material, and a convex portion or / or a concave portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion on the first surface of the case portion, the seal. A position display portion (541) that serves as a mark of a position for mounting the portion, and a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and have reduced light transmission in the seal portion are provided. The seal portion is a portion in which a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and the second colored region different from the first colored region, and the seal portion is formed on the case portion. The gist is to have a viewing portion (1574) capable of viewing the contained electronic component.

In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification display along the position display unit. Therefore, in the case of mass-producing game machines, the manufacturer can attach an identification display at the same position among a plurality of game machines. Since the identification display is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the position display portion which is a convex portion or / or a concave portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion is provided on the outer surface to which the seal portion is attached, for example, when the substrate case is touched by a hand, etc. It is possible to prevent the seal from peeling off as compared with the case where the seal portion is attached to the flat surface of the above. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is fraudulent and the inspection takes time. However, since the seal portion is protected by such a position display portion, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the substrate case. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

As an eighth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a board (501) for controlling the game, a storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used for the game, and the above. A first light-transmitting storage unit provided on a substrate and storing a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the storage means, and the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. (1803), a first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information, and the storage unit are provided. A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) for displaying specific information is provided, and the first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are displayed including at least an identification display meaning the same content. The second information identification unit is formed by a second light transmission that is lower in light transmission than the first light transmission and that allows the electronic component to be visually recognized, and is formed by the second light transmission. Between a plurality of colored regions (1575), which is a region in which light transmission is lowered rather than sex, and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. It has a peep section (1574), which is a portion to which a predetermined character is not attached and can peek at the electronic component stored in the storage section by the second light transmission. The gist is that

In this case, the inspector can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been performed by confirming the storage unit on which the same identification display is displayed and the storage unit. In addition, even if the storage means is replaced with another storage means due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can determine whether or not the identification display attached to the storage means and the storage unit is the same. , You can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity was committed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As the configuration of the game machine No. 9-1 for solving the above problems, a board (501) for controlling the game and a storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used for the game. A light-transmitting storage unit (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, which stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. 1803), a first information identification unit (1561, 1595) provided in the storage unit to display specific information, and a second information identification unit provided in the first surface of the storage unit to display specific information. Units (1560, 1572, 1573), a third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information, and a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the storage unit. The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include a position display unit (541) formed in the above and serving as a mark of a position for mounting the second information identification unit, and the first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are identifications having at least the same contents. The second information identification unit is displayed including the display, and the second information identification unit is formed of a material having light transmittance, and is a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions in which the light transmission is reduced, and the plurality of colored regions (1575). A portion of the colored region in which a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and the electronic component housed in the storage portion. The gist is to have a peep section (1574) capable of peeking through.

◆ As the configuration of the 9th-2nd game machine for solving the above problems, a board (501) for controlling the game and a storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used for the game. A light-transmitting storage unit (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, which stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. 1803), a first information identification unit (1561, 1595) provided in the storage unit to display specific information, and a second information identification unit provided in the first surface of the storage unit to display specific information. A unit (1560, 1572, 1573), a third information identification unit (1562, 1598) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information, and a second information identification unit on the first surface of the storage unit. The first information identification unit and the first information identification unit and the first information identification unit are provided with a convex portion and / or a concave portion formed on the outer edge and a position display unit (541) that serves as a mark of a position for mounting the second information identification unit. The 3 information identification unit is displayed including an identification display meaning at least the same content, and the second information identification unit is formed of a material having light transmission, and is a region where the light transmission is reduced. A portion in which a predetermined character is not attached between a plurality of colored regions (1575) and a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. Therefore, it is a gist to have a viewing unit (1574) capable of viewing the electronic component stored in the storage unit.

◆ As a tenth configuration of a game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling a game, a case portion (1803) having light transmission including the substrate, and a case portion (1803) provided on the substrate are provided. , A storage means (502) for storing data used for a game, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, and a case portion provided with light transmission. A first seal portion (1561) and a second seal portion (1560) formed of the material to be provided are provided, and the second seal portion has a lower light transmittance than the first seal portion and the electrons. A plurality of colored regions (1575) in which the component is formed by a predetermined visible light transmission and the light transmission is lower than the predetermined light transmission, and the plurality of colored regions. The electronic component contained in the case portion, which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region of the above and the second colored region different from the first colored region, is the predetermined. The gist is that it has a peep section (1574) that can be peeked by light transmission.

According to the present invention, since the light transmission of the second seal portion is lower than the light transmission of the first seal portion, it becomes difficult to forge the second seal portion, and the case portion is illegally replaced with an invalid substrate. It can be difficult to act. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

As the eleventh configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a board (501) for controlling the game, a storage means (502) provided on the board for storing data used for the game, and the above. A light-transmitting storage unit (1803) provided on a substrate for storing a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the storage means and the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. The first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and the second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573), which are provided in the storage unit and are made of a light-transmitting material and display specific information. A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information, and the first information identification unit and the third information identification unit mean at least the same contents. The second information identification unit is displayed including the identification display, and the second information identification unit has a lower light transmittance than the first information identification unit and is formed by a predetermined light transmission that allows the electronic component to be visually recognized. A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions in which light transmission is lower than the predetermined light transmissibility, and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. A peeping portion (1574), which is a portion between the colored region and which is not provided with a predetermined character, and which allows the electronic component stored in the storage portion to be peeped by the predetermined light transmission. The gist is that it has.

◆ As a twelfth configuration of a game machine for solving the above problems, a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502,595) provided on the substrate (501) and the control unit are included. A case portion (3P, 1003,1103,1203,1303,1551) including a plurality of members (511) is provided, and the substrate (501) is provided in the case portion (3P, 1003,1103,1203,1303,1551). The member (45P) constituting the mounting surface side of the electronic component (502,595) in the above is a substrate as an identification display (523) associated with the identification display (521,522) attached to the control unit. It is a gist that the first display (1371) and the second display (1372), which are different in distance from the substrate (501) in the thickness direction of (501), are attached.

In this case, since the identification display of the board and the identification display of the case part are related, the identification display of the board and the identification display of the case part are different if the board is replaced illegally. , Makes it easier for inspectors to detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, the identification display is divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, and the identification display is formed only on one layer. It can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if this identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped to form conspicuous damage to the case part, so fraudulent acts by the inspector. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration of a game machine for solving the above problems, a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502,595) provided on a mounting surface of the substrate (501), and the control unit. A control means having a case portion (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including a plurality of members (511) including the control means, and an identification display (520) attached to the control means and associated with each other. As a result, it has a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) attached so that the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) is different, and also in the thickness direction of the substrate (501). It is a gist to have a third display (1375) attached so that the distance from the mounting surface is the same as the second display (1372).

In this case, since the identification display of the control means is related to each other, if the board is replaced illegally, the identification display of the board and the identification display of the case portion become different, which is illegal by the inspector. It becomes easier to find the act. Further, when the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, the identification display is divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, and the identification display is formed only on one layer. It can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if this identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped to form conspicuous damage to the case part, so fraudulent acts by the inspector. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration of a game machine for solving the above problems, a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502,595) provided on the substrate (501) and the control unit are included. A case portion (3P, 1003,1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including a plurality of members (511) is provided, and the case portion (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) includes the control unit. As the identification display (523) related to the identification display (521,522) attached to the above, the first display (1371) and the second display (1372) are attached so that the positions of the substrate (501) in the thickness direction are different. ), And the control unit is referred to as the identification display (520) associated with the identification display (523) attached to the case unit (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551). The gist is that the third and fourth indications are attached so that the positions of the substrates in the thickness direction are different.

In this case, since the identification display of the board and the identification display of the case part are related, the identification display of the board and the identification display of the case part are different if the board is replaced illegally. , Makes it easier for inspectors to detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, the identification display is divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, and the identification display is formed only on one layer. It can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if this identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped to form conspicuous damage to the case part, so fraudulent acts by the inspector. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a control board (501) for controlling the game and storage contents provided on the control board (501) and used for controlling the game are stored. The storage means (502), a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the control board (501) and different from the storage means (502), the storage means (502), and the plurality of electronic components (595). Is provided in a light-transmitting storage unit (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) and the storage unit (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) for storing the components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. A third information identification unit (523,1561) and a second information identification unit (1560) for displaying specific information, and a third information identification unit (502) provided in the storage means (502) for displaying specific information. The control board (502) includes an information identification unit (522,1562), and has a first region (1900a) and a second region (1900b) having a mode different from that of the first region (1900a). The second region (1900b) is provided with a fourth information identification unit (1902) for displaying specific information, and the first information identification unit (523,1561) and the third information identification unit (522). , 1562) is displayed including at least the same identification display (529, 1595, 1596), and the first information identification unit is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the storage means can be visually recognized, and the second information identification unit is displayed. The information identification unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, and has a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions in which the light transmissibility is reduced, and a first colored region (1575) among the plurality of colored regions. A portion between the 1575) and the second colored region (1575) different from the first colored region, which is not provided with a predetermined character, and looks into the plurality of electronic components stored in the storage portion. The gist is to have a peep section (1574) for the purpose.

In this case, since at least the same identification display is attached to the first information identification unit of the storage unit and the third information identification unit of the storage means, the inspector can use the storage unit and the storage unit on which the same identification display is displayed. It is possible to easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been carried out. Further, since the first information identification unit is attached so as to have an angle at which the attachment location of the storage means can be visually recognized, it is attached to the storage means and the storage unit even when the storage means are exchanged due to fraudulent acts, for example. By determining whether or not the identification indications are the same, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Further, since the second information identification unit of the storage unit is provided with a peep unit, the inspector visually recognizes a plurality of electronic components contained in the storage unit through the peep unit, and these plurality of electronic components are visually recognized. It is possible to confirm whether or not the electronic component has been fraudulent. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been performed on a plurality of electronic components contained in the storage unit, as compared with a game machine in which a viewing unit is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. Then, in such a second information identification unit, since a predetermined character can be described in a plurality of colored regions, the predetermined character is placed in a transparent portion without a colored region that reduces light transmission. It is easier for the inspector to confirm the content of the information in characters than the one described. Furthermore, in such a second information identification unit, since a transparent viewing unit is provided between the plurality of colored regions, compared with a unit in which only the plurality of colored regions are provided side by side. The colored area becomes conspicuous, and it is easy for the inspector to check the characters and the like written in the colored area. In this way, the inspector can easily detect the fraudulent activity and suppress the occurrence of the fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As the 16th configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted and the control board are housed to improve light transmission. It is provided with a storage portion (board case 1700) having a storage portion (board case 1700), a control means (assembly 2P) having the storage portion, and a seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and made of a material having light transmission. The seal portion includes a plurality of colored regions (printed portion 1711, a plurality of regions 1575), which are regions in which the light transmission is reduced, and a first colored region and the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions. A visible region (peeping portion 1574) in which a predetermined character is not attached to the second colored region different from the above, and the control board housed in the storage portion can be visually recognized. The control means is mounted so that some of the electronic components (electronic components 798) of the plurality of electronic components on the control board can be visually recognized via the visible region. It is a gist that at least one electronic component (information display 1750), which is different from the electronic component of the above, is mounted so that it can be visually recognized without going through the visible area.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the invention 16, some electronic parts such as the information display 1750 and the like can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that need to be visually recognized immediately and easily can be easily visually recognized, so that fraudulent activity can be easily confirmed. Further, since some of the electronic components that can be visually recognized without passing through the peep section 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the peep section 1574, they can be visually recognized without passing through the peep section 1574. It is possible to deter fraudulent activity against some possible electronic components. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visibility by opening the game board unit 12P of the game machine 1P, it is required to exert the above-mentioned effects.

◆ As the seventeenth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted and the control board are housed to improve light transmission. A control means (assembly 2P) having a storage portion (board case 1700), a seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, and the control substrate. A predetermined information display unit (information display 1750) for displaying predetermined value information related to the game is provided, and the seal unit is a plurality of colored regions which are regions in which the light transmission is reduced. (Printed section 1711, a plurality of areas 1575) and a portion of the plurality of colored areas in which a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored area and the second colored area different from the first colored area. The control board is housed in the storage unit and has a visible area (peeping unit 1574) in which the control board can be visually recognized, and the control means is among the plurality of electronic components in the control board. Some electronic components (electronic components 798) are mounted so as to be visible through the visible area, and the predetermined information display unit is mounted so as to be visible without passing through the visible area. The gist is that.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the invention 17, some electronic parts such as the information display 1750 and the like can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that need to be visually recognized immediately and easily can be easily visually recognized, so that fraudulent activity can be easily confirmed. Further, since some of the electronic components that can be visually recognized without passing through the peep section 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the peep section 1574, they can be visually recognized without passing through the peep section 1574. It is possible to deter fraudulent activity against some possible electronic components. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visibility by opening the game board unit 12P of the game machine 1P, it is required to exert the above-mentioned effects.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration of a game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling a game, a case portion (1803) having light transmission, which includes the substrate, and a case portion (1803) provided on the substrate are provided. A control means having a storage means (502) for storing data used for a game, and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, and the control means are different. The first display (1371) and the second display (1372) provided at predetermined locations, a seal portion (1560) provided in the control means and made of a light-transmitting material, and printing on the seal portion. A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced, are provided, and the first display and the second display are equipped with the storage means of the substrate. The distances from the side surface to the display of the first and second indications are different, and the seal portion is different from the first colored region and the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions. (2) It is a gist to have a viewing portion (1574) which is a portion between the colored region and which is not provided with a predetermined character and is capable of viewing the electronic component contained in the case portion.

In this case, since the first display and the second display are provided at predetermined positions of the control means and the distances from the storage means mounting surface of the board to the display of the first and second displays are different, the control means can be forged. It becomes difficult, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as replacing each control means with a fraudulent base. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

The control means includes a substrate, a case portion, a storage means, and an electronic component. Therefore, for example, the first display may be provided on the substrate and the second display may be provided on the case portion.

◆ As a nineteenth configuration of a game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling a game, a case portion (1803) having light transmittance containing the substrate, and a case portion (1803) provided on the substrate are provided. A control means having a storage means (502) for storing data used for a game, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, and a control means provided on the control means. A seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of colored regions (1575) printed on the seal portion and having reduced light transmission in the seal portion are provided. The first and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided on the storage means are displayed at different predetermined positions of the control means, and the storage means on the substrate is mounted. The distances from the side surface to the display of the first and second indications are different, and the seal portion is different from the first colored region and the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions. (2) It is a gist to have a viewing portion (1574) which is a portion between the colored region and which is not provided with a predetermined character and is capable of viewing the electronic component contained in the case portion.

◆ As a twentieth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a board (501) for controlling the game, a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for the game, and the above. A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means, and a light-transmitting storage unit (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. The first display (1371) and the second display (1372) provided at different predetermined positions of the control means, and the first information provided in the storage unit to display specific information. It includes an identification unit (1561, 1595), a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573), and a third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information. The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays is different between the first display and the second display, and the first information identification is performed. The unit and the third information identification unit are displayed including an identification display meaning at least the same content, and the second information identification unit is formed of a material having light transmission, and the light transmission is reduced. A predetermined character is attached between the plurality of colored regions (1575), which are the regions to be formed, and the first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and the second colored region different from the first colored region. The gist is that the portion is not provided and has a viewing portion (1574) capable of viewing the electronic component stored in the storage portion.

As the 21st configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a board (501) for controlling the game, a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for the game, and the above. A light-transmitting storage unit (1803) provided on a substrate for storing a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the storage means and the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. The control means having the above, the first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and the second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information, and the storage means. A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided and displaying specific information is provided, and the first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include an identification display meaning at least the same contents. The first and second displays (1371, 1372) displayed and related to the third information identification unit are displayed at different predetermined positions of the control means, and from the surface of the board on which the storage means is mounted. The distances until the first and second indications are displayed are different from each other, and the second information identification unit is formed of a material having light transmission, and is a plurality of regions in which the light transmission is reduced. A portion in which a predetermined character is not attached between the colored region (1575) and the first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and the second colored region different from the first colored region, the said. It is a gist to have a viewing unit (1574) capable of viewing the electronic component stored in the storage unit.

As a 22nd configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a board (501) for controlling the game, a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for the game, and the above. A light-transmitting storage unit (1803) provided on a substrate for storing a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the storage means, and the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner. A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 157, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information, and specific information provided in the storage means. The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include a third information identification unit (1562, 1596) for displaying, and the first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are displayed including at least an identification display meaning the same content, and the second information identification unit is displayed. The information identification unit is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the storage means can be visually recognized, and the second information identification unit is made of a material having light transmission, thereby reducing the light transmission. A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions and a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. It is a gist to have a viewing unit (1574) capable of viewing the electronic component stored in the storage unit.

In this case, since the mounting location of the storage means can be reliably seen, it is possible to prevent fraudulent use of the control board. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As the 23rd configuration of the game machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, the substrate (501) for controlling the game, the first case portion (1803) having light transmittance containing the substrate, and the substrate A first storage means (502) provided and storing data used for a game, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means, and the first case portion. A first seal portion (1560) provided and formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of regions printed on the first seal portion and having reduced light transmission in the first seal portion. A colored region (1575), a prize ball substrate (1811) capable of bidirectional communication with the substrate, a light-transmitting second case portion (1813) containing the prize ball substrate, and the prize ball substrate. A second storage means (1812) provided on the prize ball and storing data used for the prize ball, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball substrate and different from the second storage means, and the first In the second seal portion (1816) provided in the two case portions and made of a light-transmitting material, and in the region printed on the second seal portion to reduce the light transmission in the second seal portion. A plurality of second colored regions (1817) are provided, and a predetermined character is attached to the first seal portion between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region. It has a first peep portion (1574) that is not a portion and can peep into the electronic component contained in the first case portion, and the second seal portion has a second colored region. A second portion in which a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and the fourth colored region, and the electronic component included in the second case portion can be seen. It has a peep portion (1819), and the first seal portion and the second seal portion are characterized in that the electronic component is transparent and the light transmission is different from each other.

In this case, since the light transmission between the first seal portion related to the control board and the second seal portion related to the prize ball substrate is different, it becomes difficult to forge the first and second seal portions, and the entire case portion is an illegal substrate. It can make the fraudulent act of replacing with. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As a twelfth configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling the game, a first case portion (1803) having light transmittance containing the substrate, and the substrate A first storage means (502) provided and storing data used for a game, and a plurality of electrons provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means and mounted through holes on the substrate. A component (595), an effect board (1821) capable of unidirectional communication with the effect board, a second case portion (1823) having light transmissivity including the effect board, and an effect provided on the effect board. A second storage means (1822) for storing data used in the substrate, and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board, which are different from the second storage means and are surface-mounted on the board. The seal portion (1560) formed of a material having light transmittance is provided with a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions in which the light transmission is reduced.
A portion of the plurality of colored regions in which a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and the electronic component included in the electronic component is included. It has a peep portion (1574) capable of peeping, and the gist is that it is attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

In this case, since the handling of the seal portion is different between the first case portion of the control board and the second case portion of the effect board, it is difficult to forge the first and second case portions and the seal portion, and each case portion is illegal. The fraudulent act of replacing the board can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ As a 25th configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling the game, a first case portion (1803) having light transmissivity including the substrate, and the substrate A control means having a first storage means (502) provided and storing data used for a game, and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means. A prize ball substrate (1811) capable of bidirectional communication with the substrate, a light-transmitting second case portion (1813) containing the prize ball substrate, and a second case portion (1813) provided on the prize ball substrate and used for the prize ball. A prize ball means having a second storage means (1812) for storing the data to be stored, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball substrate and different from the second storage means, and the control means. The first display (1371) and the second display (1372) provided at different predetermined positions, and the first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and made of a light-transmitting material. A plurality of first colored regions (1575), which are printed on the first seal portion and have reduced light transmission in the first seal portion, and a plurality of first colored regions (1575) provided on the second case portion to transmit light. A second sealed portion (1816) formed of a material having the above, and a plurality of second colored regions (1817) which are printed on the second sealed portion and have reduced light transmission in the second sealed portion. The first display and the second display have different distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted until the first and second displays are displayed. The first sealed portion is a portion in which a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and is formed on the first case portion. The second sealing portion has a first peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the included electronic component, and the second sealed portion has a fourth colored region different from the second colored region and the second colored region. It has a second peeping portion (1819) capable of peeking at the electronic component contained in the second case portion, which is a portion not attached with a predetermined character between the two and the first case. The gist of the seal portion and the second seal portion is that the electronic component is transparent and has different light transmission properties.

◆ As the 26th configuration of the game machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, the board (501) for controlling the game, the first case portion (1803) having light transmission including the board, and the board. A control means having a first storage means (502) provided and storing data used for a game, and a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means. A prize ball substrate (1811) capable of bidirectional communication with the substrate, a light-transmitting second case portion (1813) containing the prize ball substrate, and a second case portion (1813) provided on the prize ball substrate and used for the prize ball. A prize ball means having a second storage means (1812) for storing the data to be stored, a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball substrate and different from the second storage means, and the first A first seal portion (1560) provided on the case portion and made of a light-transmitting material, and a region printed on the first seal portion to reduce the light transmission in the first seal portion. A plurality of first colored regions (1575), a second seal portion (1816) provided in the second case portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, and the second seal portion printed on the second seal portion. The first and second displays are provided with a plurality of second colored regions (1817), which are regions in which the light transmission is reduced in the two seal portions, and are related to the identification display (1562) provided in the first storage means. (1371, 1372) is displayed at different predetermined positions of the control means, and the distances from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means are mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different. The first seal portion is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the first case portion. It has a first peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component, and the second sealing portion has a second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region. The first seal portion has a second peep portion (1819) capable of peeking at the electronic component contained in the second case portion, which is a portion to which a predetermined character is not attached between the portions. The gist of the second seal portion is that the electronic component is transparent and the light transmission is different from each other.

◆ As the 27th configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling the game, a first case portion (1803) having light transmittance containing the substrate, and the substrate A first storage means (502) provided and storing data used for a game, and a plurality of electrons provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means and mounted through holes on the substrate. A control means having a component (595), an effect board (1821) capable of unidirectional communication with the substrate, a second case portion (1823) having light transmission including the effect board, and the effect. A second storage means (1822) provided on the substrate and storing data used for the effect and a second storage means provided on the effect board, which are different from the second storage means and are surface-mounted on the effect board. A directing means having a plurality of electronic components (595) and a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined positions of the control means are provided with the first display. The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays is different from the second display, and the second display is made of a material having light transmittance. The sealed portion (1560) is different from the plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions where the light transmission is reduced, and the first colored region and the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions. The second case portion has a peep portion (1574) which is a portion between the second colored region and which is not provided with a predetermined character and is capable of peeking through the contained electronic component. It is a gist that it was attached to the first case portion without being attached to.

◆ As the 28th configuration of the game machine for solving the above problems, a substrate (501) for controlling the game, a first case portion (1803) having light transmission, which includes the substrate, and the substrate A first storage means (502) provided and storing storage used for a game, and a plurality of electrons provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means and mounted through holes on the substrate. A control means having a component (595), an effect board (1821) capable of unidirectional communication with the substrate, a second case portion (1823) having light transmission including the effect board, and the effect. A second storage means (1822) provided on the substrate and storing the storage used for the effect, and a plurality of means provided on the effect board and different from the second storage means and mounted on the surface of the substrate. The first and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided in the first storage means are among the control means. It is made of a material having light transmissivity, in which the first and second indications are displayed at different predetermined locations and the distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the first and second indications are displayed are different. The seal portion (1560) has a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions in which the light transmission is reduced, and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a first colored region different from the first colored region. The second case portion has a peep portion (1574) which is a portion between the two colored regions and which is not provided with a predetermined character and can peep into the contained electronic component. The gist is that it was attached to the first case portion without being attached.

<Contents of the invention described in the present embodiment 6>
In a conventional game machine, a game machine capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information and executing the special game according to the result of the determination is common. Among such game machines, there are game machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the game machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. Member 74, effect button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. , The effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means operates the operation mode (operation) of the initial operation depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. Aspects, light emission modes, etc.) are made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) capable of being operated by the player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and a power source. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the operating means after the start of power supply. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission and performing the effect light emission of the operation means during the execution of the game is provided, and the control state of the game is initialized in the effect control means. The light emitting mode (light emitting mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is different between the case where the game is controlled and the case where the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. , The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. ), And the effect control means has an operation mode (number of steps and the number of steps) of the initial operation of the movable effect means, depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. The operation mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the operation of each step is the same, but the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The movable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means is used when the control state of the game is initialized. And the case where the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means. Is designed to be different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, it is advantageous for the player based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the power supply is stopped. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be restored to the previous state, and the variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the accompanying variable effect is provided, and the plurality of effect symbols include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that can identify each of the effect symbols. When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means as the first combination (for example, "135"), and controls the game. Is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means are used as a second combination (for example, "753"). Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 7>
In a conventional game machine, a game machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores the state before the power supply is stopped is common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine in which the initial operation of the movable effect means is performed after the start of power supply (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that a suitable initial operation may not be performed for the movable effect means.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes a control means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable effect means is returned to the first position. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes a control means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position, the movable effect means does not return to the first position. The initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable effect means returns to the first position and the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable effect means is The initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed without performing the operation. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. In the case of, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means. Is not done. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is initialized, and the second movable effect means is the first. When it is in the position, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable effect means. Is not performed, but the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of itself. The effect control means includes a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) having an overlapping portion in the game, and the effect control means is described at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is to be initialized. When the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and the first movable effect means is moved. When the effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, there are game machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the game machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest of the game is lowered. There was a problem that it could be done.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, it is advantageous for the player based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition in the game machine capable of playing the game. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the power supply is stopped. Variations of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be restored to the previous state and the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the effect is provided, and in the variable effect, the effect symbol that is displayed in the variable state is oscillated (temporarily stopped) and then statically displayed (temporarily stopped). (Stop display) is possible, and the effect control means is predetermined when the power supply stopped during the execution of the variation effect that swings and displays the effect symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. At the timing of (when the special figure stop designation command is received, when the customer waiting command is received), the effect symbol can be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into a starting port). Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed effect symbols, and the variable effect is provided with a reach state by some of the effect symbols. When the power supply stopped during the execution of the reach effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means includes a reach variation effect of displaying the formation and executing the reach effect. It is now possible to display the combination of the effect symbols on the display means in a stationary state, which is different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that formed and displayed the reach state when the special figure stop designation command is received and the customer waiting command is received). There is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 9>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, there are game machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the game machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest of the game. There was a problem that there was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The determination of the main control board 110), the initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped, and the determination means. According to the result, the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) is provided, and the state of the gaming machine is set. Is a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect without the hold memory, and an execution period of the variation effect with the hold memory. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, including the second state. The mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is restarted and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) when the power supply is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored is different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 10>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that performs a customer waiting effect by a display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the displayed effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means statically displays the effect symbol on the display means. When the predetermined period elapses, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the effect symbol is statically displayed after the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed, and the control state. It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting effect is executed different from the case where the effect symbol is statically displayed after the initialization of the above or after the restoration of the control state. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the game machine, and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 11>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that displays execution information corresponding to the determination information during execution of the variation effect on the display means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the game machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest of the game. There was a problem that there was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. An effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped and the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol is provided, and the effect control means causes the display means to perform the effect when the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the symbol, and to the determination information in which the variation effect is being executed in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. When the corresponding execution information (the icon) can be displayed and the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next step is performed from the end of the specific display. Until the variable display is started, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variation effect that has been executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 12>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, JP-A-2017-143904). reference). However, in the game machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest of the game may be lowered when the power supply stopped during the look-ahead notice production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the advance determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display is provided, and the effect control means has the variation effect a plurality of times based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a period of time, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the look-ahead notice effect is restored. It is possible to execute a notice effect different from the look-ahead notice effect (for example, an alternative notice effect) in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the suspension of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 13>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that executes a specific effect that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game is executed over a plurality of variable effects in stages (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017). -143904 (see). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest of the game may be lowered when the power supply stopped during the specific production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. It was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into a starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the advance determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display is provided, and the effect control means steps the degree of expectation that the special game is executed over a plurality of times of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the above, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is turned on. Although the specific effect can be executed in the variation effect executed after the stopped variation effect, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 14>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, a game machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each of the determination information for which the execution of the variation effect has not been completed. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the game machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the restart of the power supply is high. There was a risk of becoming.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a game machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the advance determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display is provided, and the effect control means includes the determination information and the variation effect for which the execution of the variation effect has not been completed. It is possible to display the identification information (the icon, the hold icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by gradually changing the display mode of the identification information. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests a certain degree of expectation, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (for example, a CD icon) and a second stage mode (for example, blue). The power supply that was stopped during the display of the identification information that includes the character icon) and the third stage aspect (red character icon) and changes to the third stage aspect in the second stage aspect is resumed, and the game When the control state is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 15>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that displays the number of pending storages, which is the determination information for which the determination has not been executed, in the display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the game machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved memories, which is a hobby of the game. There was a problem that it could decrease.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The determination of the main control board 110), the initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped, and the determination means. According to the result, the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) is provided, and the control state of the game is changed. When it is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second). Hold display 84Z) and a second display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) different from the first display area, each of which displays a hold display indicating the number of hold memories. When the power supply stopped in the state where the hold memory is present is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the hold display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. It will be possible.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 16>
In the conventional game machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A game machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that executes an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game is executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the game machine described in the above patent document, the interest of the game is enjoyed when the power supply stopped during the production suggesting the expectation that the special game is executed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. There was a problem that it could be reduced.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into a starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display, and a light emitting means (winning port lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes. The means can execute a change effect (ramp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the power supply stopped in the above is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (lights on or off in white) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as the lamp change effect being restarted even though the variation effect is not executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 17>
A conventional game machine is provided with a main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. Is common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined mode (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate from each other is not taken into consideration.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. Is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is specified from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. Etc.), it is possible to execute the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation) is specified from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect. When a command, a power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the main control means can execute the variable effect during the execution of the variable effect. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means can execute the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable effect means, and can also execute the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means. , When the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the number of processes, the operation mode of each process, etc.) is the same. However, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot) capable of executing an effect according to the signal by differentizing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the effect), the initial operation of the movable effect means can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the starting port). ), A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and an initial game control state after the start of power supply. The effect control means includes an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be changed to a state before the power supply is stopped, and the effect control means performs an initial operation (initial operation,) of the effect means. It is possible to execute the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display) of the movable effect means (initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display), and to determine the determination means. Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the effect symbol displayed in the variable display is shaken. It is possible to perform a dynamic display (temporary stop display) and then a static display (stop display), and the effect control means restarts the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that swings and displays the effect symbol. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol may be statically displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing (when the special figure stop designation command is received or when the customer waiting command is received) without swinging the effect symbol. Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing an effect according to the signal. ) Is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped are provided. The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The states include a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect in a state without the hold memory, and an execution period of the variation effect in a state where the hold memory is present. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means. The display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display during the return) when the power supply stopped during the two states is restarted and the state is restored to the first state or the second state is different from that of the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the effect, the initial stage It is possible to carry out the operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped are provided. The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the display means. When a predetermined period elapses after the effect symbol is statically displayed, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the effect symbol is displayed after the variation time of the variation effect elapses. It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting effect is executed different between the case where the static display is performed and the case where the effect symbol is statically displayed after the initialization of the control state or the restoration of the control state. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing an effect according to the signal. If so, it is possible to perform the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped are provided. The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) over the variable effect a plurality of times, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the advance notice effect different from the look-ahead advance notice effect (for example, in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the look-ahead advance notice effect) A predetermined signal (power-on designation command) is executed from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which an alternative notice effect) can be executed and an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. , Power recovery designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped are provided. The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and it is possible to execute the variation effect a plurality of times. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that indicates the degree of expectation that the special game is executed over the variable effect, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the specific effect can be executed in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it was suggested before the power supply was stopped. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power-on designation command,) is performed from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect corresponding to the signal can be executed without executing from the continuation of the stage. When the power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a light emitting means (winning port lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes and an operation in a predetermined mode. (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device) and acquisition conditions are satisfied. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) that can store the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (the entry of the game ball into the start port) as the hold storage, and the determination information, the player A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (big hit game), and a game control state is initialized after the start of power supply, or before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means includes an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state of the effect, and the effect control means performs the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) of the effect means, and the effect. It is possible to execute the effect operation of the means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and it is expected that the special game is executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. When it is possible to execute a change effect (ramp change effect) suggesting a degree, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is used. The main control during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) capable of controlling a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from a specific notification mode and executing an effect according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and responds to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the effect, the predetermined signal is received. It is possible to output a notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and the game is in progress. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect in a non-waiting state (customer waiting state), and receive a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect. If so, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. A sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a variation effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery) is executed from the main control means during the execution of the variation effect. When a designated command or the like) is received, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. A sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of the special game (big hit game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during the execution of the special game effect. When (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 18>
A conventional gaming machine is generally provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Among such game machines, there is a game machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued is not taken into consideration.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying an effect image (variable effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is provided. The effect control means can display a game standby screen (still display screen of the effect symbol) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the effect control means can display the game standby screen (still display screen of the effect symbol). If the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 19>
A conventional gaming machine is generally provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Some of such game machines execute abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not properly performed.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetism, etc.) is provided. Abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, etc.) is provided. , Radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and when the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the control means and the detection means are connected for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.). The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality, etc.) is provided. Notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality, etc.) is provided. (Notification, etc.) can be executed, and when the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period (30 seconds elapse, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continue executing the abnormality notification. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 20>
In the conventional game machine, based on the judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, and the game production according to the result of the determination is performed. The game machine to be executed is common. Some of such game machines are provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command (signal) from the main control means (for example). , JP-A-2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate from each other is not taken into consideration.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the determination result of the first determination information, and the first hold. The hold information (first hold icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase in the memory, and each of the hold information is shifted and displayed and reduced according to the decrease in the first hold memory. It is possible to cause the hold information to be produced (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect, and the hold information is the effect operation. While the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and a specific number (for example, three) of the reserved information is displayed, which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the first reserved memory is stored. When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display, which is the predetermined number, is received, the variation effect is started, and the specified number of the hold information is included. The hold information corresponding to the specific number of the above (the third hold icon from the icon display area side) is not shifted and displayed, and the hold information corresponding to the predetermined number (at least the first hold information from the icon display area side) is displayed. Hold icon) is displayed in shift. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols on the front surface of the background image based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold storages in the display area (image display device 70), and the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect. At this time, it is possible to cause the background image to perform an effect operation (scroll, change, etc.), and a predetermined number (for example,) of the plurality of effect symbols on which the background image is performing the effect operation is temporarily stopped. While displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the hold information, which is two more than one), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol) of the variation display in which the first hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When the designated command (designated command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, the hold information is displayed in a number one less than the specific number (for example, two), and then the predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed. The holding information of 1) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the determination result of the first determination information, and the first hold. It is possible to display numerical information indicating the number of memories in the first display area (sub first hold indicator 83), and hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold storages. It is possible to display in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect, a predetermined element (tactile image of the character) constituting the effect symbol , The symbol effect image) can be subjected to an effect operation (fluctuation operation, etc.), and the predetermined number (for example, one) of the plurality of effect symbols in which the predetermined element is performing the effect operation is temporarily stopped. While displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the hold information, which is two more than the other, the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol) of the variation display in which the first hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution of the variation effect is started, and the predetermined number without displaying the number information (for example, two) one less than the specific number in the first display area. While displaying the number information (for example, one) of the above, the predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed after displaying a number (for example, two) of the reserved information that is one less than the specific number (for example, two) in the second display area. ) Is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the determination result of the first determination information, and the first hold. It is possible to display the hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the memories in the display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect. It is possible to cause the hold information to perform an effect operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.), and the hold information is temporarily stopped for the plurality of effect symbols performing the effect operation, and is more than a predetermined number (for example, one). While displaying the holding information of three more specific numbers (for example, four), the start signal of the variation display (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure) in which the first hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the predetermined number (for example, one) of the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, one) is not displayed without displaying the number (for example, three) of the hold information one less than the specific number. Display pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols on the front surface of the background image based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold storages in the display area (image display device 70), and the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect. At this time, it is possible to cause the background image to perform an effect operation (scrolling, changing, etc.), and a predetermined number (for example,) of the plurality of effect symbols on which the background image is performing the effect operation is temporarily stopped. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the hold information, which is three more than one), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol) of the variation display in which the first hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When the designated command (designated command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the number of hold information one less than the specific number (for example, three) is not displayed and the number is smaller than the specific number. The holding information of two less numbers (for example, two) is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the holding information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the determination result of the first determination information, and the first hold. It is possible to display numerical information indicating the number of memories in the first display area (sub first hold display 83), and hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold storages. It is possible to display in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect, a predetermined element (tactile image of the character) constituting the effect symbol , The symbol effect image) can be subjected to an effect operation (fluctuation operation, etc.), and the predetermined number (for example, one) of the plurality of effect symbols in which the predetermined element is performing the effect operation is temporarily stopped. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the reserved information, which is three more than the specified number, the start signal of the variable display (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol) in which the first hold storage becomes the predetermined number. When the figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the predetermined number of the predetermined number of information (for example, two) is not displayed in the first display area, which is two less than the specific number. While displaying the number information (for example, one), the number two less than the specific number without displaying the reserved information which is one less than the specific number (for example, three) in the second display area. Display the above-mentioned pending information (for example, two), and display the pending information. Later, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variable display means that executes the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player are controlled. A state control means is provided, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on a determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. Yes, when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable effect, it is possible to perform an effect operation (fluctuation operation, etc.) of predetermined elements (character tactile image, symbol effect image) constituting the effect symbol. At the start of the variation display based on the determination result of the first determination information when the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped while the predetermined element is in the effect operation in the variation effect is deviated from the stop position. When a signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received, the effect symbol is displayed at the stop position and then the variation is displayed with the start of the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state, and can execute the variation effect of the second hold memory. The hold information (second hold icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase, and the hold information is shifted and displayed and reduced by one according to the decrease of the second hold storage. At the start of the variation display in which the second hold storage becomes the predetermined number during the display of the specific number (for example, 3) of the hold information, which is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When a signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the hold information (hold information corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the hold information) is started. The hold information (at least the first hold icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the predetermined number is shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon (third hold icon from the icon display area side). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state, and can execute the variation effect of the second hold memory. The hold information (second hold icon) corresponding to each can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the hold information is a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display in which the second hold memory becomes the predetermined number is received during the display of, the variation effect is performed. It starts, displays a number (for example, two) of the hold information one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number (for example, one) of the hold information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state, and can execute the variation effect of the second hold memory. It is possible to display the number information indicating the number in the first display area (sub second hold indicator 84Z), and the hold information (second hold icon) corresponding to each of the second hold storages is second. It is possible to display in the display area (image display device 70), and during the display of the specific number (for example, 3) of the hold information which is 2 more than the predetermined number (for example, 1), the second hold storage is stored. When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display, which is the predetermined number, is received, the variation effect is started, and the variation effect is started in the first display area. While displaying the predetermined number of the number information (for example, one) without displaying the number information (for example, two) one less than the specific number, one more than the specific number in the second display area. After displaying a small number (for example, two) of the holding information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the holding information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state, and can execute the variation effect of the second hold memory. It is possible to display the hold information (second hold icon) corresponding to each in the display area (image display device 70), and the specific number (for example, four) three more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display in which the second hold storage becomes the predetermined number is received during the display of the hold information, the said The variation effect is started, and the predetermined number (for example, one) of the hold information is displayed without displaying the number (for example, three) of the hold information one less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state, and can execute the variation effect of the second hold memory. It is possible to display the hold information (second hold icon) corresponding to each in the display area (image display device 70), and the specific number (for example, four) three more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display in which the second hold storage becomes the predetermined number is received during the display of the hold information, the said The variation effect is started, and the holding information is displayed in a number two less than the specific number (for example, two) without displaying the holding information one less than the specific number (for example, three). After that, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start port). , The variation display means that executes the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as the first hold storage, and the determination has not been made yet. A storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second hold storage, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) which is advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state, and can execute the variation effect of the second hold memory. It is possible to display the number information indicating the number in the first display area (sub second hold indicator 84Z), and the hold information (second hold icon) corresponding to each of the second hold storages is second. It is possible to display in the display area (image display device 70), and during the display of the specific number (for example, 4) of the reserved information, which is 3 more than the predetermined number (for example, 1), the second reserved storage. When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) of the variation display, which is the predetermined number, is received, the variation effect is started, and the variation effect is started in the first display area. While displaying the predetermined number of the number information (for example, one) without displaying the number information (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number, one is displayed in the second display area than the specific number. Without displaying a small number (for example, 3) of the reserved information, 2 less (for example, 2) of the reserved information than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, 1) of the said Display pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (entry into the first start port). Alternatively, as a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). , The variable display means that executes the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player are controlled. The effect control means includes a state control means, and in the specific gaming state, the effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the second determination information. When the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped in the variation effect is deviated from the stop position, the variation display start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special feature) based on the determination result of the second determination information. When the figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the effect symbol is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation effect, and then the variation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired when the start condition is satisfied (ball entry into the start port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as hold storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the determination information, and responds to the increase in the reserved storage. The hold information (hold icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the hold information is shifted and displayed according to the decrease in the hold storage, and one is displayed as the execution information (the icon). Is possible, and during the display of a specific number (for example, three) of the hold information, which is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one), the start signal of the variation display in which the hold storage becomes the predetermined number (for example, three). When the hold number designation command, the special symbol designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted and the fluctuation effect is started, and the specific number of the specific number of the hold information is selected. The holding information (1st and 2nd hold icons from the icon display area side) corresponding to the predetermined number is displayed without shifting the corresponding hold information (third hold icon from the icon display area side). The shift display is performed, and one of the shift displays is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired when the start condition is satisfied (ball entry into the start port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as hold storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the determination information, and corresponds to each of the reserved storages. The hold information (hold icon) can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the hold information for which the variable display has been started can be displayed as execution information (the icon), and a predetermined number (for example, the icon) can be displayed. While displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the hold information, which is two more than one), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command) of the variation display in which the hold memory becomes the predetermined number. , The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is deleted, the execution information is deleted, the fluctuation effect is started, and a number (for example, two) of the hold information, which is one less than the specific number, is displayed. Displays the predetermined number (for example, one) of the hold information and the execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired when the start condition is satisfied (ball entry into the start port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as hold storage. The effect control means is capable of executing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the determination information, and is a number indicating the number of reserved memories. Information can be displayed in the first display area (sub-hold indicators 83, 84, special figure hold number display areas 70E, 70F), and hold information (hold icon) corresponding to each of the hold storages can be displayed. 2 It is possible to display the hold information in the display area (hold icon display area) and display the hold information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), which is 2 more than a predetermined number (for example, one). While displaying a large number of specific numbers (for example, three) of the hold information, the start signal of the change display (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure change pattern designation) in which the hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When the command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the variation effect is started, and the number information (for example, two), which is one less than the specific number, is not displayed in the first display area. While displaying a predetermined number of the number information (for example, one), the predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed after displaying a number (for example, two) of the reserved information one less than the specific number in the second display area. 1) The hold information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired when the start condition is satisfied (ball entry into the start port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as hold storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the determination information, and corresponds to each of the reserved storages. The hold information (hold icon) can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the hold information for which the variable display has been started can be displayed as execution information (the icon), and a predetermined number (for example, the icon) can be displayed. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the hold information, which is three more than one), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command) of the variation display in which the hold memory becomes the predetermined number. , Special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the fluctuation effect is started, and the number of the reserved information (for example, three) smaller than the specific number is displayed. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the hold information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired when the start condition is satisfied (ball entry into the start port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as hold storage. The effect control means can execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the determination information, and corresponds to each of the reserved storages. The hold information (hold icon) can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the hold information for which the variable display has been started can be displayed as execution information (the icon), and a predetermined number (for example, the icon) can be displayed. While displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the hold information, which is three more than one), the start signal (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command) of the variation display in which the hold memory becomes the predetermined number. , Special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the fluctuation effect is started, and the number of the reserved information (for example, three) smaller than the specific number is displayed. The reserved information is displayed in a number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the reserved information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (effect) for controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means plays a special game (big hit game) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired when the start condition is satisfied (ball entry into the start port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, a variation display means for executing variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as hold storage. The effect control means is capable of executing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the determination result of the determination information, and is a number indicating the number of reserved storages. Information can be displayed in the first display area (sub-hold indicators 83, 84, special figure hold number display areas 70E, 70F), and hold information (hold icon) corresponding to each of the hold storages can be displayed. 2 It is possible to display the hold information in the display area (hold icon display area) and display the hold information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), which is 3 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1). While displaying a large number of specific numbers (for example, four) of the hold information, the start signal of the change display (hold number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure change pattern designation) in which the hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When the command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the variation effect is started, and the number information (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number is displayed in the first display area. While displaying a predetermined number of the number information (for example, one), the number of the reserved information one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed in the second display area, and the number of the reserved information is smaller than the specific number. The holding information of two less numbers (for example, two) is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the holding information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the means (effect control board 130), the main control means is a special game (big hit) based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the start condition (entry into the start port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means. Based on the determination result of the information, it is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol, and when the effect symbol temporarily stopped in the variation effect is deviated from the stop position, the variation display is performed. When the start signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the effect symbol is displayed at the stop position and then the variation is displayed as the variation effect starts. .. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a rock game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Further, the game machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games, but the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of the jackpot game. If this is the case, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability game state after all the jackpot games are completed and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is normally terminated. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

In addition, when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the game shifts to the low probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, the next time after the end of the jackpot game. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variation display of the second special symbol has priority. Although it is assumed that it is executed, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the scope of claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 ... Game machine, 60 ... 1st special symbol display (design), 61 ... 2nd special symbol display (design), 70 ... 1st image display device (display means), 70a ... Directed symbol (directed symbol), 70B ... 1st hold icon display area (2nd hold display means), 70C ... The icon display area (2nd hold display means), 70D ... 2nd hold icon display area (2nd hold display means), 70E ... 1st Hold number display area (first hold display means), 70F ... Second hold number display area (first hold display means), 110 ... Main control board (main control means), 130 ... Effect control board (effect control means).

Claims (1)

When the symbol is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player
The main control means that can control the progress of the game,
An effect control means capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means, and an effect control means.
A first hold display means for displaying the hold memory stored based on the establishment of the start condition according to the first aspect, and
A second hold display means for displaying the hold memory in a second aspect different from the first aspect is provided.
The effect control means
During the variable display of the symbol, when the display means executes the variable effect of the effect symbol in a plurality of rows and the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the effect symbol is displayed with a predetermined specific effect symbol. It can be controlled to display a stop,
By starting the variation of the symbol, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows, and the recognizable display mode capable of recognizing that the effect symbol is being displayed in the variable display is started as the first time that can be executed. Is feasible and
It is possible to execute a recognizable display mode in which the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows and the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner for a period different from the first time. Second time and
The stop effect can be executed by the third time in which the stop display mode in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns can be executed.
The stop display mode is
There is a first display mode in which the effect symbol is different from the specific effect symbol and is stopped and displayed, and a second display mode in which the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed.
The effect control means
When the stop display mode is the second display mode, the first effect of the predetermined mode and the first effect of the predetermined mode are performed during the execution of the recognizable display mode in the second time, as compared with the case of the first display mode. The second effect, which is different from the first effect, is easy to execute.
When the effect symbol is recognizable in the variation effect, the background image of the effect symbol can be produced.
The display image can be updated every time the predetermined frame update timing is reached.
When the first time is started by decreasing the reserved memory by one due to the fluctuation of the symbol, and then the reserved memory is increased while the second reserved display means is displaying the change to the execution information, the second The hold storage displayed by the first hold display means is displayed even before the frame update timing at which the reduction display from the first storage number to the second storage is completed. Starts an increase display from the second memory number to the first memory number,
The effect control means
When the background image is performing an effect operation and the effect symbol is recognizable, and while a specific number of the second hold display means, which is three more than a predetermined number, is displayed, the hold memory is the predetermined number. When the signal of the start of fluctuation of the symbol is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the fluctuation effect is started.
The second hold display means is
The feature is that it is possible to display a number two less than the specific number without displaying one less than the specific number, and then display the predetermined number. A game machine to play.

Images